1651SM & 1661SMC Operator Handbook R2.5.1 & R1.5.1

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

Y 1

07

955.100.562 TQZZA

RELEASED

/3AL 36668 AAAA TQZZA

4

4

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALETHIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

1651SM Rel. 2.5.11661SM-C Rel.1.5.1Version ’C2’ on TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)

– No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 442– DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du –ks): 14.260 kBytes

INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

– STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING– COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:

HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:

No pagine(facciate)

numeratenumbered(facciate)

No pages da from a to

TARGHETTE - LABELS

frontespiziofront

2

955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07manualemanual

436 1/436 436/436

ALLEGATI DI UNITÀ (MSZZQ)Vedere lista da pagina:See list from page:

No documenti MSZZQNo documents MSZZQ

UNIT PRESETTING DOCUMENTS (MSZZQ)433 33

TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: 438

TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 219

WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY

• The documents MSZZQ cited in section ’UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST’ are stored in PDAS.• Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.• Source file: ALICE 6.10• PDF file retrieved from PD1 must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 4.0 at least.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

Y 2

07

955.100.562 TQZZA

RELEASED


4

4

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALETHIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

ALCATEL OPTICS GROUPDislocazione

Autori

VIMERCATE

:

Dominio

1651SM2.5.1&1661SMC1.5.1

Divisione

VERSION ’C2’ ON

Rubrica

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

TipoCodici di Distribuzione Interno Esterno

::::

TNDLINE TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS SDHSYNCHRONOUS HIGH ORDER MUX/LINE1651SM 2.5.1&1661SM–C 1.5.1 TECH.HDBK

:

C.FAVERO

Approvazioni

NomeApp.

App.Nome

G.CAPRIOLI

E.CORRADINI

INFORMAZIONI EDITORIALI

– ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 6.10• sistemazione ’toc’ e ’figlist’

955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.073AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

07

1651SM Rel. 2.5.11661SM-C Rel.1.5.1

Version ’C2’ on

622 Mbit/s Add–Drop Multiplexer2.5 Gbit/s Compact Add–Drop Multiplexer

TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

Y 3

07

955.100.562 TQZZA

RELEASED


4

4

1651SM Rel. 2.5.11661SM-C Rel.1.5.1

Version ’C2’ on


TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

VOL.1/1

1651SM Rel. 2.5.11661SM-C Rel.1.5.1

Version ’C2’ on


TECHNICAL HANDBOOK 955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

VOL.1/1

1651SM Rel. 2.5.11661SM-C Rel.1.5.1

Version ’C2’ on622 Mbit/s Add–Drop Multiplexer 2.5 Gbit/s Compact Add–Drop Multiplexer

955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1

1651SM Rel. 2.5.11661SM-C Rel.1.5.1

Version ’C2’ on622 Mbit/s Add–Drop Multiplexer 2.5 Gbit/s Compact Add–Drop Multiplexer


1651SM Rel. 2.5.11661SM-C Rel.1.5.1

Version ’C2’ on622 Mbit/s Add–Drop Multiplexer

2.5 Gbit/s Compact Add–Drop Multiplexer


All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

Y 4

07

955.100.562 TQZZA

RELEASED


4

4

FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO – END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT

955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

Technical Handbook

Alcatel1651SM & 1661SM-C

1651SM Rel.2.5.1622 Mbit/s Add–Drop Multiplexer

1661SM-C Rel.1.5.12.5 Gbit/s Compact Add–Drop Multiplexer

Version ’C2’ on

955.100.562 K Ed.07 3AL 36668 AAAA Ed.07

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

1

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1651SM 2.5.1 & 1661SM–C 1.5.1 TECH.HDBK

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HANDBOOK GUIDE 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 General information 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Handbook applicability 13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Product-release handbooks 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Handbook Structure 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Handbook configuration check 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.3 Notes on Ed.02 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.4 Notes on Ed.03 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.5 Notes on Ed.04 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.6 Notes on Ed.05 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.7 Notes on Ed.06 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5.8 Notes on Ed.07 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS. 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Safety 19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 First aid for electric shock 21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Safety Rules 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2.1 General Rules 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5 Risks of Explosions 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR

01 971006 G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE S. SCANABISSI ITAVE

06 000316 SC00031602 G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE F. MAZZARELLA ITAVE

00101607 SC00100201 G.CAPRIOLI ITAVE C.FAVERO ITAVE

1651SM2.5.1&1661SMC1.5.1VERSION ’C2’ ONTECHNICAL HANDBOOK

E.CORRADINI

E.CORRADINI

E.CORRADINI

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

2

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 General Norms – Installation 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.3 General Norms – Maintenance 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD) 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Handbook supply to Customers 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Handbook Updating 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) 50. . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5 Customer documentation supply on CD–ROM 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD–ROM 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.3 CD–ROM identification 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4 CD–ROM updating 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DESCRIPTIONS 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 GENERAL 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Introduction to the Equipment 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Insertion of the Equipment into the Network 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.1 Configuration 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.2 Application 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Equipment front view (New Mechanical Practice) 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Equipment part list 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Units Front View 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Access Module front view 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 General description 97. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1.1 STM–4 Aggregates sub–system 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 STM–16 Aggregate sub–system 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3 Connection sub–system 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.4 Tributary Sub–system 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.5 Automatic Protections Sub–system 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.6 Synchronizing sub–system 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.7 Auxiliary and Overhead Sub–system 151. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.8 Control sub–system 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.9 Power Supply Sub–system 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2 Unit description 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 2 Mbit/s Tributaries 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 3x34Mbit/s TRIB 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.4 34/2 Tran. Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.5 3x45Mbit/s TRIB 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.6 DVB Tributary 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

3

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.7 140/STM1 Switch Tributary Unit 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.8 Optical STM1 Tributary units 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.9 Connection Card unit 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.10 Matrix unit: Full Matrix Unit & 16x16 Matrix Units 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.11 STM4 Aggregate unit 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.12 STM–16 Aggregate unit 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.13 AUX/EOW Unit 243. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.14 Clock Reference Unit 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.15 Equipment Controller SMEC 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.16 Power Supply unit 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.17 DS Futurebus Termination sub–unit 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.18 Alarm Interface Access Module 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.19 Qx & Synchronism Access Module 266. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.20 Qx 10 BT & Synchronism Access Module 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.21 Power and Housekeeping Access Module 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.22 Power and Housekeeping Access Module/2 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.23 Auxiliary Access Module 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.24 Tributary Access Module sub–unit 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 General Characteristics 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1.1 Electrical and optical safety 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Unit Characteristics 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.1 STM–4 Aggregate units 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 STM–16 Aggregate units 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Example of a link specification using 1661 SMC with L–16.2 JE3 Aggregate , a 15 dBmBooster and a Preamplifier unit. 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Optical Tributary units 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5 140/STM1 Switch Tributary 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.6 3x34 Mbit/s TRIB. 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.7 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB. 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.8 DVB TRIB. 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.9 21x2 Mbit/s Trib. 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.10 21x1.5 Mbit/s TRIB. 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.11 Clock Reference Units 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.12 AUX/EOW units 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3 Power Supply Characteristics 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Alarm Characteristics 297. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Mechanical Characteristics 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Environmental conditions 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6.1 Climatic for operating conditions 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.2 Storage 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6.3 Transportation 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INSTALLATION 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 INSTALLATION 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Unpacking and Warehousing 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1.1 General 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Unpacking 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 Warehousing 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2 Mechanical Installation 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Subrack insertion into the rack 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Mounting the Union Duct for the fiber–guide duct 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

4

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.2.3 Mechanical Structure 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Electrical and Optical Installation 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.1 Protection ground connections 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Electrical Tributary connections 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Qx & Synch. Interface Access Module 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 Alarm Interface Access Module Connections 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.5 Auxiliary Data Channel Connections 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.6 DVB Tributaries Connections 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.7 STM4, STM1 Optical Connections 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.8 STM–16 Optical Connections and pass–through connections 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.9 IECB connection to/from DROP SHELF 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.10 Interface F connections for local P.C. 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.11 Power and Housekeeping Access Module Connections 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TURN–ON, TEST AND OPERATION 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 INITIAL TURN–ON, TESTS AND OPERATION 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 General safety rules 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 General 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Setting Options 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Instruments and Accessories 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Local Checks 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.5.1 Check on Protection Ground Connections and Optical Connection 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.2 Power supply checks 370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.3 Lamp Test 370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.4 Aggregate Tx optical power check 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.5 Multi–demultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the electrical Tributaries 374. . . . . . . . . 6.5.6 Multi–demultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the DVB Tributaries 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.7 Check on the receiver sensitivity 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.8 Check on the efficiency of the optical protection (ALS) 380. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.9 Test on Tx optical power transmitted by the Optical 155Mbit/s Tributary 382. . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.10 Multi–demultiplexing and AIS tests on the optical 155Mbit/s tributary 384. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.11 Check on the 64 Kbit/s auxiliary channels 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.12 Check on the V11 auxiliary channels 388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.13 STM–4 Aggregate APS Protection check 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.14 Tributary EPS Protection Check 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.15 CRU’s EPS Protection check 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.16 Full Matrix EPS protection check 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.17 Check on External free running synchronism 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5.18 Remote Alarms check 402. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.6 Check on the Link 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.1 Multi–demultiplexing check on the link 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.2 Transit (pass–through) check on the link 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3 TU path–protection check on a ring connection 408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.4 Check on the EOW channel 408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.7 Operation 410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.1 Engineering Order Wire channel 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.2 Download of the equipment software release 412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.3 Craft terminal–managed equipment 412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MAINTENANCE 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7 MAINTENANCE 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 General safety rules 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

5

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

7.2 Maintenance Aspects 416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Instruments And Accessories 416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Routine Maintenance 417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.4.1 Routine Maintenance every year 417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Corrective Maintenance (Trouble/Shooting) 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Set of spare parts 419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.6.1 Suggested Spare Parts 419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.2 General rules on spare parts management 419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6.3 Particular rules on spare parts management 419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7.7 Repair Form 419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDICES 421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION 423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

6

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURESFigure 1. Labels for units with stiffening bar 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2. Labels for units without stiffening bar 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3. Labels for units with heat–sink. 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4. Labels for units with optical interfaces 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5. Labels for units with no speces on the front cover 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6. Subrack labels 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7. Modules’ labels 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 8. Label identifying label on catalogue 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9. Label specifying serial No. 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10. ETSI mapping 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11. SDH network structure 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12. ALCATEL Synchronous System 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 13. Terminal multiplexer 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 14. Dual terminal multiplexer 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 15. Add/Drop Multiplexer 59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 16. Point–to–point links 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 17. Linear drop–insert 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 18. ”HUB” STM–1 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 19. WDM applications 61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 20. Ring structure 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 21. Unidirectional broadcasting 62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 22. Front view of the 1651 SM/1661 SM–C – (New Practice Shelf) 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 23. Access points : 2/1.5 MBit/s and Tran Smux Tributaries 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 24. 34, 45 MBit/s, Switchable and DVB Tributary 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 25. Access points :Optical Tributaries 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 26. Access points: Matrices 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 27. Access points: STM–4 Aggregates 86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 28. Access points: STM–16 HM1 Aggregates 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 29. Access points: CRU, AUX–EOW, DS Future bus Termination 88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 30. Access Points: Power Supply and Equipment Controller SMEC2 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 31. Access Module front cover plate – Auxiliary, Battery, Alarm Access Modules 90. . . . . . . . . Figure 32. Access Module front cover plate – Qx Interface & Sync. Access Module. 91. . . . . . . . . . . Figure 33. Access Module front cover plate – Qx 10BT Interface & Sync. Access Module. 92. . . . . . Figure 34. Access Module front cover plate – 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module. 93. . . . . . . . . . . Figure 35. Access Module front cover plate – 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module. 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 36. Access Module front cover plate – 3x34/45 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module. 95. . . . . . . . Figure 37. Access Module front cover plate – 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module. 96. . . . . . . . Figure 38. General Block diagram 98. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 39. Block diagram of the Tributary and Aggregate units 99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 40. Connection with STM–4–Aggregate (1651 SM) 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 41. Connection with Connection Card 105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 42. Cross–connection with Full Matrix 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 43. Cross–connection with STM–16 Aggregate (1661 SM–C) 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 44. 1+1 EPS connection for 140 Mb/s or STM1 electrical trib. 1 and 2 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 45. 1+1 EPS connections for 3x34 Mb/s trib. 1 and 2 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 46. 1+N EPS connections for 2/1.5 Mb/s trib. 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 47. 1+N EPS connections, 140 Mbit/s or electrical STM1 trib. 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 48. 1+N EPS connections, 34 Mb/s trib. 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 49. 1+N EPS connections, 34/2 Trans.Mux & 5x2M 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

7

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Figure 50. Tributary EPS operation 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 51. Full Matrix EPS 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 52. Single Ended MS Trial Protection (SL–APS) 131. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 53. Typical ring network with SNCP (PPS) 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 54. Drop and Continue D/C W INS W 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 55. Drop and Continue 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 56. Drop and Continue – 1st failure 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 57. Drop and Continue – 2nd failure 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 58. 2F MS SPRING Connection 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 59. Effect of a BRIDGE EAST operation 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 60. Effect of a BRIDGE WEST operation 140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 61. Effect of SWITCH EAST operation 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 62. Effect of SWITCH WEST operation 141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 63. Line break recovering operations 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 64. 2F MS–SPRING example of operation 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 65. Squelching on isolated Node connection 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 66. MS SPRING Drop and Continue, Insert Continues (protected) 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 67. D/C IC Connection used for the SNCP/MS SPRING Interworking. 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 68. Synchronizing sub–system 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 69. Auxiliaries / Overheads block diagram 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 70. Controller subsystem 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 71. 1651–SM/1661 SM–C General Management Architecture 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 72. Connection Mode for TMN 156. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 73. VC–12 Structure 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 74. TU–12 Structure 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 75. Block diagram: 21x2 Mbit/s trib. 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 76. 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 77. VC–3 structure 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 78. TU–3 structure 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 79. Block diagram : 3 x 34 Mbit/s Trib. 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 80. 34/2 Trans Mux and 5 x 2 Mbit/s tributary 185. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 81. Schema funzionale 3 x 45Mbit/s TRIB. 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 82. Block diagram : DVB TRIB. 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 83. VC–4 Structure and POH byte contents 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 84. STM–1 structure and SOH byte contents 203. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 85. Block diagram: 140/STM–1 Switch tributary 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 86. Block diagram: Optical Trib. 210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 87. Block diagram: Optical Trib. S/L–1.1 600 FC/SC 217. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 88. AU4 structure 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 89. Block diagram: Full Matrix 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 90. SOH structure of STM–4 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 91. STM–4 structure 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 92. Block diagram: STM–4 Aggregate 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 93. SOH structure of STM–16 240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 94. STM–16 structure 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 95. Block diagram : STM–16 Aggregate 242. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 96. Block diagram: SL/SM AUX/EOW 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 97. Block diagram: Clock Reference 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 98. Block diagram : Equipment Controller SMEC 2A8R + 16F 259. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 99. Block Diagram: Power Supply Unit 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 100. Block diagram: Futurebus Termination 262. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 101. Block diagram: Alarm Interface Access Module 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 102. Block diagram: Qx & Synch. Access Module 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 103. Block diagram: Qx 10–BT & Synch. Access Module 271. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

8

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Figure 104. Power Access Module 272. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 105. Power Access Module 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 106. 21x2 Mbit/s Access Module block diagram (one of the 21 switch functions performed) 275Figure 107. TRMUX +5x2 Mbit/s block diagram 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 108. 34 Mbit/s Access Module – Switch block diagram (one of three switch function performed) 277. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 109. 140 Mbit/s Access Module – Switch block diagram 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 110. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 111. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 112. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location 305. . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 113. Subrack insertion into the rack 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 114. Subrack insertion into Optinex rack 316. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 115. Mounting the union duct for the fiber–guide duct 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 116. Mechanical structure of the subrack 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 117. Connection points for installation 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 118. Protection ground connections for N3 –LC racks 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 119. Tributary units and Access Module subunits relationship 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 120. 1.5 Mbit/s (100 Ohm) Tributary Connections 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 121. 2 Mbit/s (75 ohms) Tributary Connections 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 122. 2 Mbit/s (120 Ohm) Tributary Connections 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 123. 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary connections – 120 Ohm. 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 124. 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tributary connections 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 125. 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary connections 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 126. Management of Qx & Sync Access Module Connectors 339. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 127. Management of Access Module Connectors Qx 10 BT & Synch 340. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 128. Q2 Interface connections 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 129. Synchronism Connections 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 130. 10 – BT connection. 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 131. Management of Alarm Interface access module 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 132. Remote Alarms Connections 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 133. RAB – Rack Lamps Interface connections 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 134. Management of Auxiliary Data Channel Access module 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 135. EOW extension connections 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 136. V11 auxiliary channels connections 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 137. 64 KBit/s auxiliary channels connections 350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 138. DVB Tributary Connections 351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 139. STM–4 Optical connections 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 140. ETSI Optical Connector dimensions 354. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 141. STM–16 Optical Connection and pass–through 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 142. HM1 STM–16 pass–through 357. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 143. IECBS BUS Connections. 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 144. Management of Battery & Houskeeping Access Module 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 145. Housekeeping Connections 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 146. Power Supply Connections 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 147. Tx optical power check 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 148. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for electrical tributaries 375. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 149. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for DVB tributary 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 150. Receiver sensitivity check 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 151. Check on the optical power transmitted by the Optical Tributary 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 152. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for optical tributaries 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 153. Kbit/s auxiliary channels check 387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 154. V11 auxiliary channels check 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 155. Test on Aggregate Protection (APS) 391. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 156. Test on 21 x 2 Mbit/s trib. N+1 EPS protection 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

9

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Figure 157. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. N+1 EPS protection 394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 158. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. 1+1 EPS protection 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 159. Test on CRU EPS protection 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 160. Test on Full Matrix EPS protection 399. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 161. Check on External free running synchronism 401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 162. Test on remote alarms 403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 163. Multi–demultiplexing tests on the link 405. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 164. ”Transits” check on the link 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 165. TU cross–over check on a ring–connection 409. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 166. Repair form 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLESTable 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 3. Documentation on CD–ROM 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 4. Handbook Configuration check 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5. IEC 950 –Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6. Label references 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 7. List of Abbreviations 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 8. Main Part List 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 9. Part List : Connection Module 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 10. Part List: Accessories of the 1651 SM 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11. Part List : Explanatory notes 79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 12. Connection options 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13. Configuration 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 14. Configuration 112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 15. Parameters specified for STM–4 Optical Interfaces 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 16. Parameters specified for STM–16 Optical Interfaces (Single Channel). 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 17. Parameters specified for STM–16 Optical Interfaces (Multi Channel) 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 18. Parameters specified for STM–1 Optical Interfaces 290. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 19. Transportation climatic 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 20. Numbering, functions and paragraphs referred to the Connection Points 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 21. Parts making up the installation set 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 22. Suggested cabling 327. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 23. Instruments and Accessories 368. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 24. Remote Alarms activation 402. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 25. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’ 425. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 26. Hardware presetting documentation 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

10

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

11

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

HANDBOOK GUIDE

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

12

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

13

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK

1.1 General information

WARNING

ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims theimplied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liablefor errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, orspecial, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.

NOTICE

The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for informationpurposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on thepart of ALCATEL.

COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION

The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.

1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases:

PRODUCT ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

1651SM & 1661SM-C 3AL 34643 AAAA 521.200.100

PRODUCT RELEASE VERSION ANV P/N FACTORY P/N

1651SM 2.5.1

1661SM-C 1.5.1’C2’ on 3AL 34623AEAB 521.574.200

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

14

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1.3 Product-release handbooks

The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook andcan be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.

The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whoseproduct-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page.13 consists of the following handbooks:

Table 1. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.FACTORYPart No.

THISHDBK

[1]1651SM Rel.2.5.1& 1661SM–C Rel.1.5.1Technical Handbook

3AL 36668 AAAA 955.100.562 K

[2]1641 SMD Rel. 1.0Technical Handbook

3AL 34434 AAAA 955.100.182 F

Table 2. Handbooks related to the management software / local product control

REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.FACTORYPart No.

THISHDBK

[3]

1651SM Rel.2.5& 1661SM–C Rel.1.5 .1&1651SM Rel.2.5.1& 1661SM–C Rel.1.5.1Operator’s Handbook

3AL 36566 AAAA 957.120.732 A

Table 3. Documentation on CD–ROM

See para.6.5 on page 51

REF CD–ROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No.

1651SM Rel.2.5.1 CD–ROM–DOC EN 3AL 37765 AAAA 417.100.005

[4]Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[1] to [3]

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

15

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1.4 Handbook Structure

This handbook has been edited according to the suggestions given by the ”Code of Practice” for InstructionHandbooks issued by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU RECC. R29/82).

This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:

HANDBOOK GUIDE: It contains general information on safety norms, EMC and typeof labels that might be affixed to the equipment.

DESCRIPTION: It contains all the equipment’s general and detailed systemfeatures including its application in the telecommunicationnetwork. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description andspecifications (i.e., system, mechanical,electrical and/oroptical).

INSTALLATION: It contains all the information (mechanical, electrical and/oroptical) needed to install the equipment

TURN–ON, TESTS ANDOPERATION:

It contains information covering presettings and turn–onprocedures as well as guiding measurements related to checks(to ensure correct operation) and operational changes (*)

MAINTENANCE: It contains all the details for periodic checks, fault location andrepair procedures and restore to normal operation through thewithdrawal of faulty units and their replacement with spares (*)

APPENDICES: Section included (but not necessarily utilized) to describepossible alternative unit.

HARDWARE SETTINGDOCUMENTATION:

It encloses the documents related to unit hardware settingoperations, if envisaged.

ANNEXES: Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) containingadditional documentation or general information on other topicsnot inherent to the chapters making up the handbook.

(*) If the equipment is software integrated and man–machine interfaced (through a PCD, PC, WorkStation or other external processing/displaying system) the turn–on, operation and maintenancecarried out with such system is described in the Operator’s Handbook (see para.1.3 on page 14 )

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

16

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1.5 Handbook configuration check

1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts

Legenda

n = new part

m = modified part

Table 4. Handbook Configuration check

EDITION 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

DESCRIPTIONS n

1. GENERAL n m m m m

2. CONFIGURATION n m m m m m

3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION n m m m m

4. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION n m m m m m

INSTALLATION n

5. INSTALLATION n m m m m m

TURN–ON, TEST AND OPERATION n

6. TURN–ON, TEST AND OPERATION n m m m

MAINTENANCE n

7. MAINTENANCE n m m

APPENDICES n

Nothing envisaged n

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION n

Unit documentation list n m m m m m

ANNEXES

Nothing envisaged

Note: the edition of the enclosed documents (sections HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATIONand ANNEXES) is not subjected to configuration check.

1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01

Ed.01 created on October 06 ,1997 is the first validated and officially released issue.


Ed.02 created on August 27, 1998 is the second validated and officially released issue and it has beenintroduced to add new items, Units and Accessories.The Unit Documentation List Section has modified to apply the latest internal Standard.The revision bars point out the changes from Ed01 to Ed.02

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

17

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


Ed.03 created on September 29, 1998 is the third validated and officially released issue and it has beenintroduced to add new items and Units .The revision bars point out the changes from Ed02 to Ed.03


Ed.04 created on June 04, 1999 is the fourth validated and officially released issue and it has beenintroduced to add new items and Units in order to align this manual to the C2 SW Version.An example of interworking with Booster +17dBm has been added in the Technical Specification Chapter.Correction of errors and editing improvements has been carried out.The revision bars point out the changes from Ed.03 to Ed.04


Ed.05 created on January 24, 2000 is the fifth validated and officially released version of handbook.Changes are relevant to 1.5 Mbit/s Tributary unit adding and some Aggregate units elimination.The revision bars point out the changes from Ed.04 to Ed.05


Ed.06 created on March 16, 2000 is the sixth validated and officially released version of the handbook.Changes are relevant to change in MSZZQ documents list in section HARDWARE SETTINGDOCUMENTATION.The revision bars point out the changes from Ed.05 to Ed.06


Ed.07 created on October 16, 2000 is the seventh validated and officially released version of thehandbook.Changes are relevant to the insertion of the “optinex rack installation kit”, to the technical characteristicsupdating, to the instructions for safety as well the improving of the documentation information.The revision bars point out the changes from Ed.06 to Ed.07

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

18

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

19

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

2 COMPLIANCE WITH EUROPEAN NORMS.

2.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

The CE markings printed on the product denote compliancy with the following Directives:

• 89/336/EEC of May 3rd, 1989 (EMC directives), amended:

– by the 92/31/EEC Directive issued on April 28th, 1992

– by the 93/68/EEC Directive issued on July 22nd, 1993

Compliancy to EMC Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms :

• Issue requisites : EN 55022 ”Limits and methods and measurement of radio disturbancecharacteristics of information technology equipment” , August 1994 edition.Compliancy Class : A

• Immunity requisites : EN 50082–1 ” Electromagnetic compatibility–Generic immunity standard,Part 1 : Residential, commercial and light industry” , January 1992 edition

The equipment operates in the following environment :Telecommunication center

WARNING

This is a class A product. In domestic, residential and light industry environments, this product maycause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

2.2 Safety

The product is in compliance with the following Directives:

• 92/59/EEC Directive issued on June 29th, 1992

Compliancy to Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms :

• IEC 60950 (1991) +A1 +A2 +A3 +A4

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

20

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

21

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS

3.1 First aid for electric shock

Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.

Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with drymaterial and free the patient from the conductor.

ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION

It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek medical help immediately.

TREATMENT OF BURNS

This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed whilethe artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).

WARNING:

• Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;

• Apply dry gauze on the burns;

• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

22

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Mouth to mouth resuscitation method

1

2

3

4

5

6

Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is layingon an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.Open the patient’s mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in hismouth (dentures, chewing–gum etc.),

Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Puta hand under the patient’s head and one underhis neck (see fig.) Lift the patient’s head and letit recline backwards as far as possible

Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to is chin:place your thumb between his chin and hismouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep theother fingers closed together (see fig.). Whileperforming these operations take a good supplyof oxygen by taking deep breaths with yourmouth open.

With your thumb between the patient’s chin andmouth keep his lips together and blow into hisnasal cavities (see fig.)

While performing these operations observe if thepatient’s chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possiblethat his nose is blocked: in that case open thepatient’s mouth as much as possible by pressingon his chin with your hand, place your lips aroundhis mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observeif the patient’s chest heaves. This secondmethod can be used instead of the first evenwhen the patient’s nose is kept closed bypressing the nostrils together using the hand youwere holding his head with. The patient’s headmust be kept sloping backwards as much aspossible.

Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteenexpirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regainedconsciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

23

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2 Safety Rules

3.2.1 General Rules

• Before carrying out any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance operationscarefully read the Technical Handbook, in particular chapters:

– Installation

– Turn–on, Tests & Operation

– Maintenance

• Observe safety rules

– When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipmentparts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools

– In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operatingthis is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technicalassistance is meant :

”personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to beaware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessarymeasurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others”.

The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specifiedis not permitted.

The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which giveaccess to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belongexclusively to the service personnel.

– For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use anyinflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,inscriptions ect.

– It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.

• The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observeto safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.

• Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power stationupstream (rack or station distribution frame).

• The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol andstatement:

SAFETY RULES

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

24

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command

It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.

The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 3846–1984. The symbols or statements areenclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 3864–1984.

CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATIONOR INSTRUCTION.

CONTAINS A SYMBOLINDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOWBACKGROUND–BLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)

(YELLOW BACKGROUND–BLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUNDWHIT RED RIM–BLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)

IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUND–WHITESYMBOL OR STATEMENT).

The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standard–knownsymbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most commonones, specifically:

• dangerous electrical voltages

• harmful optical signals

• risk of explosion

• moving mechanical parts

Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

25

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The symbols presented in para.3.2.3 through 3.2.7 are all the possible symbols that could bepresent on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment thishandbook refers to.

3.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages

3.2.3.1 Labelling

The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).

If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipmentwill have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:

WARNING !

Ground protect the equipment beforeconnecting it to manins

Make sure that power has been cut offbefore disconnecting ground protection.

3.2.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules

DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specificprocedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where a.c. ord.c. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenancedocuments and the following general rules:

a ) Personal injury can be caused by –48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoidtouching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.

b ) Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result inburns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working withprimary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.

3.2.3.3 Electrical safety: equipment specific data

Refer to para.4.1.1 on page 282.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

26

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals

3.2.4.1 Labelling

If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 825–1–1993International Norms.

The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:

If the LASER is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.

The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:

• LASER class

• Power emitted

• Wave length

• Ref. Norm

• Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class

• Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlockers

CAUTIONLASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN

DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEWDIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

LASER RADIATIONDO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW

DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTSCLASS 3A LASER PRODUCTP.MAX=31m...... =1300mm. IEC 825 1993

exemple of power and lenght values

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

27

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.4.2 Optical safety: general rules

On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed andthat the system complies with applicable optical standards.

DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted bythe fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures forinstallation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cablestransporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and commissioning /maintenance documents and the following general rules:

a ) Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,laser radiation may be present.

b ) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.

c ) Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laserradiation is present.

d ) All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided withprotective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link isdisconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.

e ) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable bymeans of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. Amagnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.

f ) Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it isabsolutely known that no laser radiation is present.

g ) Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting opticallinks between the transmitter and the receiver.

h ) Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on opticaldevices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.

3.2.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data

Refer to para.4.1.1 on page 282.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

28

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.5 Risks of Explosions

3.2.5.1 Labelling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:

Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow(battery–emitted hydrogen). A 417–IEC–5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that theopenings must not be covered up.

3.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts


The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:

Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have beenstopped.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

29

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts


The presence of heat–radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancywith IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:

As stated by IEC 950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts are those whose temperature Texceeds the limits established by the following formula (temperatures in °C ):

(T–Tamb) (Tmax + 25° – Tmra)

where:

T Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb.Tamb Ambient temperature during the test.

Tmax Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in thetable below.

Tmra The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipmentspecification or 25°C, whichever is greater.

Table 5. IEC 950 –Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2

Maximum overtemperature

Operator–accessible partsMetal Glass,

porcelainPlastic,rubber

Handle knob, ect., held or touchedfor short periods

35 45 60

Handles, knobs, ect., regularly held 30 40 50

Outer surface of the equipment thatcan be touched

45 55 70

Inner surface of the equipment thatcan be touched

45 55 70

DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts whereheat–radiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up andcommissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:

a ) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part ofyour body.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

30

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook

Specific safety rules are specified in the following chapters:

– Chapter 5 on page 311.

– Chapter 5 para 5.1 on page 312.

– Chapter 5 para 5.2.1.2 on page 314.


– Chapter 5 para 5.3.1 on page 328.

– Chapter 5 para 5.3.11.2 on page 361.





All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

31

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS

4.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The equipment’s EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronicalunits, presence of dummy covers, etc.).

• Before starting any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to theTechnical Handbook, specifically to chapters:

– Installation,

– Turn–on, Tests & operation

– Maintenance

• The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbookby the symbol and term:

ATTENTION EMC NORMS.

4.1.1 General Norms – Installation

• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables useonly cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant PlantDocumentation, or those specified in the Customer’s ” Installation Norms.” (or similardocuments)

• Shielded cables must be suitably terminated

• Install filters outside the equipment as required

• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance

• Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not beforehaving cleaned and degrease it.

• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces(contact springs and connection points, etc.)

• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

• To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

32

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.1.2 General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation

• Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility

• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,ESD connector protections, etc.)

• To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given

4.1.3 General Norms – Maintenance

• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to cleanand degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)

• Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.

• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

33

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD)

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionarymeasures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminatedthe maintenance and monitoring operations.

Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic dischargers, to this concern the following warninglabels have been affixed:

Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during theinstallation/maintenance phases.

Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:

ELASTICIZED BAND

COILED CORD

• an elasticized band worn around the wrist

• a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

34

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions

Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:

Suggestion or note....

Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:

TITLE...

(caution to avoid equipment damage)statement....

4.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment

This chapter indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial labelsaffixed to the equipment.

Figure 1. thru’ Figure 7. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules andsubracks.

Figure 8. and Figure 9. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels.

The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.

Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.

Table 6. Label references

Ref. No. Name of Label

1 label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.)

2 serial number of item specified on catalogue

3 label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N.)

4 Final Test certificate

5 Unit ESD mark

6 CE mark

7 ESD mark for packaged subunits

8 Subrack ESD mark

9 Factory use only code

On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

35

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Table 6. on page 34

Figure 1. Labels for units with stiffening bar

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

36

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


Figure 2. Labels for units without stiffening bar

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

37

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

NB. = Affix labels to p.c.’s components side on the empty spaces.


Figure 3. Labels for units with heat–sink.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

38

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


Figure 4. Labels for units with optical interfaces

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

39

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4

1

2

NB = Affix labels to p.c.b.’s components side on the empty spaces.

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Table 6. on page 34. The components shownon the front–cover are merely indicative showing that there is no space left for the labels

Figure 5. Labels for units with no speces on the front cover

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

40

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6

8

1

2

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Table 6. on page 34.

Figure 6. Subrack labels

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

41

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Table 6. on page 34.

Figure 7. Modules’ labels

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

42

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

ANV + ICS P/N

FACTORY P/N + CS

Bar code of the ANV + ICS P/Ns(format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2

Figure 8. Label identifying label on catalogue

Serial No.

Bar code of the serial No.(format ALFA39 ; Module = 0,166mm. ; Ratio =2

Figure 9. Label specifying serial No.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

43

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

Table 7. List of Abbreviations

ABBREVIATION MEANING

ABN Abnormal

ACO Alarm cut–off (alarm storing)

AD Assembly drawing

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AIS Alarm indication Signal

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

AMI Alternate Mark Inversion

APD Avalanche Photo–diode

ASI Asynchronuos Serial Interface

ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit

ATTD Attended (alarm storing)

AU EUA and UP sum alarm

AUI Attachement Unit Interface

AUG Administrative Unit Group

AUOH AU Pointer

AU4 Administrative unit – level 4

BATT Battery

BER Bit Error Rate

BIP Bit Interleaved Parity

C Storing command

CAND All power supply units units are faulty

CAREM Unit extraction alarm

CKA/B Clock from CRU A/B

CKL Clock for LIECB

CKMSTOFF Clock failure

CKN Network clock for NIECB

CK16ALL 16 MHz clock failure

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

44

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


CK38ALL 38 MHz clock failure

CMI Code Mark Inversion

COAX Coaxial

CPI Incoming parallel contacts

CPO Outgping parallel contacts

CPU Central Processing Unit (refereed to Controller equipment unitor Microprocessor)

CRU Clock Reference Unit

CTYPE Unit Identification signals

C12/C3/C4 1st, 3rd and 4th level container

D Data

DAC Digital/Analog Converter

DC Direct Current

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCE Data Circuit Terminating Equipment

DE Received date

DEN Incoming negative data

DEP Incoming positive data

DPLL Digital Phase Locked Loop

DT Transmitted data

DTE Data Terminating Equipment

DTMF Dual tone multifrequency

DUN Outgoing negative data

DUP Outgoing positive data (Digital Video Broadcasting)

DVB Digital Video Broadcasting

E East

EACT Equipment Assisted Configuration Tool

ECC Embedded Control Channel

ECT Equipment Craft Terminal

EEPROM/E2PROM Electrically erasable programmable read only memory

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

45

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


EM Part List

EMC Electromagnetic compatibility

EMI Electromagnetic interface

EOW Engineering Order Wire

EPS Equipment Protection Switching

ESCT Enhanced Shelf Controller Telettra

ESD Electrostatic discharges

ETSI European Telecomunication Standards Istitute

EUA Equipment Controller extraction unit alarm

EX–BER Excessive Bit Error Rate

EXT EXternal alarms

F Interface F (for Craft Terminal) or Fuse

FEBE Far End Block Error

FEPROM Flash Eprom

FERF Far End Receive Failure

GA Gate Array

HDB3 High Density Bipolar Code

HIGHREFL High Optical reflections

HP High Power

HPA Higher Order Path Adaptation

HPOM Higher order Path Overhead Monitoring

HUG Higher order Unequipped Generator

HW Hardware

ID Identification signals

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering

IN Input

IND Indicative alarm

INT Internal Local Alarms

ISW/OSW Switching commands

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

46

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


ITU–T (*) International Telecommunication Union–TelecommunicationSector

JE Joint Engineering

LAN Local Area Network

LD DEG Laser Degrade

LD FAIL Laser Transmitter local failure

LDSSHUT Command for ALS

LIECB Local Intra Equipment Control Bus

LOF Loss of alignment

LOS Loss of signal

LPA Lower order path adaption

LPC Lower order path connection

LPM Loop–back line side (remote)

LPOM Lower order Path Overhead Monitoring

LPT Lower order path termination or Loopback equipment side(local)

M Tagblock or Alarm storing

MNE Master Network Element

MFSALL Loss of multiframe synchronism

MGMT Management

MITL Loss of Tx pulses from Laser

MLM Multi Longitudinal mode

MS–AIS AIS of the Multiplexer section

MS–FERF FERF of multiplexer section

MSP Multiplexer section protection

MSA Multiplexer section adaptation

MST Multiplexer section termination

MS SPRING Multiplexer section Shared Protection Ring

MSW Switching command

NIECB Network Intra Equipment Control Bus

NRZ No return to zero

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

47

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


NURG Not urgent alarm

OH–BUS Dedicated housekeeping stream

OKKO Switching request signals

ORALIM OR’ing of station power supply alarm

OS Operative system

OSNR Optical Signal to Noise Ratio

OUT Output

P/S Parallel/Serial converter

PC Personal Computer

PFAIL Power supply failure

PG (SA) Pointer Generator of Section Adaptation

PI Physical interface

PI (SA) Pointer interpreter of section adaptation

POH Path Overhead

PPS Path Protection Switching

PWALM Power supply alarm

PWANDOR ANDOR/2 failure

Q2/QB2 TMN Interface with B2 protocol. Interface towards plesiochro-nous equipment

Q3/QB3 TMN Interface with B3 protocol. Interface towards TMN

RURG Urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED

RAM Random Access Memory

RCK Received clock

REF Reference

REL Release

RMS Root Mean Square

RNURG Not urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack redLED

RST Regeneration Section Termination

S/SE Electrical schematic

S/P Serial/Parallel Converter

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

48

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


SA Section Adaptation

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SETG Synchronous Equipment Timing Generation function

SLM Single Longitudinal Mode

SM Single Mode/Synchronous Mux

SMEC Synchronous Multiplexer Equipment Controller

SNC–P Subnetwork Connection Protection, Substitutes PPS

SOH Section Overhead

SSMB Synchronous Status Message Byte

STM–1/STM–4/STM–16 Synchronous Transport Module, levels 1,4,16

SW Software

SYNC A/B Synchronism from CRU A/B

TANC Remote alarm due to failure of all power supply units

TD Layout drawing

TMN Telecomunication Management Netwoek

TORC Remote alarm due to a faulty/missing power supply unit

TRIB Tributary

TUG2/3 Tributary unit group, level 2,3

TUOH TU pointer

TUP/UP Equipment Controller remote alarm

TU12/TU3 Tributary unit

URG Urgent

VCXO Voltage controlled oscillator

VC12/VC3/vc4 Virtual Container, levels 1.3.4

VSERV Auxiliary voltage

W West

WKCH Working channel

NOTE –Owing to change of name, all documents issued by the two ITU committees (CCIR ND CCITT)Owing to change of name, all documents issued by the two ITU committees (CCIR ND CCITT)in 1992 (and in some cases even before then) are classified as ITU–R and ITU–T, respectively.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

49

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION

6.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation

A ”product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole ofperformance and services for which it is meant.A ”product” evolves through successive ”product-releases” which are the real products marketed fortheir delivery at a certain ”product-release” availability date.

So, a ”product–release” defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole,identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific”product-release” has been designed, engineered and marketed for.

In some cases a ”product-release” has further development steps, named ”versions”, that are born toimprove or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixingpurposes.

A ”product-release” has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or morehandbooks.

A new ”version” of a ”product-release” may or may not produce a change in the status of the CustomerDocumentation set, as described in para. 6.4 on page 50.

6.2 Handbook supply to Customers

Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.

6.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation

Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as faras contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is notdescribed here).

Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibilityand the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipmentaccording to Alcatel–Telecom Laboratory design choices.In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on theexplanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance isdescribed down to faulty PCB location and replacement.

Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design andproduction documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.

The handbooks concerning hardware (usually the ”Technical Handbook”) and software (usually the”Operator’s Handbook”) are kept separate in that any product changes do not necessarily concern theircontents.

For example, only the Technical Handbook might be revised because of hardware configurationchanges (e.g., replacing a unit with one having different P/N but the same function).On the other hand, the Operator’s Handbook is updated because of a new software version but whichdoes not concern the Technical Handbook as long as it does not imply hardware modifications.However, both types of handbooks can be updated to improve contents, correct mistakes, etc..

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

50

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.4 Handbook Updating

The handbooks associated to the ”product–release” are listed in para.1.3 on page 14.

Each handbook is identified by:– the name of the ”product-release” (and ”version” when the handbook is applicable to the versions

starting from it, but not to the previous ones),– the handbook name,– the handbook P/N,– the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),– the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date

on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.

6.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)

The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:

– only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to theeditorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.

– the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. Inthis case:

• the chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in Table 4. on page 16;• in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and

drawings.

Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. fromEd.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition ofa version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A).

NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS

Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks) are notmodified unless the new software ”version” distributed to Customers implies man–machineinterface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of theexplained procedures.

Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-release’s”version” marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, ifthe screen contents are unchanged.

6.4.1.1 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers

Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted tocommercial criteria.By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue(supplying errata–corrige sheets is not envisaged).

6.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release

A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01.In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

51

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5 Customer documentation supply on CD–ROM

In the following ’CD–ROM’ means ’Customer Documentation on CD–ROM’

6.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CD–ROM

In most cases, a CD–ROM contains the documentation of one product–release(–version) and for a certainlanguage.In some other cases, the same CD–ROM can contain the documentation of differentproduct–release(–version)s for a certain language.

As a general rule:

– CD–ROMs for Network Management products do not contain:

• the Installation Guides

• the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcateltogether with the main applicative SW.

– CD–ROMs for Network Elements products do not contain the documentation of system optionalfeatures (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to racks that Customers could not buy fromAlcatel together with the main equipment).

A CD–ROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and processing them byInterleaf–World–View–Press after the manual addition of some hyperlinks which make the navigationthrough the various handbooks easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that thedocumentation present in the CD–ROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper.

The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where the viewer (Interleaf–World–View) isadded and a master CD–ROM is recorded.

Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus–free product.

After a complete functional check, the CD–ROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of theProduction Department, so that the CD–ROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

52

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.2 Use of the CD–ROM

The CD–ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments.

The minimum configuration for World View (rel.2.2.2) utilization on a PC is:

– Operative System: Windows 95 or Windows NT (3.51 and 4.00)– Processor: Intel 486– RAM: 16Mbyte– Disk space: 20Mbyte

The set–up procedure is present in the booklet included in the CD–ROM box.After the set–up procedure, which installs the viewer in the PC or Unix WS environment, the Customeris allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and zooming tools includedin the viewer, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.

N.B. Copyright notification

WorldView: Copyright 1981–1996INTERLEAF Inc.All rights reserved.The use of WorldView is permitted only in association with the files containedin the CD–ROMs officially supplied by Alcatel.

Alcatel documents: All rights reserved.Passing and copying of documents and files contained in the CD–ROMsofficially supplied by Alcatel, use and communication of its contents are notpermitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

6.5.3 CD–ROM identification

Each CD–ROM is identified:

1 ) by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CD–ROM uppersurface:– the name of the ”product–release(s)” (and ”version” when the CD–ROM is applicable to

the versions starting from it, but not to the previous ones),– a writing indicating the language(s),– the CD–ROM P/N (Factory P/N 417.xxx.xxx x and ANV P/N),– the CD–ROM edition (usually first edition=01)

2 ) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whosecollection and processing the CD–ROM itself has been created.

6.5.4 CD–ROM updating

The list of source handbook/document P/Ns–editions indicated in previous para.6.5.3 point 2 ) , inassociation with the CD–ROM’s own P/N–edition, is also loaded in the Alcatel–Information–System as astructured list.Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive system,the Alcatel–Information–System automatically rises a warning toward the Customer Documentationdepartment, indicating the list of CD–ROMs that must be updated to include the new editions of thesehandbooks/documents.This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD–ROM.Updating of CD–ROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbookscomposing the collection.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

53

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

DESCRIPTIONS

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

54

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

55

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1 GENERAL

1.1 Introduction to the Equipment

Two distinct equipment are described in this handbook:

• 1651 SM: add/drop synchronous multiplexer defined as a Synchronous Transport Module, level 4 (STM–4).

• 1661 SM–C: add/drop synchronous multiplexer defined as a Sync. Transport Module, level 16(STM–16). This equipment is defined as ”Compact” (c)because the same mechanical structureof the STM–4 equipment can house up to a 2Mbit/s STM–16 equipment with add/drop.The 1661 SM–C equipment can be considered an up–grading of the 1651 SM in that it has beendesigned by simply replacing two aggregates STM–4 units (equipped in the 1651 SM) with theaggregate STM16 ones.

The equipment establishes a 622/2488 Mbit/s transmission system whose high flexibility allows to set upvarious configurations, mainly Line Terminal Drop/Insert Multiplexer with various protections includingoperation in ring networks.

The equipment can also operate without Tributaries as a regenerator.

Tributaries are multiplexed and mapped according to the ETSI Recs. (see Figure 10. on page 56)

Tributaries can be both plesiochronous (at 1.5, 2, 34, 45 and 140 Mbit/s) and synchronous(155 Mbit/s STM–1), in the latter case electrical and optical.

Moreover a DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) Tributary is available. This unit receives or transmits theDVB coded TV channels at 270 Mb/s and maps this signals on 45 Mb/s unidirectional frames to betransported on the SDH network at VC–3 level.The Unit carries three independent channels at 45 Mb/s . Transmitting and receiving function is selectable by an hardware jumper on the board.

The equipment can accommodate different and mixed types of configured tributaries.

In this release the equipment can manage an extension shelf , named 1641 SM–D ” Drop shelf ”, containingup to 10 (9+1 protected) 21 x 2 Mbit/s tributaries. With regard to this performance the use of the SMECas Equipment Controller Unit is mandatory.

This ” DROP SHELF” is not a new Network Element but it is completely supervised and configured by theMain 1651 SM / 1661 SM–C Equipment.It is a way to extend the capacity of our NE that rises up to 252 2 Mbit/s streams.

Various types of aggregate optical interfaces are available, (see chapter 4 on page 279) in order to fit indifferent applications, such as:

• links in G.652 fibres• links in G.653 fibres (dispersion–shifted)• links with optical amplifiers (boosters)• links with optical preamplifiers• links with WDM equipments (in this case 16 optical interfaces, ”coloured” at different

wavelengths in the WDM range, are available).

The Aggregate units interface the STM–4/STM–16 signal and when drop/insert configured can interfacethe EAST and WEST sides.

The equipment has been designed to supply protection functions.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

56

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

This release features:

• Path protection switching (SNC–P)• 2 F MS SPRING• EPS for electrical tributaries (1+1, N +1, in compliancy with the tributary utilized).• EPS for Clock Reference unit (synchronism functions) and Full Matrix unit (routing functions)• 1+1 MS Linear Trail Protection (APS) single–ended switching for STM–4 Aggregate units and

STM–1 optical and electrical tributary units. (Not operative for the STM–16Aggregate).• Power supply protection: Line Shelf ”2+1” and ”1+1” for the Drop Shelf .

The above functions are described in this Technical Handbook.

The equipment of future releases will also carry out bidirectional Linear APS (MS Linear Trailprotection)functions (1+1) for STM4 and STM1.

The frame allocation of the signals can be changed. The CONNECTION function for the high–level andlow–level VC’s is of utmost importance for network management.

The equipment provides access to a wide range of services through the dedicated bytes of the SDHstructure thus facilitating link maintenance and operation.The equipment interfaces:

• Personal Computer (Local Craft Terminal, F Interface)• Network Management System (Interface Q2, Q3)

This allows to analyze the alarm conditions, configure equipment software and execute management operations.The alarm status of the equipment is indicated by the front cover LEDs.

Software downloading follows product evolution.Power supply is delivered by two DC/DC Converters and a stand–by.

The subrack’s mechanical structure is compliant with the ETSI standard.

The structure and units accommodated inside it are described in ”Chapter 2. CONFIGURATIONon page 65

C–12VC–12TU–12

x3

TUG–2

C–3VC–3TU–3TUG–3

x7

C–4VC–4

x3

AU–4AUGSTM–4x4

STM–16 x16

2048Kbit/s

34368Kbit/s

139264Kbit/s

44736

Figure 10. ETSI mapping

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

57

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1.2 Insertion of the Equipment into the Network

The 1651 SM/1661 SM–C equipment belong to the ALCATEL family products and are compliant with theSynchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) defined by ITU–T Recs. G.707, G.708, G.709, G.781, G.782, G.783,G.803, G.957, G.958.A typical SDH network structure is shown in Figure 11. on page 57.The range of Alcatel synchronous systems is shown in Figure 12. on page 58Some of the 1651 SM/1661 SM–C units are also employed in the 1641 SM equipment (155 Mbit/sadd/drop Multiplexer) to simplify spares and network capacity.The equipment can be utilized in interurban, regional and metropolitan networks configured for standardplesiochronous or synchronous systems.The product can be suitably employed on linear, ring and hub networks and on protected or unprotectedline links.

The modes of utilizing the equipment depend on the different types of networks available.

ATTENTION: The equipment of Figure 12. on page 58 to Figure 21. on page 62 is defined as ”ADM”(Add Drop Multiplexer).The ”Spare Line”, in the terminal configured 1661 SM–C is not allowed.

SMSM

SMTR

TR

TR

NNI

LINE/RADIOSYSTEM

NNI

DCS/EA

NNI NNI

LINE/RADIOSYSTEM

SMSM

SM TR

TR

TR

DCS = DIGITAL CROSSCONNECT SYSTEMEA = EXTERNAL ACCESS EQUIPMENTSM = SYNCHRONOUS MULTIPLEXERTR = TRIBUTARIESNNI = NETWORK NODE INTERFACE

TR

Figure 11. SDH network structure

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

58

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

2488 ALCATEL1661SMC

ALCATEL1664 SM

ALCATEL1664 SL

622ALCATEL1651 SM

ALCATEL1654 SL

155ALCATEL1641SMC

ALCATEL1641 SM

ALCATEL1641 SX

ALCATEL1644 SX

155

140

51

2

0.064

ADD / DROP

TRANSMISSION

CROSS–CONNECT

ALCATEL1651 SMC

ALCATEL1655 SR

REGENERATOR

ALCATEL1641 SMT

45

34

ALCATEL1666 SR

Figure 12. ALCATEL Synchronous System

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

59

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1.2.1 Configuration

• Terminal multiplexer (see Figure 13. ).The multiplexer is provided with an STM–4 /STM–16 station interface (eventually stand–by too)to be connected to a Digital Electronic Cross–Connect or to a higher hierarchical line system.

NETRIBS

SPARE

LINE

Figure 13. Terminal multiplexer

• Dual multiplexer (see Figure 14. )A subrack can house up to two multiplexing terminals (fully or partially equipped)

NE

TRIBS

SPARE

LINE

LINETRIBS

Figure 14. Dual terminal multiplexer

• Add/Drop Multiplexer ( see Figure 15. )The multiplexer can be programmed to drop (insert) signals from (into) the STM4/STM16stream.Part of the signal pass–through between the line sides, defined West and East.

LINE LINE

SPARESPARE

TRIBS

WEST EASTNE

Figure 15. Add/Drop Multiplexer

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

60

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1.2.2 Application

In the following there are the possible applications of the equipment:

• Point–to–point link (see Figure 16. )In this case the multiplexer can be connected to another multiplexer through the line

NE NETRIBS TRIBS

LINE

SPARE

Figure 16. Point–to–point links

• Linear Drop–insert (see Figure 17. )The multiplexer can be programmed to drop (insert) tributaries from (into) the STM–16 stream.This configuration, but with no tributaries and matrices, sets up a Regeneration equipment. Onlyone Connection Card unit is inserted.

NE NEADM ADM

LINE LINE LINE

SPARE SPARE SPARE

TRIBS

TRIBS TRIBS

Figure 17. Linear drop–insert

• ”HUB” STM–1 (see Figure 18. )The multiplexer permits to drop/insert 155 Mbit/s STM–1 tributaries into a line stream and thenbranch them off in HUB structures.

ADM

LINE LINE

SPARE SPARE

STM1 TRIBS

Figure 18. ”HUB” STM–1

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

61

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

• WDM applications (see Figure 19. )In this case the 1661SM–C is used as a ”coloured STM–16 tributary” for the 1686 WM (WDMmultiplexer). Up to 16 different aggregate wavelengths (λ) can be used.

1661 1661

1686

TRIBSSM–C

WM

SM–CTRIBS

COLOURED

1686WM

1661

TRIBSSM–C

#1

#2

#16

16 x STM16

1661SM–C

1661

SM–C

#1

#2

#16

TRIBS

TRIBS

#1

#16

#2

1661SM–C

#2

#1

#16

1

2

16

1

2

16

STM–16COLOURED

STM–16

TRIBS

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . .. . .

. . .. . .

. . .

. . .

Figure 19. WDM applications

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

62

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

• Ring structure (see Figure 20. )The drop–insert function permits to realize ring structures.The VC can be automatically rerouted if the optical splice breaks down or one of the equipmentnodes fails

ADM

ADMADM

ADM

RING

TRIB.

TRIB.

TRIB. TRIB.

Figure 20. Ring structure

• One–way broadcasting (see Figure 21. )This function permits to extract data from the same VC over several physical tributaries.Such data can also be made to pass–through to the stations downstream.

• • • •

1xVCn 1xVCn

TRIBUTARY PORTS

Figure 21. Unidirectional broadcasting

• Cross– Connection function

The various CROSS–CONNECTION possibilities offered by the equipment enables it to beused as a small cross–connection node with a maximum capacity of sixteen STM–1 ports.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

63

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Other functionalities of this Release:

• RegeneratorThe equipment can operate in STM–16 regenerator–like mode when the tributaries are notequipped; one Connection Card unit must however be inserted.The ADM performances don’t allow us to consider it a true Regenerator: Byte B2 is terminated,evaluated and reinserted instead in the Reg. B2 is transparent. Furthermore the ADM issynchronized by a unique clock chosen by a specific algorithm, instead in the Reg. eachregeneration section is synchronized by the clock extracted from its Receiving side.

• Optical AmplifierThe 1651SM/1661SM–C can be connected with an external Optical Amplifier 1610 OA and1664 OA, to overcome longer span. The O.A. Alarm criteria are managed by the 1651/1661Equipment using the Housekeeping criteria.

• Bidirectional TransmissionFor the STM 16 optical interface a bidirectional transmission on single fiber function isimplemented, using an external passive optical coupler.

• Drop Shelf extensionThe 1651SM/1661SM–C equipped with a new SMEC Equipment Control Unit and a new DSFuture Bus Termination, is able to completely manage an external equipment named1641SM–D Drop Shelf.This extension Equipment provides access at up to 189 2Mbit/s Tributaries, so the 1651SMplus a Drop Shelf can give the access to 252 2Mbit/s, that means the capacity of a completeSTM4.

• Remote Equipment ControlThis function allows a centralized management system for small SDH networks, similar to thatoffered by an 0S.That means that it is possible to perform management functionalities , from one of the NEs ofthe network, toward the other NEs (up to 31), like configuration modification and remotecontrol.

• Dual OSO.S. Spare is foreseen to protect the Main one and the switch–over and the switch–backbetween these functions, can be automatic or manual at the Operator’s option.

• Year 2000The Equipment is compliant with the year 2000 features.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

64

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

65

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION

This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout, and composition of the equipment.

All the units and various parts making up the equipment are illustrated at para 2.1 on page 66 .

The main parts, the accessories parts and the explanatory notes are listed at para 2.2 on page 67 .

Para 2.3 on page 82 illustrates the interconnection points that can be accessed on the front wiring panelof the subrack together with relevant legenda and meaning.

Para 2.4 on page 90 shows the access points (LED’s switches ect.) present on each unit together withrelevant legenda and meaning.

For further information see Chapter 5 on page 311.

The Personal Computer (Craft Terminal) utilized for Initial Turn–on and Maintenance operations is notlisted as an item of the equipment, but it can be supplied by ALCATEL. See Operator’s Handbook forPC hardware configuration.

N.B.The Hw configuration listed in the following Main Part List on Table 8. on page 68, is thatmanaged by the current Craft Terminal SWP Release.The current Craft Terminal Release can also manage Hw configurations other than thecurrent one, sold with previous Craft Terminal SWP, e.g. by means of a downloadprocedure bringing up to date the previous SW Release.These last HW configuration Main Part Lists are listed in the relevant TechnicalHandbooks.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

66

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

2.1 Equipment front view (New Mechanical Practice)

The front view of the equipment is indicated in the following Figure 22.

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

SLOT

E

SLOT

A

17 18 19 20 21 22 23

SLOT

B

SLOT

D

SLOT

C

NO

T U

SE

D

NO

T U

SE

D

AU

X/E

OW

DS

FU

TU

RE

BU

S T

RE

MIN

AT

ION

ST

M4

W1

ST

M4

E2

or

ST

M4

E1

ST

M4

W2

or

CR

U S

PA

RE

CR

U M

AIN

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

DC

– D

C C

ON

VE

RT

ER

DC

– D

C C

ON

VE

RT

ER

DC

– D

C C

ON

VE

RT

ER

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y S

PA

RE

1

FU

LL M

AT

RIX

MA

IN

FU

LL M

AT

RIX

SP

AR

E

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y S

PA

RE

2

SLO

T F

AU

XIL

IAR

Y C

HA

NN

EL

AC

CE

SS

MO

DU

LE

SLO

T I

QX

& S

YN

CH

. IN

TE

RFA

CE

SLO

T L

ALA

RM

IN

TE

RFA

CE

SLO

T M

PO

WE

R &

HO

US

EK

EE

PIN

G A

CC

. MO

D.

SLOT

ST

M16

E

ST

M16

W

SLO

T G

SLO

T G

SLO

T G

SLO

T H

SLO

T H

SLO

T H

SLO

T H

SLO

T H

SLO

T H

SLO

T H

SLO

T H

2/1.

5 M

BIT

/S A

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

34, 4

5, 1

40, 1

55 M

BIT

/s A

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

34, 4

5, 1

40, 1

55 M

BIT

/s A

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

34, 4

5, 1

40, 1

55 M

BIT

/s A

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

34, 4

5, 1

40, 1

55 M

BIT

/s A

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

34, 4

5, 1

40, 1

55 M

BIT

/s A

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

34, 4

5, 1

40, 1

55 M

BIT

/s A

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

34, 4

5, 1

40, 1

55 M

BIT

/s A

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

34, 4

5, 1

40, 1

55 M

BIT

/s A

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

NO

T U

SE

D

NO

T U

SE

D

SLOT

2/1.

5 M

BIT

/S A

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

2/1.

5 M

BIT

/S A

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

Figure 22. Front view of the 1651 SM/1661 SM–C – (New Practice Shelf)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

67

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

2.2 Equipment part list

In the following tables are listed, named and coded any item and unit of the equipment. Furthermore, forany item the slot position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside the equipment areindicated too.

Such tables report the following information:

• Name of item

• Part No. – Alcatel Factory Part Nos. (e.g. 411.xxx.xxx x) and corresponding NV(e.g. 3AL xxxxx xxxx) ones are given.

• Maximum quantity.

• Position of the unit inside the equipment. Use is made of the same ”Slot + number” indication(slot 1,2 etc.) of the ”Alarm Status and Remote Control ” application of the Craft Terminalmanagement.Where the unit slot number is not assigned in the aforesaid application, it is indicated here with”slot + letter” (slot A,B, etc.)

• Number of explanatory notes.

The explanatory notes are reported in Table 11. on page 79.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

68

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 8. Main Part List

NAME PART No.MaxQty.

SLOT NOTES

MECHANICAL STRUCTURES

1651SM / 1661SM–C Shelf–NP 593.155.033 L(3AL 35792 AB––)

– 1

KIT – 19”/21” DS Adapter 299.701.004V(3AL 34328 AA––)

– 2

STM–4 AGGREGATE UNITS 3

S–4.1 STM–4 AGGREGATE PORT 411.100.154 H(3AL 34729 AA––)

L–4.1 STM–4 AGGREGATE PORT 411.100.153 G(3AL 34291 AA––)

L–4.2 STM–4 AGGREGATE PORT 411.100.134 V(3AL 34069 AA––)

L–4.2 JE AGGREGATE PORT 411.100.302 N(3AL 34733 AA––)

S–4.1 AGGREGATE PORT DIN 411.100.168 P(3AL 34293 AA––)

L–4.1 AGGREGATE PORT DIN 411.100.169 Q(3AL 34294 AA––)

4 18,19,22,23

L–4.2 AGGREGATE PORT DIN 411.100.170 M(3AL 34295 AA––)

L–4.2 JE AGGREGATE PORT DIN 411.100.390 J(3AL 34733 AA––)

S–4.1 AGGREGATE PORT SC 411.100.243 J(3AL 34652 AA––)

L–4.1 AGGREGATE PORT SC 411.100.244 K(3AL 34653 AA––)

L–4.2 AGGREGATE PORT SC 411.100.406 F(3AL 34069 AB––)

L–4.2 JE AGGREGATE PORT SC 411.100.431 X(3AL 34733 AC––)

table continue

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

69

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


SLOT NOTES

STM–16 AGGREGATE (UP GRADING 1661 SM–C) 4

411.100.349 UL–16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE

411.100.349 U(3AL 35810 AA––)

L–16.2 HM1 AGGREGATE 411.100.361 Q(3AL 35811 AA––)

S–16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE 411.100.372 K(3AL 35853 AA––)

L–16.2 JE1 HM1 AGGREGATE 411.100.373 L(3AL 35854 AA––)

L–16.2 JE2 HM1 AGGREGATE 411.100.374 M(3AL 35855 AA––)

2 18+1922+23

L–16.2 JE3 HM1 AGGREGATE 411.100.643 K(3AL 36561 AB––)

S–16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE SC 411.100.458 J(3AL 35853 AB––)

L–16.1 HM1 AGGREGATE SC 411.100.459 K(3AL 35810 AB––)

L–16.2 HM1 AGGREGATE SC 411.100.460 Q(3AL 35811 AB––)

L–16.2 JE1 HM1 AGGREGATE SC 411.100.461 D(3AL 35854 AB––)

L–16.2 JE2 HM1 AGGREGATE SC 411.100.462 E(3AL 35855 AB––)

L–16.2 JE3 HM1 AGGREGATE SC 411.100.520 C(3AL 36561 AA––)

S–16.1 ID FC AGGREGATE 411.100.507 C(3AL 36516 AA––)

L–16.1 ID FC AGGREGATE 411.100.508 M(3AL 36517 AA––)

L–16.2 ID FC AGGREGATE 411.100.509 N(3AL 36518 AA––)

L–16.2 JE1 ID FC AGGREGATE 411.100.510 A(3AL 36519 AA––)

S–16.2 JE2 ID FC AGGREGATE 411.100.511 X(3AL 36520 AA––)

L–16.2 JE3 ID AGGREGATE 411.100.512 Y(3AL 36521 AA––)

S–16.1 ID AGGREGATE SC 411.100.513 Z(3AL 36516 AB––)

table continue

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

70

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


SLOT NOTES

L–16.1 ID AGGREGATE SC 411.100.514 S(3AL 36517 AB––)

L–16.2 ID AGGREGATE SC 411.100.515 T(3AL 36518 AB––)

L–16.2 JE1 ID AGGREGATE SC 411.100.516 U(3AL 36519 AB––)

L–16.2 JE2 ID AGGREGATE SC 411.100.517 V(3AL 36520 AB––)

L–16.2 JE3 ID AGGREGATE SC 411.100.518 E(3AL 36521 AB––)

S16.1 AGG.61 ENHANCED 411.100.969 J(3AL 36516 BA––)

L16.1 AGG.61 ENHANCED 411.100.970 P(3AL 36517 BA––)

L16.2 AGG.61 ENHANCED 411.100.971 C(3AL 36518 BA––)

L16.2 JE1 AGG.61 ENHANCED 411.100.972 D(3AL 36519 BA––)

L16.2 JE2 AGG.61 ENHANCED 411.100.973 E(3AL 36520 BA––)

L16.2 JE3 AGG.61 ENHANCED 411.100.974 F(3AL 36521 BA––)

S16.1 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC 411.100.975 G(3AL 36516 BB––)

L16.1 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC 411.100.976 H(3AL 36517 BB––)

L16.2 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC 411.100.977 A(3AL 36518 BB––)

L16.2 JE1 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC 411.100.978 K(3AL 36519 BB––)

L16.2 JE2 AGG.61 ENHANCED SC 411.100.979 L(3AL 36520 BB––)

L16.2 JE3 AGG.61 ENHANCED 411.100.980 A(3AL 36521 BB––)

L–16 AGG. 192.3 SC 6400 411.100.710 J(3AL 37615 AA––)

L–16 AGG. 192.5 SC 6400 411.100.711 F(3AL 37615 AB––)

L–16 AGG. 192.7 SC 6400 411.100.712 G(3AL 37615 AC––)

table continue

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

71

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


SLOT NOTES

L–16 AGG. 192.9 SC 6400 411.100.713 H(3AL 37615 AD––)

L–16 AGG. 193.1 SC 6400 411.100.714 A(3AL 37615 AE––)

L–16 AGG. 193.3 SC 6400 411.100.715 B(3AL 37615 AF––)

L–16 AGG. 193.5 SC 6400 411.100.716 C(3AL 37615 AG––)

L–16 AGG. 193.7 SC 6400 411.100.717 D(3AL 37615 AH––)

L–16 AGG. 194.3 SC 6400 411.100.718 N(3AL 37615 AL––)

L–16 AGG. 194.5 SC 6400 411.100.719 P(3AL 37615 AM––)

L–16 AGG. 194.7 SC 6400 411.100.720 L(3AL 37615 AN––)

L–16 AGG. 194.9 SC 6400 411.100.721 H(3AL 37615 AP––)

L–16 AGG. 195.1 SC 6400 411.100.722 A(3AL 37615 AQ––)

L–16 AGG. 195.3 SC 6400 411.100.723 B(3AL 37615 AR––)

L–16 AGG. 195.5 SC 6400 411.100.724 C(3AL 37615 AS––)

L–16 AGG. 195.7 SC 6400 411.100.725 D(3AL 37615 AT––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 192.3/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.981 X(3AL 37615 BA––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 192.5/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.982 Y(3AL 37615 BB––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 192.7/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.983 Z(3AL 37615 BC––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 192.9/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.984 S(3AL 37615 BD––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 193.1/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.985 T(3AL 37615 BE––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 193.3/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.986 U(3AL 37615 BF––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 193.5/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.987 V(3AL 37615 BG––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 193.7/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.988 E(3AL 37615 BH––)

table continue

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

72

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


SLOT NOTES

STM16 AGG. 61 – 194.3/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.989 F(3AL 37615 BL––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 194.5/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.990 C(3AL 37615 BM––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 194.7/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.991 Z(3AL 37615 BN––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 194.9/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.992 S(3AL 37615 BP––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 195.1/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.993 T(3AL 37615 BQ––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 195.3/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.994 U(3AL 37615 BR––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 195.5/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.995 V(3AL 37615 BS––)

STM16 AGG. 61 – 195.7/ 6400 ENH. SC 411.100.996 W(3AL 37615 BT––)

SOC COAXIAL JUMPER KIT 298.701.604 A(3AL 34543 AA––)

1 – 5

table continue

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

73

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


SLOT NOTES

TRIBUTARIES 6

140/STM–1 SWITCH TRIBUTARY 411.100.129 G(3AL 34066 AA––)

10

3 x 34 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY 411.100.120 B(3AL 34065 AA––)

102–6

9–137

3 x 45 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY 411.100.162 H(3AL 34080 AA––)

10

34/2 TRANS.MUX & 5 x 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY 411.100.236 B(3AL 34474 AA––)

21 x 2 Mbit/s 120 ohm TRIBUTARY 411.100.330 M(3AL 34075 AC––) 4 2,3,4,6 8

21 x 2 Mbit/s 75 ohm TRIBUTARY 411.100.331 A(3AL 34075 AB––)

21 x 2 MB/s 120 OHM RETIMING TRIB. 411.100.657 R(3AL 35905 AC)

21 x 2 MB/s 75 OHM RETIMING TRIB. 411.100.656 Q(3AL 35905 AB)

21 x 1.5 MB/s TRIBUTARY 411.100.871 G(3AL 37718 AA)

S–1.1 TRIBUTARY 411.100.171 A(3AL 34277 AA––)

8 2–59–12

L–1.1 TRIBUTARY 411.100.174 D(3AL 34280 A––)

8 2–59–12

L–1.2 TRIBUTARY 411.100.325 C(3AL 34918 A––)

8 2–59–12

S–1.1 TRIBUTARY 600 411.100.185 Z(3AL 34296 AA––)

8 2–59–12

L–1.1 TRIBUTARY 600 411.100.247 N(3AL 34437 AA––)

8 2–59–12

L–1.2 TRIBUTARY 600 411.100.358 V(3AL 35714 AA––)

8 2–59–12

S–1.1 TRIBUTARY 600 SC 411.100.245 L(3AL 34804 AA––)

8 2–59–12

L–1.1 TRIBUTARY 600 SC 411.100.246 M(3AL 34805 AA––)

8 2–59–12

L–1.1 TRIBUTARY SC 411.100.158 M(3AL 34077 AA––)

S–1.1 TRIBUTARY SC 411.100.160 K(3AL 34324 AA––)

8 2–59–12

S–1.1 TRIBUTARY DIN 411.100.172 B(3AL 34278 AA––)

table continue

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

74

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


SLOT NOTES

L–1.1 TRIBUTARY DIN 411.100.173 C(3AL 34279 AA––)

8 2–59–12

L–1.2 TRIBUTARY SC411.100.788 M

(3AL 34918 AC––) 8 2–59–12

DVB TRIBUTARY 411.100.641 R(3AL 37450 AA––)

8 2–59–12

9

MATRICES UNITS 10

CONNECTION CARD 474.156.305 K(3AL 34043 AA––)

2 11

FULL MATRIX 411.100.142 D(3AL 34072 AA––)

2 7,8 12

16x16 MATRIX Unit 411.100.500 R(3AL 36451 AA––)

2 13

CONTROLLER

SMEC 2 A 8R + 16F 411.100.301 M(3AL 34732 AA––)

1 B 14

DS FUTUREBUS TERMINATION 487.156.367 E(3AL 34024 AA––)

1 16 15

POWER SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLY UNIT 478.120.804 L(3AL 34963 AA––)

3 C.D,E 16

TIMING

ENHANCED CRU 0.37ppm 411.100.306 J(3AL 34787 AA––)

2 20,21

ENHANCED CRU 411.100.363 J(3AL 35808 AA––)

2 20,2117

AUXILIARIES 18

AUX/EOW / 2 411.100.483 U(3AL 34453 AE––)

1 17

AUX/EOW EXTENSION / 2 411.100.484 V(3AL 34453 AF––)

1 1719

TELEPHONE HANDSET 013.200.016 A(1AF 00398 AA––)

1 – 20

SOFTWARE 21

end table

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

75

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 9. Part List : Connection Module


SLOT NOTES

Access Connection Module 22

21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 120

487.156.432 Q(3AL 36153 AA––) 3

21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 120 – K20 487.156.433 R(3AL 36153 AB––)

3

21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 75 – 1.0 487.156.435 K(3AL 36154 AA––)

3

21x2MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 75 – T43 487.156.436 L(3AL 36154 AB––)

3

21x2MB/s UNPR. ACC. MODULE 75 – T43 487.156.438 W(3AL 36154 AD––)

3 G 23

21x2MB/s UNPROT. ACC. MODULE 120 487.156.434 J(3AL 36153 AC––)

3

21x2MB/s UNPROT. ACC. MODULE 75 487.156.437 M(3AL 36154 AC––)

3

TRMUX+5X2MB/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 1.0/2.3 487.156.550 A(3AL 36158 AB––)

3

TRMUX+5X2MB/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 120OHM

487.156.440 C(3AL 36158 AA––)

3

3X34/45MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.6 487.156.444 U(3AL 36155 AB––)

8

3X34/45MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.0 487.156.448 G(3AL 36155 AA––)

8

3X34/45MB/s PROT. ACC. MODULE T43 487.156.449 H(3AL 36155 AC––)

8

140/STM1 PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.0 487.156.445 V(3AL 36156 AA––)

8H 24

140/STM1 PROT. ACC. MODULE 1.6 487.156.446 W(3AL 36156 AB––)

8

140/STM1 PROT. ACC. MODULE T43 487.156.447 X(3AL 36156 AC––)

8

AUX CONNECTION ACC. MOD. 487.156.441 Z(3AL 36159 AA––)

1 F 25

ALARM INTERFACE ACC. MOD. 487.156.443 T(3AL 36162 AA––)

1 L 26

POWER ACCESS MODULE 487.156.442 S(3AL 36160 AA––)

1 M 27

POWER ACCESS MODULE /2 487.156.563 T(3AL 37480 AA––)

1 M 28

table continue

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

76

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


SLOT NOTES

QX & SYNCH 120 ACCESS MODULE 487.156.450 E(3AL 36161 AA––)

1

QX & SYNCH ACC. MOD. 1.0/2.3 487.156.451 T(3AL 36161 AB––)

1 I 29

QX & SYNCH T43 ACC. MOD. 487.156.452 U(3AL 36161 AC––)

1

QX 10BT & SYNCH 120 ACCESS MODULE 487.156.560 C(3AL 37462 AA––)

1

QX 10BT & SYNCH ACC. MOD. 1.0/2.3 487.156.561 Z(3AL 37465 AA––)

1 I 30

QX 10BT & SYNCH T43 ACC. MOD. 487.156.562 S(3AL 37465 AB––)

1

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

77

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 10. Part List: Accessories of the 1651 SM


SLOT NOTES

DUMMY PLATES 31

6U 4TE DUMMY PLATE / N 299.701.560 A(3AN 41001 AA––)

2 –

6U 4TE ACCESS DUMMY PLATE 299.701.564 S(3AN 43031 AA––)

10 –

6U 12TE ACCESS DUMMY PLATE 299.701.565 T(3AN 43032 AA––)

3 –

6U 5TE DUMMY PLATE / N 299.701.562 Y(3AN 41002 AA––)

16 –

6U 6TE DUMMY PLATE / N 299.701.563 Z(3AN 41003 AA––)

1 –

RACK INSTALLATION SET

ETSI INSTALL. SET 299.701.475 Z(3AN 34258 AA––)

– 32

S9 INSTALL. SET 299.701.454 U(3AN 34259 AA––)

– 33

OPTINEX INSTALL. KIT 299.701.598 V(3AL37983AA––)

1 34

ACCESSORIES

CUST. NO–ETSI OPTIC COVER FOR STM1284.901.808 J

(3AN 44550 AA)8 – 35

CUST. NO–ETSI OPTIC COVER FOR STM4284.901.525 V

(3AN 44922 AA)4 – 36

16A CIRCUIT BREAKER 001.700.121 J(1AB 02428 0012)

2 – 37

CIRCUIT BREAKER (15 A 72 Vdc) 001.791.356 L(1AB162710006)

2 38

FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING 39

KIT – 120 ohms CONNECTOR (9 PINS) 543.159.606 Z(3AL 34257 AA––)

3 – 40

KIT – 120 ohms CONNECTOR (15 PINS) 299.701.407 W(3AL 34521 AA––)

23 – 41

1.0/2.3 (3 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR 040.144.001 N(1AB 06122 0003)

177 – 42

1.0/2.3 (6 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR 040.144.002 P(1AB 06122 0004)

177 – 43

1.6/5.6 (8.5 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR 040.142.080 P(1AB 00987 0005)

51 – 44

table continue

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

78

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


SLOT NOTES

1.6/5.6 (5.9 mm) MALE COAX CONNECTOR 040.142.067 M(1AB 00987 0004)

51 – 45

MALE COAX CONNECTOR BNC 040.152.048 U(1AB 006420051)

3 – 46

FOR OPTICAL WIRING 47

SM FC–PC SINGLE FIBER SPLICE (15 M) 041.897.045 S(1AB 07983 0001)

24 –

SM JUMPER FC/PC (20 M) 041.897.043 Y(1AB 07984 0001)

24 –

SM SPLICE WITH FC/PC CONN. (10 M) 041.897.012 R(1AB 07894 0002)

24 –

SPECIAL TOOLS

HOOK/UNHOOK TOOL 245.701.833 R (1AD 02412 0001)

1 – 48

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

79

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 11. Part List : Explanatory notes

No.

DESCRIPTION

1

The abbreviation ” NP ” stands for ”New Practice” equipment. The Old Practice /New Practicealternative qualifier is SW managed and shown on the local CT interface and allowable via QB3*interface; see the Operator Handbook. For further information on the structure see ” Chapter 5INSTALLATION” on page 311.

2 Mechanical Adapter utilized to insert the subrack into 21” ETSI racks (S9, N3, Optinex)

Alternative unit – Mixed configurations are possible – Slot 19=WEST1, 20=EAST2, 23=EAST1,24 =WEST2 – Unit number depends on equipment configuration:

Unprotected Line terminal : 1 unit

Protected Line terminal : 2 units3

Unprotected Drop–Insert : 2 units

Protected Drop–Insert : 4 units

Unless otherwise specified the connectors are FC/PC. Options are illustrated in ”Chapter 3.FUNCTIONAL OPERATION ” on page 97

Alternative unit for up–grading STM–16. Mixed configurations are possible.Each STM–16 Aggregate unit replace two STM–4 Aggregate units (dashed indication inFigure 22. on page 66):

Agg East slot 19 and 20

Agg West slot 23 and 24

Unit number depends on equipment configuration:

4 Unprotected Line terminal : 1 unit4

Unprotected Line Terminal and Drop–Insert : 2 units

Unless otherwise specified the connectors are FC/PC.

The suffix ID, ENH and ENHANCED , identify aggregate unitsthat can carry out new features but only for future networkevolution. In the current Release these Units are managed likethe previous ones.

5Coaxial cables to perform the ”Pass–Through Aggregate to Aggregate”. Mandatory only forSTM–16 Aggregates.

6 Alternative unit – Options are illustrated in ”Chapter 3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION ” on page 97

7 Slots 6, 13 are occupied by spare units only

8 Slot 6 is occupied by a spare unit only

9Unit mapping three Unidirectional DIGITAL VIDEO BROADCASTING signals. By Hw straps itcan be used as transmitting or receiving item.

10 Alternative Matrix unit

table continue

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

80

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

No.

DESCRIPTION

11Slot 8 is occupied by a Full Matrix spare unit. When Connection Card is utilized both unit mustbe inserted.

12 Slot 8 is occupied by a Full Matrix Spare Unit .

13Alternative of the previous unit. The Unit is predisposed to provide future new features. In ThisRelease it carries out the same performances of the Full Matrix Unit. Slot 8 is occupied by a 16x16Matrix Spare Unit .

14Mandatory Unit. Needed specifically to manage the 1641SM–D DROP SHELF extension. If theDrop Shelf is not required it is possible to use the ESCT equipment controller (411.100.163) andMEMORY EXPANSION (487.156.610) instead of SMEC 2A 8R+16F.

15 Mandatory unit. Used to provide voltage logical reference to all Control and auxiliary BUS

16 One of the units is optionally supplied as 2+1 standby

17 Alternative unit. Slot 20 contains spare (1+1).

18 Alternative Auxiliary unit (Auxiliary channel interfaces and Order Wire interfaces) , .

19 These items guarantee the interworking with Line equipment.

20 Optional telephone handset associated to the AUX/EOW unit of slot 17.

21 Details concerning the software P/Ns are given in the Equipment Operator’s Handbook

22 Alternative modules, utilized for tributary connection.

23Bidirectional 21x2/1.5 MB/s Access Modules. They allow the physical access of the 2/1.5 MB/ssignals and their 1+N protectionFor details see ”Chapter 3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION ” on page 97 and ”Chapter 5.INSTALLATION” on page 311

24

3x34 Mb/s, 3x45,140 Mb/s, STM1 electrical Access Modules.They allow the physical access of the relevant signals and their 1+N and 1+1 protection For options details see ”Chapter 3. FUNCTIONAL OPERATION ” on page 97 and ”Chapter 5.INSTALLATION” on page 311

25 Physical access for V11, 64 Kb/s G703 Data Channel and 4 wire external EOW

26Housed Circuits: ANDOR, Futurebus Termination, Remote Inventory Data, IECB Bus (when DropShelf Is managed). Access available: Remote Alarms and R/M interface connection (RackLamps)

27 Station Battery access and Housekeeping I/O signals

28Station battery access and Houskeeping I/O signals ; to be used for potential free applications.(AND/OR function available by strap).

29Housed Circuits: AUI / B2 Adapter. Access available: Q2 Interface, 2MHz I/O Stationsynchronization signals and LAN connection (QB3 10 base 2 interface)

30Alternative Unit. This Subunit converts the generic AUI interface to the Twisted Pair ethernetinterface: the 10Base–T option of the IEEE 802.3 standards.

table continue

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

81

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

31 To be utilized for the unequipped slot; necessary for EMC performances.

32Set of connectors needed to install the ETSI (N3–LC) (power supply, remote alarms) and cableto actuate rack lamps, see ”Chapter 5. INSTALLATION” on page 311.

33Set of connectors needed to install the S9 racks, (power supply, remote alarms) and cable toactuate rack lamps, see ”Chapter 5. INSTALLATION” on page 311.

34Set of connectors needed to install the Optinex rack (power supply, remote alarms) and cable toactuate rack lamps, see ”Chapter 5. INSTALLATION” on page 311.

35Over–dimensioned optical protection to cover STM1 tributary optical connectors whichdimensions exceed the recommended (ETSI) ones. Optional item.

36Over–dimensioned optical protection to cover STM4 aggregate optical connectors whichdimensions exceed the recommended (ETSI) ones. Optional item.

37 Station power–supply patch points to mount at the Top Rack Unit of the S9 rack.

38 Station power–supply patch points to mount at the Top Rack Unit of the Optinex rack.

39 Detailed in ”Chapter 5. INSTALLATION” on page 311.

40To be utilized as an alternative to interface wiring for 2 MHz external clock balanced signalconnection

41To be utilized with 120 ohms interface wiring for 2 Mbit/s Tribs. and 2 MHz external clock balancedsignal connections

42To be utilized with 75 ohms unbalanced interface wiring for 2 Mbit/s Tribs., electrical connectionon 3mm dia. cable. Also used for 34 Mb/s and 140/Mb/s/STM–1 electrical.

43To be utilized with 75 ohms unbalanced interface wiring for 2 Mbit/s Tribs., electrical connectionon 6mm dia. cable. Also used for 34 Mb/s and 140 Mb/s/STM–1 electrical.

44To be utilized with 34/140 Mbit/s interface wiring, STM–1 electrical connection on 8.5mm dia.cable.

45To be utilized with 34/140 Mbit/s interface wiring, STM–1 electrical connection on 5.9mm dia.cable.

46 To be utilized with DVB Trib.

47 Alternative use for optical connections

48Tool to be used to hook/unhook the coaxial cables carrying out the pass–through function onSTM-16 aggregates.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

82

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

2.3 Units Front View

This paragraph shows the access points (LED’s switches etc.) present on each unit together with relevantlegenda and meaning.

LEGENDA

(1) Red LED indicating local unit alarm

34 / 2 TRAN. MUX AND5 x 2Mbit/s TRIB.

1

*

CMI

SLOT 2,3,4

1

*2, 1.5, 34 o 45

*

21 x 2/1.5 MBIT/S TRIB.

Figure 23. Access points : 2/1.5 MBit/s and Tran Smux Tributaries

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

83

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1

*2 34 or 45

*

LEGENDA


(2) Green LED – In Service unit

3 x 45Mbit/s TRIB.3 x 34Mbit/s TRIB.140 / STM1

SWITCH TRIB.

1

* 140

CMI

*

orSTM1

2

SLOT 2,3,4,5 ,6 & 9,10,11,12,13

1

*

(1) Red LED – local unit alarm

* DVB

1

2

3

2

3

(2) Rx electrical connectorTributary output

(3) Tx side electrical connectorTributary input

DVB TRIBUTARY

LEGENDA

SLOT 2,3,4,5 & 9,10,11,12

Figure 24. 34, 45 MBit/s, Switchable and DVB Tributary

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

84

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

S–1.1 TRIB. FCL– 1.1 TRIB. FC

1

*155

*S 1,1 or L

laser

R 3

5

4

S–1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SCL– 1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SC

1

*L 1,1 or S

laser

ON3

5

4

STM1

155

2

LEGENDA



(3) LASER manual reset button

(4)

Rx optical connector – Tributary Output(5)

Tx optical connector –Tributary Input

(

SLOT 2,3,4,5 & 9,10,11,12

Figure 25. Access points :Optical Tributaries

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

85

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

CONNECTIONCARD

FULLMATRIX

FULL

1

LEGENDA


SLOT 7,8

16 x 16MATRIX

FULL

1

2

(2) Connector only for internal use

Figure 26. Access points: Matrices

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

86

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5

laser

LEGENDA



(3) Rx optical connector – AGG. Input

(4) Tx optical connector – AGG. Output

(5) Manual LASER reset pushbutton(

ON

Tx

Rx

2

4

3

2

** 622

S 4,1

or L 4.1L 4.2

L 4.1 JEL 4.2 JE

SLOT 18,19, 22,23

Figure 27. Access points: STM–4 Aggregates

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

87

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

LASER

TxRx

Rx1

Rx2

Rx3

Rx4

Tx1

Tx2

Tx3

Tx4

*L–16.2

*

1

2

5

6

LEGENDA



(3) Rx optical connector – AGG. Input

(4) Tx optical connector – AGG. Output

(5) Manual LASER reset pushbutton(

(6) Rx/ Tx pass–through connectors ( from/to other side STM–16 Aggregate)

or S–16.1L– 16.1L–16.2 JE1L–16.2 JE2

ON

3

4

SLOT 18+19, 22+23

Figure 28. Access points: STM–16 HM1 Aggregates

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

88

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

CLOCK REFERENCE

1

LEGENDA

(1) Red LED indicating

1

AUX EOW

2

3R

J 4

5

6

7

LINE

LEGENDA

(1) Red LED indicating local

(2) Tph. handset insertion point

(3) Reset line command key

(4) Line seizure key

(5) Yellow LED indicating

local unit alarm unit alarm

conference call

(6) Yellow LED :glowing = line busy

(7) Green LED indicating free line

flashing = selective call received

UNIT

DS FUTUREBUS

TERMINATION

DL

CKN

DN

CKL

UNITS

I/O

1

2

3

4

LEGENDA

(4) Local IECBClock

(2)

Local IECBData

(3)

NetworkIECB Clock

(1) NetworkIECB Data

SLOT 21,20 SLOT A SLOT 17

Figure 29. Access points: CRU, AUX–EOW, DS Future bus Termination

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

89

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

2

LEGENDA

(1) GREEN LED :

POWER SUPPLY

1

8

12

LEGENDA


(2) Green LED – In service unit

(3) Yellow LED – Indicative alarm

(4) Yellow LED – Abnormal condition

(5) Yellow LED – Alarm storing ( attended )

ON = correct operation

(6) Red LED – Not urgent alarm

(7) Red LED – Urgent alarm

1

EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERSMEC2

11

CRAFTTERMINAL

URG

NURG

ATTDABNIND

7

9

6

5

4

3

(2) ON ( I ) or OFF ( O ) switch

(8) Connector for factory use

(9) Personal Computer connector (interface F)

(10) Alarm storing pushbutton

CPU

10

2

(11) Lamp test pushbutton

(12) Unit reset pushbutton

SLOT C,D,E SLOT B

Figure 30. Access Points: Power Supply and Equipment Controller SMEC2

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

90

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

2.4 Access Module front view

V11

64 K

HK

BATT1

BATT2

RA

R/M

LEGENDA

(1) (2) (3)

(4)

(5)

Connector for Auxiliary Cahannels

(6) (7) Connector for Power Supply

1

4

2

3

Connector for RM interface (Rack Lamps)

5

Connector for Remote Alarms

8

7

6

(8) Connector for Housekeeping indications

AUX ALARM POWER

SLOT F SLOT L SLOT M

Figure 31. Access Module front cover plate – Auxiliary, Battery, Alarm Access Modules

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

91

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Q INT Q INT

10 – B2 10 – B2

SYNCSYNC

I1

I2

OUT

LEGENDA

(1) (2) Connectors for QB3 Ethernet connection

(3)

Connector for Q2LTS Interface connection

(4)

Connector for synch. signals, 120 Ohm connector

2

1

3

5

1

2

4

5

(5)

Connector for synch. signals, Coax. 1.0/2.3 connector

SLOT I

Qx & SYNC

Figure 32. Access Module front cover plate – Qx Interface & Sync. Access Module.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

92

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

QX 10BT & SYNCH

COAX. CONN.120 OHM CONN.

10–BT

QINT

SYNCI1

I2

OUT

QINT

SYNC

10–BT

1

3

4

2

4

1

LEGENDA

(1) Connector for Twisted Pair LAN connection

(2)

Connector for Q2LTS Interface connection

(3)

Connector for synch. signals, 120 Ohm connector

(4)

Connector for synch. signals, Coax. 1.0/2.3 connector

SLOT I

QX 10BT & SYNCH

Figure 33. Access Module front cover plate – Qx 10BT Interface & Sync. Access Module.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

93

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

SLOT G

21x2/1.5 Mbit/s Ohm bidirectional 21x2 Mbit/s 75 Ohm bidirectional

18

15

7

14

21

18

15

1 1

7

14

15 15

21

Figure 34. Access Module front cover plate – 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

94

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

SLOT G

34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm

1

5

1

5

34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm

2

Tx 75 ohm connectors for

Rx connector for

Tx connector for

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

LEGENDA

Rx 75 ohm connectors for2Mbit/s Channels

2Mbit/s channels

34Mbit/s channel

34Mbit/s channel

Tx 120 ohm connector for

Rx connector for

Tx connector for

(6)

(7)

(8)

LEGENDA

Rx 120 ohm connector for(5)2Mbit/s Channels

2Mbit/s channels

34Mbit/s channel

34Mbit/s channel

3 4

7 8

5 6

Tx

1

Rx

Figure 35. Access Module front cover plate – 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

95

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

LEGENDA

(1)–(3) Tx connectors for 34Mbit/s Trib. connection

6

1

2

3

4

5

3 x 34 /45 MBIT/S ACCESS MODULE

SLOT H

(4)–(6) Rx connectors for 34Mbit/s Trib. connection

Figure 36. Access Module front cover plate – 3x34/45 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

96

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

LEGENDA

(1)–(2) Connectors for 140/155 Mbit/s

2

1

Trib. Connection

SLOT H

140/155 Mbit/s Trib. Access Module

Figure 37. Access Module front cover plate – 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary Access Module.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

97

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3.1 General description

Figure 38. on page 98 illustrates, in block diagram form, the units employed and the general operatingfunctions.

The functions carried out by the equipment can be split into the following sub–systems:

• STM–4 Aggregate sub–system (when 1651–SM is involved)

• STM–16 Aggregate sub–system (when 1661–SM–C is involved)

• Connect sub–systemIt is indicated by the Matrix units and connection circuits of the Tributary and Aggregate units.

• Tributary sub–systemIn this release the 1651 SM or 1661 SM–C equipment tributary sub–system is provided with anextension only for the 2 Mbit/s management, thus increasing their number up to 252. Thisextension is provided by the 1641 SM–D (Drop Shelf) equipment.These 252 2Mit/s streams are subdivided into three 21 x 2 Mbit/s units housed in the Line ShelfEquipment, as regards the 63 2 Mbit/s streams and into nine 21 x 2 Mbit/s units housed theDrop Shelf Equipment, as regards the 189 2 Mbit/s streams.The latter are multiplexed into three STM–1 electrical units (assigned to slots 5,6,7) housed inthe Line Shelf as can be seen from Figure 38. on page .98The Drop Shelf equipment is totally managed by the Line Shelf, hence it is not a NE but it is partof Line Shelf as far as the Network Management is concerned.

• Protection sub–systemIt is obtained with the spare units and the functional units circuitry.

• Synchronizing sub–system (Clock Reference unit)

• Auxiliary and Overhead sub–systemIt is achieved with the AUX unit, and with the OH–BUS connections obtained with the functionalunits.

• Control and management sub–systemIt is achieved through the Equipment Controller unit, which interfaces the Card Controllersubunits inside all the units (except for the Power Supply unit), the Craft Terminal (Interface F)and the Management Center (Interface QB3*) and the non SDH Alcatel equipment (InterfaceQ2).The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal (R–ECT) feature is provided and through the QECCprotocol it allows the operator to perform a set of management operations and display the Alarmsynthesis information of all the subnetwork NE’s .

• Power Supply sub–system

The sub–systems are thoroughly explained in the following.

The Aggregate and Tributary sub–systems cross–refer to Figure 39. on page 99.Functions that are not operative in this release are nonetheless mentioned to better define the systemaspects. However, the reader is informed as to their non–use.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

98

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGSTM–16

W

STM–16WHEN1661SM–CIS USED

AGGREGSTM–16

E

STM–16

AGGREGSTM–4

W

STM–4WHEN1651 SM

IS USED

STM–4

AGGREGSTM–4

WSPARE

AGGREGSTM–4

EAGGREG

STM–4E

SPARE

STM–4

MATRIXUNIT MATRIX

UNITSPARE AUX/EOW

OH BUS

EOW3x64Kbit/s3xV11

TRIBUTARIES(10 SLOTS)

2Mbit/s

34/2 TRAN. MUX5x2Mbit/s

SPARE1+N

STM–1 OPT STM–1 OPT

SPARE1+N

34,45,140Mbit/sSTM–1 EL

34,45,140Mbit/sSTM–1 EL

SPARE1+N

CONTROL & DCC BUS

F

Q B3

EQUIPMENTCONTROLLER

CLOCK

CLOCK DISTRIBUTION

REF CLOCKREF

SPARE

2MHzEXT

POWERSUPPLY

1

23

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SPARE1+N

3 x 63 2Mbit/sFROM DROP SHELF

SPARE1+N

DVB DVB

(#)

(*)

(*)(#) These Units can be APS (1+1) protected

These Units can be EPS (1+1) protected

1.5 Mbit/s SPARE1+N

Figure 38. General Block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

99

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

SP

IM

UX

RS

TM

ST

SA

HP

C

ST

M–1

6

WE

ST

ST

M–1

6 A

GG

RE

GA

TE

SP

IM

UX

RS

TM

ST

SA

HP

C

ST

M–4

WE

ST

ST

M–4

AG

GR

EG

AT

E

MA

TR

IX

SP

IM

UX

RS

TM

ST

SA

HP

C

ST

M–1

6

EA

ST

ST

M–1

6 A

GG

RE

GA

TE

SP

IM

UX

RS

TM

ST

SA

HP

C

ST

M–4

EA

ST

ST

M–4

AG

GR

EG

AT

E

PA

SS

–TH

RO

UG

H

PA

SS

–T

HR

OU

GH

LPC

HP

AH

PA

LPT

LPT

LPA

LPA

PI

PI

2 Mbit/s TRIB or 1.5 Mbit/s TRIB

2/1.

5 M

bit/s

1

LPC

HP

AH

PA

LPT

LPT

LPA

LPA

PI

PI

3x34 Mbit/s TRIB. or 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB.

34 M

bit/s

12

HP

A

LPT

LPA

PI

3

or 4

5 M

bit/s

LPC

HP

AH

PA

LPT

LPT

LPA

LPA

DE

MU

X/M

UX

34/2 TRAN. MUX and 5x2 Mbit/s

34 M

bit/s

116

PI

HP

A

LPT

LPA

PI

1

HP

A

LPT

LPA

PI

116

5

15

MS

P

SA

PG

MS

TH

PT

RS

TLP

A

PI

140/STM1 SWITCH TRIB.

140/

155

Mbi

t/s

155

(SA

)

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

140

LPC

155

Mbi

t/s

HP

A

HP

T

SA

MS

T

RS

T

PI

OP

TIC

AL

4 x

38 M

bit/s

4 x

38 M

bit/s

2 M

bit/s

SN

CP

155

Mbi

t/s

SA

MS

T

RS

T

PI

OP

TIC

AL

– 60

0

MS

PS

NC

P

(Jum

per

kit)

AC

CE

SS

MO

DU

LEA

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

AC

CE

SS

MO

DU

LEA

CC

ES

S M

OD

ULE

21

LPC

HP

AH

PA

LPT

LPT

LPA

LPA

PI

PI

HP

A

LPT

LPA

PI

DVB TRIB

TX

OR

RX

DV

BU

NID

IRE

CT

ION

AL

PO

RT

AC

CE

SS

MO

DU

LE

12

3

Figure 39. Block diagram of the Tributary and Aggregate units

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

100

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.1 STM–4 Aggregates sub–system

This subsystem is present when 1651 SM equipment is used. The equipment allows a max. of four STM–4Aggregate units to be used.The aggregate operates as a bidirectional interface (Tx/Rx) between the optical fiber and the Tributarysignals (connected through the Matrix unit and the opposite side Aggregate).The STM–4 signal (622 Mbit/s) is interconnected with:

• WEST side, regular (1 unit)• WEST side, spare (1 unit)• EAST side, regular (1 unit)• EAST side, spare (1 unit)

The allowed configurations are:

• Unprotected terminal (1 unit)• Unprotected Add/Drop (2 units)• APS Protected terminal (2 units)• APS Protected Add/Drop (4 units)

The description is applicable to all the STM–4 Aggregate units of this release listed in chapter 2 on page65.

The units can be distinguished by letters L and S defining their dependance on optical components usedfor Long distance or Short distance.The Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the unit’s front coverplace. The units which operate in the second window are indicated with 4.1, those operating in the third window with 4.2.

The units are identified by the type of connector used, FC/PC or SC/PC or DIN connectors.

The unit identified by JE (Joint engineering) have better optical characteristics, typically for the dispersionvalues (see chapter 4 ”Technical Specifications”on page 279).

The bidirectional functional circuits are:

SPI (Synchronous Physical Interface)It interfaces the STM–4 signal and the optical fiber, by extracting timing (in Rx).

MUX (Multidemultiplexing function)It serial/parallel converts from STM–4 to STM1 and viceversa.

RST (Regeneration Section Termination)It manages the section overhead bytes for the Regeneration section (R–SOH)

MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)It manages the section overhead bytes for the Multiplexing section (M–SOH)

SA (Section Adaptation)Processes the pointer to synchronize the sub–system and the line frequency

HPC (Higher order Path Connection)Allows selection and grooming of the sixteen AU4 streams to utilize in the STM–4frame.The AU4 streams can belong to the STM–4 Aggregate of the opposite side(pass through) or to the Tributaries (add/drop) connected through the Matrices.Each signal is split over a 38 Mbit/s 4–wire bus.This HPC function is not operative when Full Matrix is used (if is realized in the sameFull Matrix).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

101

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.2 STM–16 Aggregate sub–system

This subsystem is present when 1661SM–C equipment is used. The equipment allows a max of twoSTM–16 Aggregate units to be used.The Aggregate operates as a bidirectional interface (Tx/Rx) between the optical fiber and tributary signals(connected through the Matrix unit) and opposite side Aggregate.The STM–16 signal (2488 Mbit/s) is interconnected with:

• WEST side (1 unit)

• EAST side (1 unit)

The allowed configurations are

• Unprotected terminal (1 unit)

• Unprotected Add/Drop (2 units)

The description is applicable to all the STM–16 Aggregate units of this release listed in chapter 2 on page65.The units can be distinguished by letters L and S defining their dependance on optical components usedfor Long distance or Short distance.Th Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the unit’s front coverplate. The units whichoperate in the second window are indicated with 16.1, those operating in the third window, with 16.2.The units are identified by the type of connector used, FC/PC or SC/PC or DIN connectors.

Some Units are marked by the ”ID” or “ENH” abbreviation or named ”Enhanced”. These items are presetin order to supply additional ITU–T management functions for the future Releases of the 1661SM–CEquipment. In current release these new functions are not operative and all the Aggregates have the sameperformances.The same units cannot work with previous kind of Aggregate placed on the other side of the optical span.Previous kind of Aggregate (with different optical interface) are no more supplied in this release but canhave been upgraded from previous release.

The AU4 East/West connection (pass–through) are realized by means front connection using the cablesof the ”Coaxial Jumper Kit”, see chapter 2 on page 65..

For structured (VC12, VC3) Pass–through Full Matrix Unit is used.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

102

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The bidirectional functional circuits are:

SPI (Synchronous Physical Interface)It interfaces the STM–16 signal and the optical fiber, by extracting timing (in Rx).

MUX (Multidemultiplexing function)It serial/parallel converts from STM–16 to STM1 and viceversa.

RST (Regeneration Section Termination)It manages the section overhead bytes for the Regeneration section (R–SOH)

MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)It manages the section overhead bytes for the Multiplexing section (M–SOH)

SA (Section Adaptation)It processes the pointer to synchronize the sub–system and the line frequency

HPC (Higher order Path Connection)Allows selection and grooming of the 16 AU4 to utilize in the STM–16 frame.The AU4 streams can belong to the STM–16 Aggregate of the opposite side (pass–through) or to the Tributaries (add/drop) connected through the Matrices.The AU4 pass–through with opposite side Aggregate is realized through four 622 Mbit/ssignals; in the connection with Matrices each AU4 signal is split over 38 Mbit/s 4–wirebus. These connections are used for tributary drop–insert, TU pass–through andAggregate cross–connections.

The STM–16 Aggregate units can be connected to an eventual external Optical Amplifier to implementspans of the link.The Optical Amplifier alarm report is performed via discrete contacts (Housekeeping incoming pins).A bidirectional transmission on a single fiber is allowed by using an external optical passive coupler.The transmission direction is set by using not assigned bits of S1 byte.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

103

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.3 Connection sub–system

This sub–system allows all tributaries and Aggregates connections.When STM–4 Aggregates are used the Tributary and Aggregate sub–systems provide 16 STM–1payloads which can be managed by the Connection sub–system, i.e., 4 for the Agg. EAST, 4 for the Agg.WEST, 8 for the TRIBUTARIES (see Figure 40. ).

When STM–16 Aggregates are used the VC4 connection can be 8 for Aggr., distributed in every mannerand not 4 East and 4 West (see Figure 43. on page 108).STM–16 Agg. differences are indicated in para.3.1.3.1 on page 107.

To this concern, the MATRIX units have been assigned besides the Tributary and Aggregate units circuitryused.Different MATRICES can be chosen depending on the connections needed:

• CONNECTION CARD

• FULL MATRIX and 16x16 MATRIX (NB 1)

The following table illustrates the connections for each unit:

Table 12. Connection options

UNIT CONNECT OPTION

VC4 VC3/VC12 ACROSS 16 STM–1

AGG–TR AGG–AGG TR–TR AGG–TR AGG–AGG TR–TR

CONNECTION CARD YES YES NO NO NO NO

FULL MATRIX (NB1) YES YES YES YES YES YES

AGG = AggregateAGG = Aggregate

TR = Tributary

NB1As indicated in chapter 2 on page 65. in the current release a new Matrix Unit has been introduced: ”16x16Full Matrix”. This new Unit is an hardware upgrade for the present Full Matrix Unit and it is preset tosupport, in the future release, the new standard ITU–T management functions (J1/J2, TIM, POM,SNCP/N). In current release these new features are not performed, therefore the ”16x16 Full Matrix Unit”and the Full Matrix Unit carry out the same functions.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

104

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGG.

STM–4

WEST

AGG.

SPARE

AGG.

STM–4

EAST

AGG.

SPARE4 x AU4( + 4 Spare )

MATRICES

4 x AU4( + 4 Spare )


TRIB.


Figure 40. Connection with STM–4–Aggregate (1651 SM)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

105

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

• Connection Card (see Figure 41. )

Creates a simple extension between the Tributaries and the Aggregates.The connection functions are carried out only on the VC4’s by the Aggregates’ dedicatedcircuits.

The following Tributary units can be utilized:

– 140/STM–1 SWITCH TRIBUTARY

– STM–1 optical. This unit can also contain VC12 or VC3 structures, that will not bemanaged but only transferred.

The Connection Card doesen’t perform any Cross– connection.

Two Connection Cards must be utilized.

AGG.WEST

SPAREAGG.

AGG.EAST

SPAREAGG.

AU4 PASS–THROUGHWEST(*)

EAST(*)

CONNECTION CARD 1

AU4 DROP/INSERT

CONNECTION CARD 2

TRIB1

TRIB2

TRIB10

140 Mbit/sSTM1 (VC4 MANAGED)

(*) NOT ALLOWED WITH STM–16

*

*

BOTH CONNECTION CARDS MUST BE INSERTED. THE CONN. CARD 2 IS NOT A SPAREFOR THE FIRST ONE.

*

Figure 41. Connection with Connection Card

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

106

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

• Full Matrix and 16x16 Matrix (see Figure 42. )

All the Aggregate and Tributary connection options are possible.

Same sided VC Aggregate connections are also possible.

The selection of circuits mapping signals into the SDH structures depend on the type ofconnection involved.

VC12 and VC3 structures of STM1 signal are processed

An additional Matrix unit can be utilized as spare.

AGG.WEST

SPARE

AGG.AGG.EAST

STM–16 AGG. AU4 PASS–THROUGH

WEST

SPARE FULL MATRIX

TRIB1

TRIB10

2Mbit/s34Mbit/s

* NOT ALLOWED WITH STM–16

16 STM–1AU/VC MANAGEMENT

CROSS

AGG. WEST

CROSS

AGG. EASTCONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS

CROSS–CONNECTIONSTRIB–TRIB

PASS–THROUGH

AGG. WEST–AGG. EAST

DROP–INSERTTRIB–AGG.

FULL MATRIX

140Mbit/sOPTICAL/ELECTRICAL STM–1

WITH STM–16 AGG. THE AU4 PASS–THROUGH ARE REALIZEDBETWEEN AGG. UNIT BY MEANS DIRECT CABLING.

SPAREAGG. EAST

* *

Figure 42. Cross–connection with Full Matrix

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

107

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.3.1 STM–16 Aggregate differences (1661 SM–C)

See Figure 43. on page 108.

When using the STM–16 Aggregates, while needing only the VC–4 connection, the eight VC–4 connectedAggregates (connecting the subsystem) will be distributed in any direction and not only 4 East + 4 Westas for the STM–4.With SNCP, up to 8 VC–4 connected to one side will be protected by the other.

There are two ways of implementing cross–connection when needing lower–order cross–connection withSTM–16 Aggr.. Both will use the Full Matrix unit:

1 ) Linear links.

In this case lower order VC grooming can be implemented inside 8 VC4 distributed in every direction (notonly 4 East + 4 West).

2 ) SNCP ring.

In this case lower order VC grooming can be implemented inside 4 VC4 from/to East and 4 from/to West.

3 ) Enhanced Connectivity In SNCP Ring.

It is possible to activate the Enhanced Connectivity Function that allows to protect up to 8 VC–4 withLow–order cross–connection on condition that all the LO VC were connected with the same ConnectionConfiguration Mode. If instead is necessary to manage each single TU in different manner the connectioncomes back under the previous constraint.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

108

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGG.

STM–16

WEST

AGG.

STM–16

EAST

16 max AU4

MATRICES

EA/D*

TRIB.


W*A/D

Pass–through (P.T)

ADD–DROP *8 max AU4 ( +8 Spare)

* : By A/D (Add/Drop indication) it is generally meant all the connections with Aggregates managed bythe MATRIX (drop–insert, TU pass–through, cross–connection aggregate).

TYPE OF NUMBERS OF AU4 USEDTYPE OF CONNECTION WA/D E A/D W+E A/D P.T

LINEAR 8 8 8 16–(max 8)

VC4 SNCP RING 8 = W A/D

W+E 16–W

VC12/VC3 SNCP RING 4 = W A/D

W+E 16–W

VC12/VC3 ENHANCEDSNCP RING 8 = W

A/DW+E 16–W

Figure 43. Cross–connection with STM–16 Aggregate (1661 SM–C)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

109

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.4 Tributary Sub–system

The Tributary Subsystem consists of a set of Units and functions housed and managed in the main Shelf1651 SM /1661 SM–C ( Line Shelf Tributary Subsystem) and one optional extension named ”Drop ShelfTributary Subsystem” housed in the 1641 SM–D Equipment. The latter is wholly managed by the LineShelf as regards the alarms, configurations and control hence as far as the Network management isconcerned the Drop Shelf is part of the 1651 SM / 1661 SM–C NETWORK ELEMENT and it is notdistinguishable from the former.The first control level on the units is performed by the Card Controller Subunit mounted on it that managesthe unit and interfaces the Equipment Controller as far as concern Alarms, Configuration, PerformanceMonitoring etc.

3.1.4.1 Line Shelf Tributary Subsystem

The line shelf can house the following types of Tributaries:

1.5 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s

34 Mbit/s

45 Mbit/s

140 Mbit/s

Plesiochronous

155 Mbit/s, STM1 electrical155 Mbit/s, STM1 electrical

155 Mbit/s, STM1 opticalSynchronous

Digital Video Broadcasting Asyncronous SerialInterface

The 21x2/1.5 Mbit/s TRIB. and 2/34 Trans. Mux units can be inserted only in the first 3 slots of the firstgroup, besides the spare of slot 5.

Besides the basic 21*2Mb/s Tributary, a specialized unit with additional feature named Retiming, isallowable (see para 3.2.1.2 on page 162).

Three signals per 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s unit are managed. While for the 2 Mbit/s unit, 21 signals aremanaged on the same card.

Three DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting ) unidirectional signals per unit are managed. The Unit can workas transmitting or receiving by HW presetting selection. The Unit transmits or receives three 270 Mbit/scoded TV channels with a resulting effective bit–rate ranging from 1–40 Mbit/s. Inside the Unit this signalis put on 45 Mbit/s unidirectional frames to be transported on the SDH network at VC–3 level.The DVB tributary is equivalent to a standard 34/45 Tributary under the Craft Terminal point of view andalso regarding the Network Management perspective.

The 140/STM–1 Switch Tributary unit operates as a tributary for a 140 Mbit/s or a 155 Mbit/s electricalsignal by SW selection.

The 140/STM–1 Switch Tributary unit and the STM–1 optical unit (S–1.1 TRIB. , L–1.1 and L–1.2 )manage only one signal.

The 21x2/1.5 Mbit/s Trib. can be EPS N+1 protected.The 3x34, 3x45 Mbit/s Trib. can be EPS 1+1 and N+1 protected .The DVB Trib. can’t be EPS neither N+1 nor 1+1 protected.

The 140/155 Mbit/s Switchable Tributary electrical unit can be EPS 1+1 and N+1 protected .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

110

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The 155 Mbit/s electrical unit and the STM–1 optical unit are APS 1+1 Single Ended protected .

The equipment is provided with 10 tributary slots split into two groups of 5 units each. The 5th slot of eachgroup is only assigned to the spare unit (1+N protection).

The rest of the units can occupy any position as long as they are configured as follows (except spares):

• 8 per STM1 optical or 140/STM–1 electrical (8 streams)• 8 per 3x34 Mbit/s TRIB (24 streams)• 8 per 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB (24 streams)• 8 per DVB TRIB (24 unidirectional streams)

Heterogeneous tributary configuration is allowed.

The electrical Tributary physical access are the ”Access Modules” subunit that interface the tributarysignals with the external source.These modules differ in termination (75 or 120 ohms) and type of connector (Siemens or Type 43 or Sub–D).

The DVB phisical access are on the front cover plate by means 3 pairs of BNC connectors.

If the DROP SHELF is present the first three slots of the second set are dedicated to house as manySTM–1 electrical units. On these units convey the 3 x 63 2Mbit/s flows coming from the Drop Shelf bymeans three pairs of coaxial cables that have to be connected to the Access Modules relevant to the Unitsinserted in the Line Shelf slot # 5,6,7. Refer to the Table 14. on page 112.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

111

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.4.2 Line shelf Tributary Subsystem

Table 13. Configuration

1651 SM/1661 SM–C

STM–1 EL SPARE(1+N)

STM–1 EL SPARE(1+N)

STM–1 OPT. STM–1 OPT.

140 Mbit/s SPARE(1+N)

140 Mbit/s SPARE(1+N)

3x34 Mbit/s SPARE(1+N)




DVB DVB


21x1.5 Mbit/s SPARE(1+N)

34/2 and 5x2Mbit/s SPARE(1+N)

STM–1 ELECT.Unit carrying

3 x 63 2Mbit/s from DropShelf

SPARE(1+N)

TRIB.1 TRIB.2 TRIB.3 TRIB.4 TRIB.Spare 1

TRIB.5 TRIB.6 TRIB.7 TRIB.8 TRIB.Spare 2

SET # 1 SET # 2

This table summarizes the configuration options used and indicates the units assigned to each tributaryslot.

The Access Module subunits interface the electrical tributary signals with the external source, except theDVB physical access that is reached directly on unit front cover plate .The Access Module subunits differ in bit–rate, termination (75 or 120 ohms) and K20 standard protection(if any).Local market Access Module can be supplied.

With reference to Figure 39. on page 99 the main functional block of each unit employed is defined in thefollowing.

NOTE: Some functions can be present in both of the connected units (e.g., in the tributaries and in theFull Matrix), because the units can work with different equipment and configurations.In this case the sole duty of the LPC function (e.g., when using the trib. with Full Matrix) is ofestablishing the position of the tributary flow in the first of the three relevant slots TUG3.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

112

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.4.3 Drop Shelf Tributary Subsystem

The Drop Shelf trib subsystem provides up to 189 x 2048 Mbit/s streams using nine 21 x 2 Mb/s tributaries.The 1641 SM–D provides a ”9 +1” equipment protection scheme for these tributaries.

Table 14. Configuration

1641 SM–D

21 x 2 Mbit/s SPARE1+N

21 x 2 Mbit/s

TRIB.1

TRIB.2

TRIB.3

TRIB.4

TRIB.5

TRIB.6

TRIB.SPARE

TRIB.8

TRIB.9

TRIB.10

21x2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY unit

The following are the main bidirectional functional circuits:

– PI (Physical Interface) It interfaces the 2 Mbit/s signal with the external source by extracting timing(on the Tx side).

– LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) Extracts/inserts the 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal from/to theC12 synchronous container

– LPT (Lower order Path termination) Manages the overhead byte (POH) thus structuring the virtualcontainer (VC12).

– HPA (High order Path Adaptation) Processes the TU12’s pointer

– LPC (Lower order Path Connection) Cross–connects any position of the STM–1 interfacing theaggregates through matrices.

3x34 Mbit/s TRIB. unit


• PI (Physical Interface) It interfaces the 34 Mbit/s signal with the external source by extractingtiming (on the Tx side)

• LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) Extracts/inserts the 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal from/tothe C3 synchronous container

• LPT (Lower order Path termination) Manages the overhead byte (POH) thus structuring thevirtual container (VC3).

• HPA (High order Path Adaptation) Processes the TU3’s pointer• LPC (Lower order Path Connection) Cross–connects any position of the STM–1 interfacing the

aggregates through matrices.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

113

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3x45 Mbit/s TRIB. unit


• PI (Physical Interface) It interfaces the 45 Mbit/s signal with the external source by extractingtiming (on the Tx side)





DVB TRIB. unit

Used for video signal that comes in the unit through an ASI interface. The Unit manages a range offrequencies from 1 Mbit/s to 40 Mbit/s. Each DVB video stream is mapped over a VC3 (45Mbit/splesiochronous stream.

A part from the ASI physical interface that follows the CENELEC EN 50083–9 Recommendations, themain functional circuits, under the ITU–T point of view, are the same as 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB. unit:





34/2 Trans Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary

The unit interfaces a 34 Mbit/s framed plesiochronous signal, and five 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous signals.The 34 Mbit/s stream is demultiplexing into sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals.


• PI (Physical Interface)It interfaces the 34 Mbit/s (2 Mbit/s) signal with the external source byextracting timing (on the Tx side)

• MUX/DEMUX (for the 34 Mbit/s signal onlyIt demultiplexes (in Tx) the 34 Mbit/s signal into sixteen 2 Mbit/s ones.It multiplexes (in Rx) the sixteen 2 Mbit/s streams into one 34 Mbit/s signal.

• LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)Drops/Adds the 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal from/to the C12 synchronous container

• LPT (Lower order Path termination)Manages the overhead byte (POH) thus structuring the virtual container (VC12).

• HPA (High order Path Adaptation)Processes the TU12’s pointer

• LPC (Lower order Path Connection)Cross–connects any position of the STM–1 interfacing the aggregates.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

114

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

140/STM1 SWITCH TRIBUTARY

The unit can be utilized for one 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary or for one 155 Mbit/s electricalsynchronous tributary (this facility is SW selectable).


• PI (Physical Interface).It interfaces the tributary signal with the external source by extracting timing (on the Tx side)The circuit is utilized by both types of tributaries.

The following circuits have been defined:

• 140 Mbit/s

– LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)Inserts the 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal into the C4 synchronous container

– HPT (Higher order Path termination)Manages the overhead byte (POH) thus structuring the virtual container (VC4).

– PG (SA) Pointer Generator of section Adaptation.Insert a fixed pointer value in AUOH.

• 155 Mbit/s

– RST (Regenerator Section Termination)Manages the first three lines of the SOH.

– MST (Multiplexer Section termination)Manages the last 5 lines of the SOH

– SA (Section Adaptation)Processes the AU4 pointer

• MSP (Multiplex Section Protection) and SNCP (Path Protection Switching)This circuit is applicable to both types of Tributaries. Its function is to choose between themain/standby paths (MSP) of the same side Aggregate and the East/West side (SNCP) of thesignals received (through the matrix) from the Aggregates.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

115

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

155 Mbit/s Optical Tributary unit (S–1.1 TRIB. F.C., L–1.1 TRIB. F.C., L–1.2 TRIB. F.C.)

S and L letters define the Short or Long distance unit.FC defines the connector used.


• SPI (Synchronous Physical Interface)It E/O interfaces the external source by extracting timing from Rx

• RST (Regenerator Section Termination)Manages the first 3 lines of the SOH

• MST (Multiplexer Section termination)Manages the last 5 lines of the SOH.

• SA (Section Adaptation)Processes the AU4 pointer to synchronize timing.

• HPT (Higher order Path termination)Manages the overhead byte (POH) thus structuring the virtual container (VC4).

• HPA (Higher order Path Adaptation)It synchronizes (in the Rx direction only) the AU4 pointer and the TU pointers that might beinside the VC4.

• LPC (Lower order Path Connection)Cross–connects any position of the STM–1 interfacing the aggregates through matrices.

155 Mbit/s Optical Tributary unit (S–1.1 TRIB. 600, L–1.1 TRIB. 600, L–1.2 TRIB. 600)

S and L letters define the Short or Long distance unit.FC defines the connector used.


• SPI (Synchronous Physical Interface)It E/O interfaces the external source by extracting timing from Rx

• RST (Regenerator Section Termination)Manages the first 3 lines of the SOH

• MST (Multiplexer Section termination)Manages the last 5 lines of the SOH.

• SA (Section Adaptation)Processes the AU4 pointer to synchronize timing.

• MSP (Multiplex Section Protection)Its function is to choose between the main/standby paths (MSP) and the East/West side (SNCP)of the signals received (through the matrix) from the Aggregates.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

116

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.5 Automatic Protections Sub–system

The equipment is provided with automatic switching protections managed by the Equipment Controllerunit. The protections are activated following alarm detection, thus guaranteeing system availability.To switch, the equipment is provided with spare unit and suitable circuitry and devices.

The operative protections of this release are:

– Equipment protection

• 1+1 and 1+N EPS (Equipment protection Switching) for electrical tributaries• 1+1 EPS (Equipment Protection Switching) for Clock Reference and Full Matrix unit• Power Supply Protection. If three power supply units are utilized, one of these will be considered

as spare.

– Network protection

• 1+1 Single ended MS Linear Protection (APS) for STM–4 Aggregate and synchronoustributary unit

• SNCP at TU12, TU3, VC4 level, utilized in ring networks.• Drop and Continue implemented through a SNC–P single ended connection between the NEs

that are involved in the dual node architecture.• TWO–FIBER MS–SPRING (Multiplex Section Shared Protection Rings) for STM–16

Aggregate only.

The switching information is also indicated on the Craft Terminal screen.

Protections are defined in the following.

3.1.5.1 General description of the terms and definitions used in this paragraph

The types of protection are:

– Equipment protection

• EPS

– Network protection

• MS Linear Trail Protection (APS)• SNCP• Drop and Continue• TWO–FIBER MS–SPRING

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

117

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

EPS (Equipment protection switching)

With EPS a spare unit fully replaces a faulty unit.EPS is the action taken as a consequence of the detection of a permanent hardware fault (internal)in a unit. EPS is applicable only to units that are electrically interfaced. For EPS management, the unitsused as spare must store a copy of the configuration of the protected units.

MS Linear Trail Protection ( Simplified APS)

Purpose of this protection is to use a spare connection if the working one is no longer available.Switching might be caused by line failure or faulty hardware on another system connected to the one beingconsidered ( SF switching criteria) or by the B2 Signal Degrade alarm (SD switching criteria). For thislatter the Equipment provisioning supports the definition of the SD threshold value and the choice toinclude or not the SD in the single–end APS.

The MS Linear Trail Protection is also used as protection against hardware faults on the SDH line interface(Aggregates or Synchronous Tributaries); in this case it is assumed that the line interface is part ofthe line.The MS Linear Trail Protection applies to the synchronous interface only and it allows two OperatingModes:

• bidirectional (not operative in this release)

• unidirectional

In the bidirectional operating mode the failure of one line, in one direction, determines the use of the spareconnection for both directions.While in the unidirectional operating mode, the spare connection is used only in the direction where faultshave occurred.

The protection is non revertive and the Manual switch mode and lock–out are available

SNCP (Subnetwork Connection Protection) (PPS)

SNCP is used on ring networks and the switching type supplied is only dedicated (1+1)This protection can be forced on single LO and HO VC by means the Remote Control option of AlarmStatus and Control function.Switching occurs on the path, selecting (Rx side) the signal transmitted to both Tx West and East sides.SNCP is active on VC4, TU12 or TU3 path based on fail indications like: Ex Ber(B3), AU AIS, AU LOP,TU AIS, TU LOP respectively.The use of the Connection Card does not allow SNCP function on the optical STM–1 Tributary named S1.1 Trib. F.C., L 1.1 Trib. F.C. and L 1.2 Trib. F.C., but this protection is provided by the Optical Trib 600type.

Drop and Continue

Drop and Continue is an architecture to connect sub–networks, in order to improve traffic availability.The traffic can be dropped at two nodes on the ring . The continue signal is forwarded like a pass–throughsignal.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

118

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

2F MS–SPRING (STM–16 system only)

Two fiber Multiple Section–Shared Protection Ring supports network topology only.It requires only two fibers for each span of the ring.Switch occurs on AU4, looped–back from the working to the spare AU4, carried on the same fiber.The switching operation is dual ended, using K1,K2 bytes of SOH and an appropriate algorithm.Each span of the ring requires only two fibres. Each fibre carries both working channels and protectionone; the AU4 # 9 to #16 of the STM–16 streams work as spare for the other main AU4 # 1 to #8.

”Architecture types” and protection ”mode” are:

– 1 + 1 : 1 spare line / unit is present for 1 working line / unit. Both in APS and EPS.Spare carries the same amount of traffic as the working one.

– 1 : 1 : 1 spare line / unit is normally used for lower priority traffic and can replace 1working line / unit with high priority traffic. Both for APS and EPS.Not operative in this release.

– 1 : N : 1 spare line / unit is normally used for low priority traffic and can replace one outof N line / unit with high priority traffic.Not operative in this release

– 1 + N : 1 spare line / unit can replace one out of N working line / units.MS Linear Trail 1 + N is not operative release

When N is greater than 1 each working line can be prioritized. This to decide which working line to protectin case of double failure.

• Two operating modes can be selected for these protection architecture:

– revertible– not revertible

In the revertive operation the original switching configuration is automatically restored when the failure isremoved.

At this regard the following performances are allowable:

• CRU EPS 1+1 : Only Not revertible

• TRIBUTARIES and MATRIX EPS 1+1: Not revertible (suggested)

• 1+1 MS Linear Trail Protection : Not revertible

• 1 + N TRIBUTARY EPS : Revertible as the relevant definition states.In this case a suitable ”Wait time to restore” must be specified and it must be the same for allTributaries.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

119

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.5.2 EPS for electrical tributaries

Types of protection:

a ) 1+N

b ) 1+1

Refer to Table 13. on page 111

1 + N : – Trib. spare 1 protects trib 1 to 4.This group of 5 trib. is defined SET1.

– Trib. spare 2 protects trib. 5 to 8.This group of 5 trib. is defined SET2.

This protection applies to all the electrical trib (2 Mb/s, 34 Mb/s, 45 Mb/s, 34/2 Trans Mux, 140 Mb/s, STM1electrical)

When an n+1 EPS protection group is composed by 21*2Mb/s cards with and without Retiming function,the Spare card should have Retiming capability in order to guarantee the full features protection to everymain traffic card.2 Mb/s 1+N protection is possible only in the first Tributary SET and trib. 4 cannot be used (N max 3). EPS 1+N is only ”revertive”.

1 + 1 : – The tributaries are paired (4):Trib1–Trib2, Trib3–Trib4, Trib5–Trib6, Trib7–Trib8.

– Within each pair, the highest Trib. is the spare one.Trib spare 1 and 2 are not used.

The 2 Mb/s 1+1 protection is a 1+N prot., when N=1.

The tributary electrical connections are realized on the Access Module Subunits mounted at the top of thesubrack.

Access Module differs for bit rate and type of connection and they are used in the protection configurationfor 34 Mb/s, 45 Mb/s and 140 Mb/s trib. and 155 Mbit/s.The DVB tributary unit is not EPS protected.

N.B. In order to correctly set EPS for 3x34 Mbit/s, 3x45 Mbit/s and 140 Mbit/s Tributaries referto para 3.2.18 on page 263, para 3.2.24.3 on page 277, para 3.2.24.4 on page 278.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

120

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

c ) 1+1 Connections

Figure 44. shows the example for 1+1, 140 Mb/s or electrical STM1 trib. Only the signal for trib 1 and2 is indicated.The tributary signal is connected to the Access module of the working trib. unit (1). The same signal isconnected with the switch module of the spare trib unit (2) through the backpannel.The command MSW coming from the Equipment Controller, activates the Switch Driver inside the AccessModules selecting the connection with trib.1 or 2 by means of two relays (one for transmitter side and onefor receiver side) that switches the I/O customer signals towards working tributary or towards sparetributary.The same configuration applies to trib. pairs 3 and 4, 5 and 6, 7 and 8.

140Mb/sOR

STM–1ELECTRICAL TRIB.

TRIB.1

MSW1

2TRIB

MSW2

SPARE

ACCESS MODULE

Figure 44. 1+1 EPS connection for 140 Mb/s or STM1 electrical trib. 1 and 2

Figure 45. shows the example for 1+1, 3x34 Mb/s Trib. or 3x45 Mb/s Trib.. Only the signals for trib 1 and2 are indicated. The operating mode is as that of the 140 Mb/s.

34Mbi/s45Mb/sTRIBS.

TRIB.1

MSW1

2TRIB.

MSW2

SPARE

1

2

3

ACCESS MODULE

Figure 45. 1+1 EPS connections for 3x34 Mb/s trib. 1 and 2

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

121

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

d ) 2 Mb/s 1+N connections

Figure 46. shows these connections.

The 21x 2/1.5 Mbit/s signals are transmitted to the relevant tributary units (1 to 3) through an AccessModule.The same Access Modules can switch the signals towards the Spare 1 tributary. When the switch is active(MSW command), all the 21 signals of the faulty Tribs. are managed by the spare 1 trib..

TRIB.1

MSW1

121

–1

–21

TRIB.2

MSW2

2242

–22

–42

TRIB.3

MSW3

4363

–43

–63

TRIB.SPARE 1

1

21

ACCESS MODULE

ACCESS MODULE

ACCESS MODULE

2/1.5 Mbit/s

2/1.5 Mbit/s

2/1.5 Mbit/s

Figure 46. 1+N EPS connections for 2/1.5 Mb/s trib.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

122

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

e ) 140 Mb/s and STM1 electrical trib. 1+N connections

Figure 47. shows this connection.

The 140 Mb/s or electrical STM1 signals are connected to the relevant tributary through the Access Modules.The Modules can switch (commands MSW 1:4 and 5:8) signals 1 to 4 towards the tributary spare 1 andthe signals 5 to 8 towards the tributary spare 2.It is possible to protect a mixed composition of 140 Mb/s and STM–1 electrical Trib. by selecting therelevant option for the Trib. Spare 1 or 2 Configuration (refer to Operators Handbook – SubrackConfiguration).

TRIB.1140Mb/s

MSW1

OR ELECTRICAL

STM–1

TRIB.2140Mb/s

MSW2

OR ELECTRICAL

STM–1

TRIB.3140Mb/s

MSW3

OR ELECTRICAL

STM–1

TRIB.4140Mb/s

MSW4

OR ELECTRICAL

STM–1

TRIB.SPARE 1

TRIB.5140Mb/s

MSW5

OR ELECTRICALSTM–1

TRIB.6140Mb/s

MSW6


TRIB.7140Mb/s

MSW7


TRIB.8140Mb/s

MSW8


TRIB.SPARE 2

ACCESS MODULE

ACCESS MODULE

Figure 47. 1+N EPS connections, 140 Mbit/s or electrical STM1 trib.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

123

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

f ) 34 Mbit/s trib. and 45 Mbit/s 1+N connections.

Figure 48. on page 124 showns this connections.The Access Modules connect the proper 3x34 Mb/s (3x45 Mb/s) signals to each tributary.The Modules can switch (commands MSW 1:4 and 5:8) the signals towards the 3 Switch Units in thefollowing way:

– trib. 1 to 4, the first two 34 Mb/s (45 Mb/s) signals to the Spare Trib. 1

– trib 5 to 8 the first two 34 Mb/s (45 Mb/s) signals to the Spare Trib. 2.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

124

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

TRIB.1

34Mb/s

MSW1

or 45Mb/s1

TRIB.2

TRIB.3

TRIB.4

34Mb/s

MSW1

or 45Mb/s2

34Mb/s

MSW1

or 45Mb/s3

34Mb/s

MSW4

or 45Mb/s10

34Mb/s

MSW4

or 45Mb/s11

34Mb/s

MSW4

or 45Mb/s12

TRIB.5

34Mb/s

MSW5

or 45Mb/s13

TRIB.6

TRIB.7

TRIB.8

34Mb/s

MSW5

or 45Mb/s14

34Mb/s

MSW5

or 45Mb/s15

34Mb/s

MSW8

or 45Mb/s22

34Mb/s

MSW8

or 45Mb/s23

34Mb/s

MSW8

or 45Mb/s24

TRIB.SPARE 2

TRIB.SPARE 1

Figure 48. 1+N EPS connections, 34 Mb/s trib.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

125

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

g ) 34/2 Trans Mux & 5x2Mbit/s 1+N Connections

(See Figure 49. )

The 2 Mbit/s and 34 Mbit/s signals are connected to the relevant tributary through the 21x2 Mbit/s AccessModules with coaxial connectors (75 Ohm 1:0/2.3).For the 34 Mbit/s signal we use the 15th Tx and Rx connector. For the 5 2 Mbit/s signals the first 5 Txand Rx connectors are used.For further details refer to the Installation Section ( Chapter 5 on page 311) .

34MTRIB.1

34/2

1

2Mb/s

5x2M

34M

2M

2M

1

5

MSW1

34MTRIB.2

34/2

2

2Mb/s

5x2M

34M

2M

2M

1

5

MSW2

34MTRIB.3

34/2

3

2Mb/s

5x2M

34M

2M

2M

1

5

MSW3

SPARE

1

34M

2M2M

Figure 49. 1+N EPS connections, 34/2 Trans.Mux & 5x2M

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

126

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

h ) Operating mode of the trib. EPS switch

The description is referred to Figure 50. on page 127 and is valid for 1+1 and 1+N protections.

The Spare tributary houses the ”EPS Decisor” whose function is to process the alarm status received fromthe working tributaries (OK, KO 1 to N),with the proper alarm status.The EPS decisor takes into account, in case of 1+N protection, of the signals priority. By OK–KO signalit is meant:

– OK : USE THE SPARE. The spare unit is available and is replacing a faulty working unit(”PROTECTION condition”)

– KO : DON’T USE THE SPARE. The spare unit has failed or no working unit has failed.(”IDLE” condition).

The other units concerned with switching receive the OK–KO signal from the spare trib. unit.The OK–KO signals are also received from the working units used in a priority decisor to detect the workingtributary to substitute with a spare(1+N protection).The HWP circuits of the connected unit, switches–over to the spare tributary unit.

The OK KO signals are also sent towards the Equipment Controller.In this way the Equipment Controller sends the MSW1:MSW8 commands to the Access Modules asdescribed above.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

127

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

HWP

T1

TN

PRIORITYDECISOR

TRIB.1

T1

TRIB.N

TN

MATRIX MAIN(AGGREGATE MAIN WITH

CONNECTION CARD)

OK–K01

OK–K0N

EPSDECISIOR

INTERNAL FAILURE

TRIB. SPARE

OK – KO

TSP

MATRIX SPARE(AGGREGATE SPARE WITH

CONNECTION CARD)

EQUIPMENTCONTROLLER

ESCT

MSW1

MSWB

OK–K01 OK–K0N

TRIB SPARE

Figure 50. Tributary EPS operation

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

128

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.5.3 EPS for Full Matrix (or 16x16 Matrix) and CRU

The protection operates at unit level and allows switching over to a spare unit according to the followingarrangements:

• Full Matrix unit: not revertive or revertive 1+1 switch

• Clock Reference unit: not revertive 1+1 switch

Switching occurs following a failure criteria associated with a unit failure or any internal failure(Card missing, card or software mismatch, card not responding).

With regard to the Full Matrix the switch operation involves all the units processing the signals swoppedwith the Full Matrix (Aggregates, tributaries, AUX/EOW) without intervention of the Equipment Controllerunit.The spare Full Matrix processes (EPS decisor) the alarm status received from the Main Full Matrix(OK–KO MAIN signal) with the proper status.When ”Main” is in service and OK, the status is defined ”IDLE”.When ”Main” is KO and ”Spare” is OK, the status is defined ”PROTECTION” and the Spare Full Matrixis set into service.All the connected units receive the OK–KO command from the spare FULL Matrix to select (HWP)the signal swopped (bridge–Tx and switch–Rx) with this units. (KO, don’t use SPARE; OK, use SPARE).In ”revertive” mode, when ”Main” is OK again it returns into service. Figure 51. on page 129 indicates theFull Matrix switch.

The 1+1 switch (not revertive) of the CRU unit involves all the units processing the synchronisms receivedfrom the same CRU A and B (Tributaries, Aggregates, AUX/EOW), without the intervention of theEquipment Controller unit.

All units switch upon receiving the unit failure alarm criteria from the same CRU A/B. Signals CKA/B,(clocks) and CRU A/B ALARM are illustrated in Figure 68. on page 150.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

129

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

BR

IDG

ET

RIB

HW

P

SW

ITC

H

A BT

x

A BR

x

MA

INF

ULL

MA

TR

IX

OK

–KO

MA

IN

SP

AR

EF

ULL

MA

TR

IX

OK

–KO

SP

AR

E

EP

SD

EC

ISIO

R

AA

BB

TR

IBH W P

A B

HW

P

AB

OK

–KO

AG

G

H W P

A B

AG

GH W P

A B

AU

X/E

OW

Figure 51. Full Matrix EPS

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

130

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.5.4 Single Ended MS Trial Protection ( Simplified Linear APS)

This functions represent a 1+1 unidirectional line protection for STM–4 Aggregates, STM1 opticaltributaries and STM1 electrical tributaries.It operates at line and unit level, software detecting hardware internal and line failures.The fine switching criteria are : Loss of Signal, Loss of frame, MS–AIS and Signal Degrade.It is not revertive.

The following description is referred to the Aggregate.

With reference to Figure 52. on page 131, all the units connected to the Aggregate Main A and Spare B ofone side (tributary, Full Matrix and other side Aggregates) with HWP function, must bridge the same signalon both ”A” and ”B” Aggregate (Tx), while the selection of the signal coming from ”A”and ”B” depends onthe status of OK–KO signal of the Aggregates.

The Spare Aggregate (B) processes (MS Trial Protection decisor) the alarm status received from the MainAggregate (A) (OK–KO A signal) with the proper alarm status.

When Main Aggregate is in–service and OK, the status is defined as ”IDLE”.When Main Aggregate is KOand spare is OK, the status is defined as ”PROTECTION”, and the Spare Aggregate in set into service.All the connected units receive the OK–KO B command from the Spare Aggregate to select (switch ofHWP) the signal received from this unit (OK, SPARE selected; KO, MAIN selected).The OK–KO functional signals, when transmitted to the various units, are called OSW meaning OUTPUT,ISW meaning INPUT.

For Optical and 155Mb/s electrical tributaries MS Trail Protection the same operation is performed withthe following specific indications:

• the tributaries are associated in four pairs: trib1–trib2, trib3–trib4, trib5–trib6, trib7–trib8

• within each pair, the highest trib. is the spare one

• trib. spare 1 and 2 are not used.

Mixed composition of Optical and STM 1 Electrical Tributaries in SL APS protection is allowable.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

131

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

BRIDGE

UNIT 1

HWP

SWITCH

A

B

Tx

A

B

RxUNIT n

MAIN

AGGREGATE

A

A

A

MS TRAIL

DECISOR

INTERNAL+ LINEFAIL

SPAREAGGREGATE

B

B

B

OK–KO B

OK–KO B

ABAB

PROTECTION

OK–KO A

Figure 52. Single Ended MS Trial Protection (SL–APS)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

132

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.5.5 SNCP

SNCP is employed on ring networks on which several equipment have been installed. Two operating modecan be selected for single VC SNCP:

• revertive

• not revertive

In the revertive operation the ”Wait time to restore” is fixed at 5 min.

As stated in the example shown in Figure 53. on page 133 several equipment (numbered 1 to 5) arering–connected on a looped path.Each of the equipment on the node is bidirectionally connected (East and West sides).One of the two directions represent the main path (clockwise).The opposite direction will utilize a second fiber line for the spare traffic (counter clockwise).

The automatic protection intervenes upon detecting path failure.Each transmitting tributary node is permanently connected (bridge) in the main traffic direction (clockwise)and in the protected traffic direction (counter clockwise).The Tx signal reaches destination through two different paths thus enabling the node receiving it to selectthe best one (switch).

The example of Figure 53. on page 133 illustrates the connection between two tributaries (T1 and T2) andrelevant input/output nodes with associated pass–throughs.

For example, T1 is transmitted by equipment 2 in both directions, but will be extracted from equipment5 by the main connection (clockwise).

A failure or degrade on the main path causes to switch over to the spare one with subsequent andsimultaneous check on the two paths.It can be deduced from the above that one–way directions concerns not only ring propagation butswitching as well. When the receiving end switches no information is sent to the corresponding Tx sideto activate the switching operation at the remote end (Single ended).

To manage switching the SNCP architecture utilizes the data inherent to the Path and not to the Line.Switching is in fact activated by defective operations occurring at the VC4 or TU–12/3 levels.When the path is no longer available, an AIS signal is transmitted on the same path to activate protection.In this manner SNCP can protect the paths following cable break–down or failures along the fiber andnodes.Cable break–down concerns all the fibers it contains hence it places traffic in both directions out–of–service, while a failure concerns only one fiber.

The Tributary and Full Matrix units are provided with a path switching circuit (bridge + switch). Its enablingdepends on the equipment configuration.

• Forced switch command

This command belongs to the Remote Control option of the Alarm Status and Control Application andit activates the switches between the protected and the protecting path, with reference to single Loworder and High order VCs.

This command is prominent as regards the Alarms that activates the SNCP and therefore this commandis executed independently from these latter. To recover the previous protection algorithm based on theAlarms the operator sends from CT, the Clear command.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

133

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

BRIDGE

SWITCH

T1, T2 PASS–THROUGH

T2 PASS–THROUGH T1 PASS–THROUGH

T1 PASS–THROUGH T2 PASS–THROUGH

COUNTERCLOCKWISECLOCKWISE

2

T1

T2

T2

T1

1

4

5

3STM–n

Figure 53. Typical ring network with SNCP (PPS)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

134

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.5.6 Drop and Continue

(see Figure 54. on page 135, Figure 55. on page 136, Figure 56. on page 137, Figure 57. on page137.)

The Drop and Continue architecture has been implemented in the network to improve traffic availability.

Drop and Continue is a way of protecting a path crossing a number of sub–networks, e.g., rings.

The sub–networks should be connected through at least two nodes (so realizing two independentconnections).

The equipment is configured as ”DROP and CONTINUE” on each interconnection node.

The subnetworks’ equipment implement the SNCP 1+1 connection.

The resulting architecture affords protection against multiple failures (evenly distributed one persubnetwork) tolerated without traffic loss (node failure or single cable cut).

The traffic entities interconnected by the drop and continue feature can be TU12, TU3 and AU–4.

The Drop and Continue feature improves traffic availability as compared with the simple ”end–to–endSNCP”. More subnetworks are connected the further is availability increased.

The Drop and Continue features simultaneously realizes the following on one node:

• unidirectional pass–through

• protected drop

• insertion in the opposite direction with respect tothe passthrough direction.

The configurations achievable are:

• D/C–W INS–W

• D/C–E INS–W

• D/C–E INS–E

• D/C–W INS–E

D/C stands for ”Drop and Continue”, the letter after it (W=West, E=East) indicates the ”drop protected” side(e.g., W means West main side, and spare side is the EAST one).The end letter (INS–E or INS–W) indicates the insert side.The ”Unidirectional pass–through” is always in the direction opposite to that of the ”insert” side (e.g., when”INS E” the pass–through is from East to West).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

135

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

For further information refer to Figure 54. which shows the D/C–W INS–W configuration.

WESTRx

Tx

EASTTx

Rx

AGGREGATES

TRIBUTARY

RxTx

Figure 54. Drop and Continue D/C W INS W

The ”Drop and Continue” featuring two connected rings (with dual connection) is indicated inFigure 55. on page 136.

Nodes 3, 4, 6 and 10 are configured as Drop and Continue.

SNCP protection is enabled throughout the equipment. When in normal condition, the unidirectional wayof traffic from 1 to 8 is supposed to be:1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8.

After a failure on the 1st ring between nodes 2 and 3 (see Figure 56. on page137 ), the link direction is:1 , 5 , 4 , 3 , 6 , 7, 8.

Pass–through is used between nodes 4 and 3, and switch on node 3.

After a second failure on the 2nd ring between nodes 6 and 7 (see Figure 57. on page 137) the selecteddirection on the link is : 1 , 5 , 4 , 10 , 9 , 8.

The operative switch is on node 8 and the previous pass through between nodes 4 and 3 is no more used.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

136

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1

2

D/CW INSW

INSW

W E W E

5

TRIB TRIB

W E W E

INSW

INSE

INSE

D/CW INSW

7 9

8

D/CE INSE

D/CE INSE6 10

3 4

Figure 55. Drop and Continue

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

137

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1

2 5

3 4

6 10

7 9

8

Figure 56. Drop and Continue – 1st failure

1

52

43

106

97

8

Figure 57. Drop and Continue – 2nd failure

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

138

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.5.7 Two–Fiber MS–SPRING (Multiple Section – Shared Protection Ring)(See Figure 58. to Figure 65. page 138 to145 )

This protection is foreseen for the STM–16 Aggregate links in the ring network topology of which itwithstands single failures only in dual ended switching modality (using K1–K2 byte, with appropriatealgorithm). To perform this function the use of Full Matrix Unit is mandatory.Its operation mode is revertive.The supported MS–SPRING is compliant to the ITU–T Rec.G.841.

A 2F MS–SPRING consists of a set (from 2 to 16) of Network Elements each equipped with a double bidirectional (Tx and Rx) aggregate port.The NEs are connected in a ring by means of two optical fibers, one for the clockwise direction and theother for the counter–clockwise one.

The MS SPRING protection is an alternative with respect to SNCP. While MS SPRING allows theconnection at the same time on the clockwise and on the counterclockwise direction on the same AU4that can be inserted and extracted in each span, on the contrary the SNCP connection engages the sameAU4 on both sides for the whole link.

The bandwidth of a 2F MS–SPRING is divided into two halves of equal capacity called respectively”working” (AU4# 1 to AU4# 8) and ”protection” capacity (AU4#9 to AU4# 16). The AU4# 1 is protectedby AU4#9 up to AU4#8 that is protected by the AU4#16. The ”working ” capacity is used to carry the ”highpriority traffic”, while the ”protection” capacity is used for ”low priority” traffic that is lost in case of failure.See Figure 58. The low priority AU4 must not be configured; they must be left in the default status in all connectionconfiguration tables. The Mode with wich the signal is sent must be always Unprotected.In this release the ”low priority” connections are not managed.The MS SPRING algorithm starts as a consequence of the following Section alarms:– LOS, LOF, MS AIS, EXBER (B2), SIGNAL DEGRADE (B2)

PROTECTEDSIGNAL

e

PROTECTEDSIGNAL

w w

e

w

eww e

w

e

1

6

2

5

3

4

WORKING CHANNELS (AU4#1 TO AU4#8)

PROTECTION CHANNELS (AU4#9 TO AU4#16)

TRIBUTARY

TRIBUTARY

Figure 58. 2F MS SPRING Connection

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

139

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

APS in 2–fiber MS–SPRING

In case of fibre break the APS for 2F MS–SPRING uses a synchronized sequence of ”bridge” and”switch” operations that modify the internal connections of the two NEs adjacent to the failure anddisplaces ”working” (high priority) AU4s into ”protection” (low priority) AU4s.

Only the NEs adjacent to the failure are interested to the ”switch” and ”bridge” functions while for all otherNEs the final configuration is a ”pass through” of all ”protection” (low priority) AU4s.

The following Figure 59. on page 140 up to Figure 62. on page 141 highlight how the connections aremodified as a consequence of a ”bridge ” or a ”switch” operation.The Bridge operation is performed on the Tx side while the Switch is performed on the Rx side.

• The ”Bridge” operation on the East side for example in the cited figure, has the effect of routingthe outgoing ”high priority” West traffic also to the outgoing ”protection” East capacity.The Bridge function adds a connection on the opposite side and on the relevant AU protection.

• When a ”Switch” operation is working on the East side all of the connections that have as asource an AU4 belonging to the West working capacity are replaced by connections that haveas a source the incoming East protection traffic, maintaining the first destination of the signal.The Switch function replaces the incoming flow with a protection one, coming form the oppositeside.

In the same way:

• The ”Bridge” operation on the West side for example in the cited figure, has the effect of routingthe outgoing ”high priority” East traffic also to the outgoing ”protection” West capacity.The Bridge function adds a connection on the opposite side and on the relevant AU protection.

• When a ”Switch” operation is working on the West side all of the connections that have asa source an AU4 belonging to the East working capacity are replaced by connections that haveas a source the incoming West protection traffic, maintaining the first destination of the signal.The Switch function replaces the incoming flow with a protection one, coming form the oppositeside.

The diagram of Figure 63. on page 142 depicts the final effect of Bridge and Switch synchronized stepsfor traffic restoration in a Network with one fault. Thes steps are carried out via a protocol using the K1 andK2 bytes. The failed span is replaced by the protection traffic of the span not affected by the failure.

The K1 byte carries information about:

• failure code• WTR• the addressee of the message

The K2 byte carries information about:

• the message source Node• the addresser Node status

The K1 and K2 are exchanged between the Node that are adjacent to the failure, instead the other Nodesput K1 and K2 in passthrough.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

140

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

EW

EW

BEFORE

EW

EW

AFTER

protectionworking

Figure 59. Effect of a BRIDGE EAST operation

EW

EW

BEFORE

EW

EW

AFTER

protectionworking

Figure 60. Effect of a BRIDGE WEST operation

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

141

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

EW

EW

BEFORE

EW

EW

AFTER

protectionworking

Figure 61. Effect of SWITCH EAST operation

EW

EW

BEFORE

EW

EW

AFTER

protectionworking

Figure 62. Effect of SWITCH WEST operation

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

142

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

PROTECTEDSIGNAL

PROTECTEDSIGNAL

1

6

2

5

3

4

WORKING CHANNELS

PROTECTION CHANNELS

BRIDGE

SWITCH

TRIBUTARY

TRIBUTARY

BRIDGEWEST

SWITCHWEST SWITCH

EAST BRIDGEEAST

W

E

W E W E

W

E

WEWE

(*) All protection AU4 are put in Pass–through in the 5th and 6th NEs

(*) (*)

Figure 63. Line break recovering operations

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

143

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

An example of 2F MS–SPRING is in Figure 64. on page 144.

In the example a ring of four nodes is protected with 2F MS–SPRING

AU4–1 carries the traffic of each span : C–B, B–A, A–D, D–C

AU4–2 carries the traffic D–B (pass–through in C)

AU4–9 protects AU4–1

AU4–10 protects AU4–2

After a failure in the section C–B, the following actions are taken C and B nodes:

– node B : Tributary access 1 and 2, previously drop–inserted on AU4–1 and AU4–2 WEST, are switched respectively on AU4–9 and AU4– 10 EAST.In this way, by means node A and D, reach nodes C.

– node C: Tributary access 1, previously drop–inserted on AU4.1 EAST, is switched on AU4–9 WESTIn this way, by means nodes D and A, reaches node B.Rx AU4–2 WEST, previously in pass–through on Tx AU4–2 EAST, is looped onTx AU4–10 WEST. In this way, by means nodes D–A, reaches node B (Signaltransmitted D to B).Rx AU4–2 EAST is no more received.So, on Tx AU4–2 WEST is looped the Rx AU4–10 WEST.In this way, the signal transmitted by the node B flows on nodes A–D–C and hereis looped, reaching again node D.

– nodes A and D have no switching

We can obtain from the example that is possible bandwidth re–use for some traffic patterns (AU4–9protects four connections on AU4–1) having the same protection for several connections (sharedprotection).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

144

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

A

C

BD

AU4.10 Prot. AU4.2

AU4.9–Prot. AU4.1

A B : AU4 1D A . AU4 1

D C : AU4 1 C B : AU4 1

D B : AU4 2

A

C

BD

WESTAU4

1

2910

1

2910

EASTAU4

1

2910

1

2910

WESTAU4

1

2910

1

2910

EASTAU4

1

2910

1

2910

1 1 2

C B

W E

W

E

Figure 64. 2F MS–SPRING example of operation

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

145

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

SQUELCHING FUNCTION

The Squelching function is activated when a node that carries Tributary Drop/Insert, remains isolatedbecause of a double failure.

In this case to avoid misconnections on the AU4 involved in MS SPRING protection, an AIS signal will beinserted on Low Priority streams transmitted from the nodes adjacent to the isolated one. See Figure 65.

Initially before the double failure isolated the Node 2, connections between Trib3 and Trib1 and betweenTrib2 and Trib4 were both active on AU4 #1 in the example.

After the second failure and without the Squelch function the MS SPRING algorithm would activate theBridge and Switch functions on the nodes adjacent to the Node2 and would act a misconnection betweenTrib3 and Trib4 by means the protection AU4#9 in the example. In virtue of Squelching function the Nodesadjacent to the isolated Node2 send AIS on Low Priority AU4#9 avoiding in this way the misconnectionbetween Trib3 and Trib4 in this case.

After the failure has been removed, a similar reverse sequence of operations on the NEs adjacent to therecovered span will be activated. The reverse procedure can start after a step configurable WTR ( 5 sec.,5 min., 10 min., 15 min.).

TRIB. 3

E

E

W

1

6

2

5

3

4

WORKING CHANNELS

PROTECTION CHANNELS

AU4 #1

BRIDGEWEST

SWITCHWEST

AIS ONAU4 # 9

PASS–THROUGH

AIS ONAU4 # 9

PASS–THROUGH

TRIB. 1 TRIB. 2

WAU4 #1

TRIB. 4

EAU4 #1

WAU4 #1

AIS ONAU4 # 9

PASS–THROUGH

SWITCHEAST

BRIDGEEAST

AIS ONAU4# 9

AIS ONAU4 # 9

(SF/SD) (SF/SD)

Figure 65. Squelching on isolated Node connection

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

146

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

When a 2f MS–SPRING is interworked with another ring (either SNCP or MS–SPRING), theinterconnection of the two is performed by connecting two nodes per ring with HVC connections, as shownin Figure 66. on page146 and as a more detailed example in Figure 67. on page 147.

Each VC4 that has to cross the ring boundary (only HVC level ring interconnections are considered here)must be output by two nodes, one of which, the Primary Service Node (PSN) drops it and continues to theSecondary Service Node (SSN). In the opposite direction, the SSN inserts a copy of the VC4 into the ringand the PSN selects by means the Primary Node Service Selector function, between the VC4 comingfrom the SSN and the VC4 that can be locally inserted by means an STM–1 Tributary. The selection ismade on the Path–AIS basis (AU–AIS).

The protection mechanism works on the hypothesis that the other ring selects one of the two versionsof the incoming VC4 and transmits two identical copies of the VC4 towards the PSN and the SSN ( thisis guaranteed if the other ring is an MS–SPRING or an SNCP ring).

Note that the PSN and the SSN need not to be adjacent and need not to be the same for all of the VC4that cross the ring boudary: i.e. each crossing VC4 has two associated nodes that act as PSN and SSN.

In the Connection Configuration Applications this function is named: D/C IC W(E) that means Drop andContinue, Interconnection W or E (protected) . The letter (W=West, E=East) indicates the insertion sideof AU4 data stream coming from Tributary (Main) or from Line (Protection).

Using the function: D/C IC Pass–through W or E the Operator can choose the main connection towardsthe Line (Main) and for the protection the STM–1 Tributary is used in order to protect the 8 main AU4s.

Note that the D/C IC and the D/C IC Pass–Through connections can be used not only with the MS SPRINGprotection but also in the case of SNCP – SNCP interworking.

2F MS – SPRING

SSSecondary

ServiceNode

PrimaryServiceNode

SS = Service Selector

2F MS – SPRING

D/C IC W

W E WE

D/I BID UNP W

SS

EE WW

D/C I/C E

D/I BID UNP W

Figure 66. MS SPRING Drop and Continue, Insert Continues (protected)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

147

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

T1D/I PROT.W

W E

W EE W

D/C IC W

W EE W

E WW E

D/C IC E D/I BID. UNP. E

D/C W INS. W

D/I PROT. ET1

SNC–P

SNC–P

D/C W INS W

E WW E

D/I BID. UNP.W

E W

D/C E INS E

D/C E INS. E

MS SPRING

Figure 67. D/C IC Connection used for the SNCP/MS SPRING Interworking.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

148

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.6 Synchronizing sub–system

(see Figure 68. on page 150)

The equipment is mainly synchronized by the Clock Reference unit in compliancy with the ITU–T G.783Recs. based on Timing Marker management.The scope of the unit is to supply the other units inside the equipment with a 38 MHz clock and relevantsync. signal (To), and an external 2 MHz clock (T4).

In this release the following units are available:

• Enhanced CRU

• Enhanced CRU 0,37 ppm

These units have different performances.The first has a stability in Hold over mode of 1ppm / day.The second unit Hold over stability is of 0,37 ppm / day. Both have a complete compliance with the G.81sRecommendation.

The unit operates in three different modes:• locked• hold–over• free–running

1) In the ”locked” operating mode the unit receives the following timing signals:

• Clocks from the 21x2Mbit/s Tributaries (T2)• 38 MHz clock from the STM–N Aggregates or STM–1 Tributaries (T1)• 2048 kHz clock (G.703) received from the external source (T3).

A max. of 6 references are software–selected through the Craft Terminal and the commands are sent fromthe Equipment Controller towards the Unit Card Controller.

The synch. references can be either manually selected through CT/OS, or automatically through thealgorithm on the CRU unit.

Automatic selection of the timing references (T0 local and T4 external) is principally based on the qualityof each reference derived from the SOH’s byte S1 (SSMB) of the STM–N Aggregates and STM–1Tributaries.

CT/OS will assign a quality level to permit using the ”SSM Algorithm” to select the ”timing source” whenimplementing non STM–N signals or signals coming from equipment not managing byte S1.

When the quality levels are identical the selection criteria is based on the set priority.

The reference quality level utilized to generate T0, or a quality level forced by CT/OS is inserted on theSSMB of the STM–N signals outputting the equipment.

The QL6 criteria is sent to the ”NEi clock” which had supplied the synch. reference to obtain the T0.This operation is carried out to prevent the”timing reference” synchronizing the NEi itself (timing loop).Switching between the references also depends on the alarm conditions detected on the signals.

Other types of operating modes are possible.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

149

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

2) With regard to ”Hold–over”, the unit holds the last valid reference with a max. shift of 1 ppm/day (or 0.37 ppm/day for the CRU 0.37ppm unit).

This operating mode is associated with the loss of references selected by the operator.Dedicated alarms will arise when the node will enter in ”Hold–over” or ”Free–running” mode due to eitherquality criteria or signal validity. Loss of synchronism signals on the aggregate and tributary ports areanyway available as independent alarms (LOS).

3) In the ”Free–running” operating mode the local clock has a 4.6 ppm accuracy. The unit operates inthis mode when no valid synchronism signals are present nor ”Hold–over” reference values had beenstored.

Selection of the 1+1 protected units receiving the reference clock depends on the CRU alarm conditions.The unit provides the external equipment (T4) with a 2048 kHz clock. This clock can be obtained eitherdirectly from the T0 output signal, or by processing the T1 timing signals with the selection references(priority, quality, Timing signals list).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

150

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

CARD CONTROLLER

UNIT 1

CRUSELECT.

CK

CKA CKB

UNIT n

CRUSELECT.

CK

CKBCKA

CRU B ALARM

EQUIPMENTCONTROLLER

CRU A ALARMSW SELECT.

QUALITY PRIORITY

1

6

T1

T2

T3

FROMSTM–N

FROM2Mbit/s

FROMEXT

(2MHz)RE

CE

IVE

D C

LOC

KS

HOLD OVER

FREERUNNING

CLOCK REFERENCE UNIT A

CKA CLOCK + SYNC. (TO)FOR ALL UNITS

CLOCK (T4)EXT

CLOCK REFERENCE UNIT B

CK B (TO)

CK (T4)EXT

Figure 68. Synchronizing sub–system

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

151

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.7 Auxiliary and Overhead Sub–system

The following description applies to all the AUX/EOW units.

The SDH Standard offers a considerable quantity of service channels in the Section Overhead bytes(SOH) and Path Overhead bytes (POH) of Synchronous frame. These bytes are used for alignment, paritycheck and network management operations etc..Part of them are also used for user data and speech channels and are interfaced towards the Aggregate,Matrix and Tributary units through different ”Auxiliary” unit. It is also possible to select both the SpareAggregate to convey to the vocal terminations the dedicated byte.

The AUX/EOW unit establishes a digital speech by–pass and can be used on a wide network basis.

The AUX/EOW EXTENSION unit realize the analog speech by–pass between the two aggregate sides,and can also establish a connection with an external telephone set through the relevant connector. SeeFigure 117. on page 322 and Table 20. on page 323.

The AUX unit can be used as required:

• to externally access the service interfaces• to connect the external access points to the SOH and POH bytes of the units (terminations)• to allow the SOH and POH bytes to pass through the various units

The external access points of the unit are:

• 1 local operator’s set for speech connections useful for service communication in the link. TheAUX/EOW UNIT permits the speech digital bypass and can be used for wide networks.

• three 64 Kbit/s G.703 data channels• three V.11 data channels (9600 baud )

The AUX and the various units are wired in the following manner:

• four 5.2 Mbit/s connections, one per four (max.) Aggregates, to manage the SOH’s auxiliarybytes.

• four 4.86 Mbit/s connection termed OH–BUS to manage the POH and SOH auxiliary bytes ofthe Tributaries and Matrices.

The Craft Terminal is utilized to software–select the terminations and pass–through of the SOH and POH.This type of programming allows to access all the overhead bytes, hence guaranteeing service extensionin compliancy with standard applications, e.g.,for the bytes not yet defined.

Another OH–BUS is also present which wire–connects bytes S (serial alarms) and K1, K2. These latterbetween STM–1, STM–4, STM–16 for the Indicative Alarms and STM–16 for MS SPRING management.

Direct interworking between STM–1 interfaces and radio regenerator equipment is fully supported.

Figure 69. on page 152, summarizes the description given and illustrates the POH bytes utilized by eachunit on the OH–BUS streams.

Handling of overhead bytes is described, at various labels in Figure 73. on page 163 , Figure 77. onpage 177, Figure 83. on page202 , Figure 84. on page 203,Figure 90. on page 231 and Figure 93. onpage 240

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

152

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AUXILIARY ACCESSES

INTERFACES

SOH 5.2 Mb/s

SOH 5.2 Mb/s

AGGR.

W–A

W–B

SOH 5.2 Mb/s

SOH 5.2 Mb/s

AGGR.

E–A

E–B

3x34 M

= 1TRIB.

= 10

AMATRIX

B

21x2 M

= 1TRIB

= 3

140/155 M

= 1TRIB.

= 10

140: F2,Z3,Z4, Z5(POH)

155: E1,E2,F1

OH BUS 4,86 Mb/s

and free SOH bytes

and free SOH bytesSOH: E1, E2, F1

OW

OW extension64Kb/s V11

Figure 69. Auxiliaries / Overheads block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

153

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.8 Control sub–system

(see Figure 70. on page 154).In this release the User can utilise two different type of Equipment Controller: ESCT or SMEC2 (alternativeunits).The main features, common to both of them, are described below.

The Control sub–system residing on the equipment represents the lowest SDH network managementlevel.Besides analyzing the operating status of the equipment, it also controls the protections + switching andcarries out management functions (e.g.,configuration).

The control sub–system consists of the Equipment Controller unit and of the Card Controller sub–unitsall of which belong to equipment units except for the Power Supply unit. They are connected through theLIECB and NIECB bus.The LIECB bus contains all the operating data as well as the unit configuration data. NIECB swops theDCC bytes data for the TMN (Q ecc*).

The alarm criteria activates the LEDs situated on the decentralized units and on the Equipment Controller,and also enables the forwarding of data towards a source external to the equipment.The meaning of each LED indicating alarm condition is explained in the access point figures in chapter2 on page 65.The Power Supply unit too forwards its alarm criteria to the Equipment Controller.An additional function of the Controller sub–system is of interfacing the Equipment Controller with a sourceexternal to the equipment.

These connections and relevant functions are:• Interface F for local management operations through the Craft terminal.

It carries out operations that allows to activate and service the equipment. Additionally itupdates the local equipment software release through software download operations.The operations realized are:– Events and alarms reports– Operative commands– Memory events and alarms for maintenance– Forwarding and checking configurations for equipment, connection, TMN dialog– Administrative functions with operators enabling and password definition and change– Performance measurements.– Updating the equipment software release through software download operations.

The management applications are realized by means of sets of diskettes supplied with the equipment( see Chapter 2 on page 65 )For installation, description, etc see the Operator’s handbook.

When Remote Craft Terminal option is used, by means one F interface is possible manage a max of 32equipment.

• Interface QB3* to connect the Operation System of the TMN network.In this manner it is possible to carry out network management functions from a Center onseveral equipment. The functions realized are as those for Local Management.

• Interface QB2. It is used to connect the external plesiochr. equip. with the TMN network(Mediation Device operation).

• Commands forwarded towards the rack to light up the relevant lamps• Equipment remote alarms accessible at the tagblocks• Customized parallel contacts to receive/transmit alarms; accessible at the tagblock.

Therefore, the sub–system is of extreme importance for the maintenance and turn–on operations.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

154

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

UN

IT 1 C

AR

D C

ON

TR

OLL

ER

UN

IT n

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

PO

WE

R S

UP

PLY

1

2

3

AN

D O

R/ 3

LIE

CB

NIE

CB

UN

ITIN

TE

RFA

CE

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

EX

TE

RN

AL

INT

ER

FAC

ES

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

F

QB

3*

QB

2

LOC

AL

CR

AF

TT

ER

MIN

AL

OP

ER

AT

ION

SY

ST

EM

PE

SIO

CH

RO

NO

US

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

RA

CK

LE

DS

RE

MO

TE

ALA

RM

S

PA

RA

LLE

L C

ON

TAC

TS

Figure 70. Controller subsystem

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

155

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.1.8.1 Network Management Interfaces

The equipment (defined Network Element, NE) has three operative interfaces: one to manage the localor remote equipment (Interface F) one to manage the network (Interface QB3*), and the other for theMediation Device function (Interface Q2/RQ2).

Interface F establishes connection with the local Craft Terminal.

When Remote Craft Terminal option is used, by means the F interface it is possible to manage a max of32 equipment.

Interface Q2/RQ2 performs the Mediation Device function. It allows to manage from CT or OS otherALCATEL non SDH telecommunication equipment ( video, radio, access..). It can avoid the need of adedicated mediation device.The ADM provides the master side of a dedicated RS–485 multipoint and acts as a mediation elementwith respect to the connected Q2/RQ2 slave equipment ( max. 32 ). The selection between Q2 interface,synchronous with a bit rate of 19.2 Kbit/s, and RQ2 interface asynchronous, with a bit rate sw selectableof 1.2 /2.4 /4.8 /9.6 Kbit/s is provisionable.

Interface QB3* permits to establish connection with the Operative System of the Management System.In this connection the O.S. is available in a protected version (OS Main and OS Spare).

Figure 71. on page 156 illustrates the general management architecture of the equipment.

The QB3* connected NE is defined as GATEWAY. Connection is made through the QX & SYNC Accessmodule.

The connection of the other equipment to the TMN is managed through the DCC channels inside the STMframe with QECC* protocol.

The connection mode is indicated in the following (see Figure 72. on page 156).The Equipment Controllerunit transfers messages between QB3* and DCC.To forward TMN messages towards other NE’s, the Equipment Controller uses the NIECB connection withthe Card Controller of the East and West Aggregate units (STM–1 tributaries units as well, if any).In this way the messages are transmitted on D1 ....D12 bytes of STM (DCC).The connected NE extractsthe messages from these bytes and sends them to the Equipment Controller.In the selected NE the Equipment Controller uses the LIECB connection to exchange data with the cardcontroller of the various units.This data is then transferred towards the Operative System via the Aggregates DCC. In all the NE not involved the Equipment Controller lets through the DCC between the two aggregates.

The 1651–SM indications in Figure 71. on page 156 are valid also for 1661 SM–C.

3.1.9 Power Supply Sub–system

Power to the equipment units is supplied by two Power Supply unit plus a spare. The latter can be removedwithout causing trouble to service.

Protection to the station power supply is afforded by 16A circuit breakers at the top of the S9 rack.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

156

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

OPERATIONSYSTEM

1651 SMGATEWAY

CRAFT TERMINAL

OPERATIONSYSTEM

1651 SMGATEWAY

LANBRIDGES

1651 SM

LANBRIDGES

LANBRIDGES

DCNLAN

Q3

QB3

F FF

DCC

NE1651 SM 1651 SM

NE1651 SM

NEF LOCAL/

REMOTE

F

DCC DCC

DCN : DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORK

F

DCC

NE

C.T

(up to 31)ADM ADM ADM ADM

NON........

(up to 31) (up to 31)

SDH EQ.

NON

SDH EQ.

NON

SDH EQ.

NON

SDH EQ.

NON

SDH EQ.

NON

SDH EQ..........

Q2

Q2

DCC

DCC

DCC

DCC

Figure 71. 1651–SM/1661 SM–C General Management Architecture

OPERATIONSYSTEM

LAN

STM

CARDCONTR.

DCC

AGG. W

NE ( 1651 SM– GATEWAY )

NIECB

ESCT AGG.E

NIECB

LIECBAGG. E

ESCT

AGG. W

NIECB

NIECB

LIECB

NE

AUI–B2 ADAPTER/2QB3

STM–N

Figure 72. Connection Mode for TMN

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

157

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2 Unit description

In the following paragraphs are inserted the detailed information of each units and sub–units of theequipment.As far as concerns the detailed alarm indications, refer to the Operator’s Handbook, Alarms Status andControl application description.

3.2.1 2 Mbit/s Tributaries

(See Figure 75. on page 165).This description is applicable to all 2 Mbit/s tributary units:

• 21 x 2 Mbit/s 75 OHM

• 21 x 2 Mbit/s 120 OHM

• 21 x 2 Mbit/s 75 OHM Retiming

• 21 x 2 Mbit/s 120 OHM Retiming

In the end of the following para 3.2.1.1, it will be given a short account about the new 2 Mbit/s Trib. in whichi has been added the Retiming Function

3.2.1.1 21x2Mbit/s TRIB.

The 21x2Mbit/s TRIB. unit allows a max. of twenty–one 2Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary streams toaccess the STM–1 synchronous digital structure. After having synchronized each tributary to the timingand synchronism signals received from the”Clock reference unit”, the unit transmits the tributary signals(mapped in the STM–1 structure) to the MATRIX unit to be transmitted towards the EAST/WESTAggregate units.

Since the STM–1 structure can carry a max. of sixty–three 2Mbit/s tributary streams, the digital streamsleaving the unit involved result to be equipped with only one third of the general STM–1 frame capacity.The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 2Mbit/s tributary streams are extracted fromthe received STM–1 frames and then transmitted towards external equipment of lower hierarchical order.

The Access module subunits, which will be described in the following, interface the 2Mbit/s signals withthe external source.

The regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which points out any malfunctionsto the Card Controller sub–unit. The latter informs the ”Equipment Controller” unit through LEDs and otherindications.

The following topics are dealt with in the following:

• Transmission

• Reception

• Card Controller

• Power supply, Remote Inventory

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

158

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Transmission

The unit interfaces the 21 plesiochronous tributaries and the STM–1 synchronous digital structure.The latter is then transmitted, in 38.88Mbit/s4–wire bus format, to the units processing the aggregatestream.

Two 38.88MHz clocks (CKA and CKB) and the relevant 2kHz synchronizing signals (SYNCA and SYNCB)are received from the ”Clock reference unit”(CRU) of the equipment.

The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the general unit timing signals dependson the operating status of the two CRU’s.

The twenty–one 2Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries are received in HDB3 format.The description deals with only one of the 21 tributaries in that they follow the same procedure.

An electric transformer decouples the line signals. Afterwards, the signal accesses the P.I.(Physical Interface) consisting of G.703 Interface and Decoder. The G703 interface circuit:

• regenerates the line signal thus recovering a Nyquist attenuation within the 0–6 dB range

• extracts the 2MHz clock from the line signal. This signal is also sent to the CRU.

The Decoder:

• decodes the HDB3 code (HDB3––> data + NRZ clock)

• detects the loss of the signal and hence generates the LOS alarm

• Loops back following the Card Controller commands.

As primary condition, the 2Mbit/s plesiochronous signal is adapted to transit through a synchronousnetwork. A C–12 container is structured to receive the 2Mbit/s stream (LPA Lower Order PathAdaptation).

Through the LPT operation (Lower Order Path Termination) the VC–12 container is structured todistribute its octets within a time interval of 500msec. which corresponds to 4 STM–1 frames period.The VC–12 consists of a C–12 container and a POH octet (path overhead) assigned to the first positionof the structure.

Figure Figure 73. on page 163shows the structure of a VC–12 and the POH.

The subsequent HPA operation (Higher order path adaptation) permits to structure the TU–12 through theinsertion of TUOH. The TUOH is the pointer which indicates the beginning of VC–12 inside the TU–12stream. TUOH consists of four bytes (V1, V2, V3, V4) equally distributed within a time interval of 4 STM–1frames.Figure 74. on page 164 shows the TU–12 structure.

The operations described are performed on all the twenty–one 2Mbit/s tributaries.

At this point through the Lower Order Path Connection operation (LPC) each n–th tributary (1–21) can beconnected to any of the 63 positions of the STM1 frame thus structuring the connection matrices.

The 38.88Mbit/s 4–row bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregate unitsvia the MATRIX units.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

159

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Reception

On the Rx side, the unit receives (through the Matrix units) the four 38.88Mbit/s streams from eachEAST 1,2 and WEST 1,2 aggregate units.

A MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate (Main or Spare) to analyze (1 or 2 in the cited figure) foreach side (WEST and EAST) through commands (PROT WEST, PROT EAST) received from the ”CardController” of the unit.

Full Matrix utilizes only West 1/2.The protection EPS of the Full Matrix, selects main or spare.

The 21 TU–12’s are chosen and extracted and, according to the indications received from the ”CardController”, the East or West Rx side is selected (SNCP).

The TUOH’s pointer interpreter checks the loss of signal (AIS) on each selected stream.

At this point each VC–12 is individually processed, therefore the description will deal with only one VC–12but is applicable to all the tributaries.

By means of the LPT (Low order Path Termination) operation the POH is extracted from the VC–12thus obtaining the C–12 structures.

The POH is processed inside the POH Management circuit.

The following operations are carried out:

• estimate BIP–2. Error counting is utilized to generate the FEBE signal (Tx side).

• control the SIGNAL LABEL. Checks the regular configuration of the signal label bits.

• FEBE check. Checks if errors have been detected on the remote equipment by BIP–2calculation.

• FERF check.

• Path Trace extraction

All the above operations are processed through the Unit Card Controller.

The 2Mbit/s signal is restructured by processing the C–12 in the LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) thusobtaining the 2Mbit/s signal (DATA) and clock.

A DPLL circuit is utilized with time base supplied by an external oscillator.

The tributary signal is HDB3 encoded.

This signal can be replaced by the AIS signal when detecting loss of TU–12.

The G703 interface and the electric transformer adapts the 2Mbit/s tributary signal to ITU–T Rec. G703and is then sent to an external source.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

160

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Card Controller

The Card Controller sub–unit carries out the following main functions:

CRU selection

This interface selects the CRU (clock reference unit) from which the synchronism and timing signals tobe used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection criteria, this interfaceprocesses the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:

ISWCAN : internal alarm received from the CRU A;

ISWCBN : internal alarm received from the CRU B;

The interface also supplies the CKMSTOFF alarm criteria in case of loss of the selected timing signal.

Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance.This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive towards the unit the software setting options stored throughthe EEPROM. Alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.

All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and the OSW switching criteriato send to the other units.

Loop Management

Line looping ( Line L ) and Internal looping are possible at the tributary level. They are managed by theLPT and LPM signals. It is possible to activate them via software .

Through the line loopback the signal received from the tributary external line is looped on the tributaryoutput rx side.

Through the internal loopback the signal received from the aggregate is looped on the tributary tx side.

Loops are used to test at various level the equipment and the line.

AIS Processing

Detection of the ”need to forward AIS” indication enables the AIS registers to forward the AIS signal to theG.703 Rx Interfaces.

Dialog with the Equipment Controller unit

Information on setting options, criteria, reset, alarms etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unitthrough the LIECB and NIECB connections.

Physical position acknowledgment

Through signals ID 0–4 the Card Controller acknowledges the position of the unit inside the subrack.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

161

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

MSP protection

This function permits to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signals received from aggregatesWEST (West Aggregate Main or West Aggregate Spare). The reciprocal operation (PROT EASTcommand) is carried out on aggregates EAST.

Selection (performed during the turn–on phase) and switching operations (performed during the operatingphase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. Thesecriteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.When two Full Matrix are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signals ISW MA, MBfrom Full Matrix are used.

EPS Tributary management

This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from othertributaries.This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para ”EPS for electricaltributaries” on page 119.

Unit type acknowledgment

Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.

Power supply, Remote Inventory

The power supply voltages present at the input of the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Enhanced Monitoring unit are:

+5.3V 3%

–5.5V 3%

+12.1V 3%

PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.The electrical ground and chassis ground strap–connected.The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes, series, dateof construction).This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit whichutilizes it for the Remote Inventory.The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directly connected tothe Equipment Controller.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

162

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.1.2 21 x 2 Mbit/s Tributary with Retiming

This is a unit managed like the basic 21*2Mb/s Trib described above, but with the additional circuits tosupport the 2Mb/s Retiming feature.

The Retiming function applies the Equipment Clock to the outgoing 2Mb/s signal that therefore becomessynchronized with the SDH network synchronization reference .

The additional circuit that allows this implementation consists in an elastic buffer that is able to absorbthe jitter and wander that is transferred to the PDH signal when SDH pointer justification occurs.

This feature is programmable via SW, in order to include or exclude the Retiming for each single port. Thesame 21*2 Mb/s Unit can mix ports that apply or not the retiming.

Two different hardware board options ( Tributary unit part numbers) are needed to provide 75 Ohm and120 Ohm impedance.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

163

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

POH of VC–12

G

W

8 bit

VC–12

125 us

W

G

G

C1 C2o o o r r

W

W

G

G

C1 C2o o o r r

W

W

G

G

C1 C2r r r r s1

S2 i i i i i i i

W

G

W

32 byte

125 us 32 byte

125 us 32 byte

125 us

32 byte

BIP–2

FEBE

PATHTRACE

SIGNALLABEL

FERF

G = rrrrrrrr (r = BIT INTERVAL FOR FIXED JUSTIFICATION)

W = iiiiiiii (i = 2.048 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY BIT)

C1, C2 = JUSTIFICATION SIGNALLING BIT

o = OVERHEAD BITS

S1, S2 = NEGATIVE AND POSITIVE JUSTIFICATION OPPORTUNITY REFERRED TO SIGNALLINGS C1 AND C2

POH STRUCTURE :– 2 BITS TO ESTIMATE THE BER THROUGH THE BIP–2 ENCODING PROCEDURE PERFORMED ON THE PREVIOUS VIRTUAL CONTAINER (THE FIRST AND SECOND BITS OF BIP–2 CONSTITUTE THE PARITY BIT OF ODD AND EVEN ORDER BITS)

– 1 BIT TO INDICATE (TO THE REMOTE TERMINAL) THE RESULT OF THE BER ESTIMATION DETECTED ON THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION: VALUES 0 AND 1 OF BIT FEBE (FAR END BLOCK ERROR) RESPECTIVELY INDICATE ABSENCE OF VIOLATION AND PRESENCE OF ONE OR TWO VIOLATIONS OF THE PARITY LIMITS ESTABLISHED BY BIP–2

– 1 BIT TO CHECK THE PATH TRACE THROUGH AN APPROPRIATE PROTOCOL (NOT UTILIZED WITH THIS RELEASE)

– 3 BITS PRESETTABLE FOR THE SIGNAL LABEL

– 1 BIT FOR THE FERF (FAR END RECEIVE FAILURE) ALARM INDICATION.

Figure 73. VC–12 Structure

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

164

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

V 1

125 us ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉV 2

0

1

34

V 3

35

104

105

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

V 1

139ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

V 2

125 us

69

V 4

70

125 us

125 us

125 us

TU–12

35 byts

NEGATIVEJUSTIFICATION OPPORTUNITY

POSITIVEJUSTIFICATION OPPORTUNITY

ÉÉÇÇÇÇ

BYTES BELONGING TOTHE PREVIOUS TU–12

BYTES BELONGING TOTHE SUBSEQUENT TU–12

Figure 74. TU–12 Structure

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

165

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

G70

3IN

TE

RFA

CE

DA

TAH

DB

3–A

MI/N

RZ

DE

CO

DE

R LOS

2Mbi

t/s T

RIB

UTA

RY

–1

D2E

N1

D2E

P1

CLO

CK

2Mbi

t/s S

IGN

AL

INS

ER

TIO

N IN

TO

C12

(LP

A)

VC

12F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(LP

T)

TU

12F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(HP

A)

G70

3IN

TE

RFA

CE

HD

B3–

AM

I/NR

ZE

NC

OD

ER C

LOC

K

D2U

N1

D2U

P1

PI PI

PO

HM

AN

AG

EM

EN

TP

OH

GE

NE

RA

TIO

NT

UO

HG

EN

ER

AT

ION

2Mbi

t/s S

IGN

AL

RE

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N(

LPA

)

PO

HE

XT

RA

CT

ION

( LP

A)

AIS

AIS

1

G

51.8

MH

z

DA

TA

EA

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

T1T

X

T21

TX

TO

CR

U

2Mbi

t/sT

RIB

.

D2E

N21

D2E

P21

D2U

N21

D2U

P21

2Mbi

t/s T

RIB

UTA

RY

–21

T21

TX

T21

RX

+12

V

+5V –5V

PO

WA

LIM

FU

SE

S

+12

.1V

–5.5

V

+5.

3V

PW

ALM

FR

OM

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

EA

ST

14

DT

–1E

i/

EA

ST

24

DT

–2E

i/

EA

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

T1T

X

T21

TX

WE

AS

T 1

4

DT

–1W

i/

WE

AS

T 2

4

DT

–2W

i/

MS

PE

AS

T 1

4D

R–1

EI

/

EA

ST

24

DR

–2E

I/

PR

OT

EC

T.

PR

OT

ES

T

TU

–12

EA

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

1 21

MS

PW

ES

T 1

4D

R–1

WI

/

WE

ST

24

DR

–2W

I

/P

RO

TE

CT.

PR

OT

WE

ST

TU

–12

WE

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

1 21

DYNAMIC MATRIX

T1R

X

T21

RX

AIS

AIS

21

T21

RX

CAREM

CKB

CKA

SYNCB

SYNCA

CK

SYNC

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

CR

U

CR

US

ELE

CT

ION

PH

YS

ICA

LP

OS

ITIO

NA

CK

NO

WLE

D

ISWCAN

DIA

LOG

WIT

HE

QU

IPM

EN

TC

ON

TR

OLL

ER

ES

CT

UN

IT

1+1

AG

GR

EG

AT

EP

RO

TE

CT

ION

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

INT

ER

NA

L D

IALO

GU

E F

OR

ALA

RM

S C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

SP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

UN

IT T

YP

EA

CK

NO

WLE

AG

ME

NT

LOO

P–B

AC

K

AIS

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

OSWi

1

ALA

RM

SCO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

E CT

YP

E 0

– 3:

EP

SISWCBN

ID 0 – 4:

LIECBNIECB

ISW1,2W

ISW1,2E

ISWT

TO

ALL

TH

E U

NIT

SC

RU

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

AG

GR

.F

RO

MT

RIB

S

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

PR

OT

WE

ST

PR

OT

ES

T

TR

IBU

TAR

IES

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

PP

S

AN

D L

OO

P B

AC

K

AN

D L

OO

P B

AC

K

TO THE MATRIX FROM THE MATRIX

Figure 75. Block diagram: 21x2 Mbit/s trib.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

166

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.2 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary

(see Figure 76. on page 171)

The 21x1.5 Mbit/s TRIB unit allows to multiplex up to 21 data streams at 1.544 Mbit/s to be multiplexedinto 21 VC–12 in order to be easily transported into the SDH network.

The unit is an upgrading of the 21x2 Mbit/s unit. Infect it is provided with twenty–one 1.4 Mbit/s externalinterfaces (T1 standard) and twenty–one emulators inside the 2 Mbit/s interfaces (E1 standard).

After having synchronized each tributary to the timing and synchronism signals received from the ”Clockreference unit”, the unit make it possible to transmit the tributary signals (mapped in the STM–1 structure)towards the EAST1/2 and WEST1/2 Aggregate units.

The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 1.5 Mbit/s tributary streams are extractedfrom the received STM–1 frames and then transmitted towards external equipment of lower hierarchicalorder.

Regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which signal any malfunctions to theCard Controller sub–unit, the latter informing the ”Equipment Controller” unit through LEDs and otherindications.

The following topics are dealt with in the following:

• Transmission

• Reception

• Card Controller


Transmission

The unit interfaces the 21 plesiochronous tributaries and the STM–1 synchronous digital structure.The latter is then transmitted, in 38.88Mbit/s 4–parallel–stream format, to the units processing the aggregate stream.Two 38.88MHz clocks (CKA and CKB) and the relative 2kHz synchronizing signals (SYNCA and SYNCB)are received from the ”Clock reference unit” (CRU) of the equipment.The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the general unit timing signals,depends on the operating status of the two CRUs.The twenty–one 1.5 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries are received in B8ZS format with 100 ohms bal.impedance.

The description deals with only one of the 21 tributaries in that they follow the same procedure.

An electric transformer decouples the line signals. The T1/NRZ circuit perform the line signal adaptation,clock extraction and B8ZS–>NRZ+CK decoding.The LOS alarm is detected.Afterwards the signal is sent to the ” 2 Mbit/s Mapping ” circuit. The latter inserts the 1.5 Mbit/s streaminto a proprietary format frame.The twenty–one 1.5 Mbit/s signals are processed and are added the ”FIXED” appropriate redundanciesto generate twenty–one 2 Mbit/s streams.In this manner the 1.5 Mbit/s incoming signal frequency information is kept inside the 2 Mbit/s streamallowing to utilze the 1.5 Mbit/s signals for the CRU unit clock synch.source.

Now the NRZ format signal + clock is encoded in a RZ+/RZ–signal with a HDB3 code.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

167

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Afterwards the signal accessed the G.703 interface which has to recover the 2 Mhz clock from the linesignal. This clock is also sent to the CRU.

The next circuit performs the code decoding (HDB3–> date + NRZ clock), detects the loss of signal andhence generates the LOS alarm.Moreover it performs the loopback on thr Card Controller commands.

As primary condition, the 2Mbit/s plesiochronous signal is adapted to transit through a synchronousnetwork. A C–12 container is structured to receive the 2Mbit/s stream (LPA Lower Order Path Adaptation).

Through the LPT operations (Lower Order Path Termination) the VC–12 container is structured todistribute its bytes within a time interval of 500 µsec. which corresponds to 4 STM–1 frame period.The VC–12 consists of a C–12 container and a POH byte (path overhead) assigned to the first positionof the structure.

Figure 73. on page 163 shows the structure of a VC–12 and of the POH.

The subsequent HPA operation (Higher order path adaptation) permits to structure the TU–12 through theinsertion of TUOH. The TUOH is the pointer which indicates the beginning of VC–12 inside the TU–12stream. TUOH consists of four bytes (V1, V2, V3, V4) equally distributed within a time interval of 4 STM–1frames. Figure 74. on page 164 shows the TU–12 structure.

At this point through the Lower Order Path Connection operation (LPC) each n–th tributary (1–21) isswitched over to any one of the 63 positions of the STM–1 frame thus structuring the connection matricestowards the West and/or East aggregates.

The 38.88Mbit/s 4–row bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and/or EAST aggregateunits depending from the software configurations.

The main alarms, collected by the Card Controller, indicate (for each tributary):

• LOS: loss of signal• over/underflow of the elastic store.

Reception

On the Rx side, the unit receives the four 38.88Mbit/s streams from each EAST1/2 and WEST1/2aggregate unit with protection 1+1.

The MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate to analyze for each side (WEST and EAST) throughcommands PROT WEST, PROT EAST received from the”Card Controller” of the unit.

The 21 TU–12s are chosen and extracted from the selected tributaries, through the dynamic connectionmatrix ( SNCP/I functions) , according to the indications received from the ”Card Controller”.

The TU–AIS condition and the loss of pointer can be detected by the TUOH’s pointer interpreter.

At this point each VC–12 is individually processed.

The LPT (Low order Path Termination) operation extracts the POH from each of the VC–12s to obtain theC–12 structure.

The following operations are carried out in the POH MANAGEMENT circuit:

• BIP–2 astimation on the preceding Virtual Container Error counting utilized to generate theFEBE signal (Tx side).

• SIGNAL LABEL control.It checks the regular configuration of the signal label bits.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

168

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

• FEBE check.It checks if errors have been detected on the remote equipment through BIP–2estimation.

• FERF check.• Path Trace extraction to verify the continuity of the link.

All the above operations are processed through the Unit Card Controller.

The 2Mbit/s signal is regenerated by processing the C–12 (LPA – Lower order Path Adaptation) thusobtaining the 2Mbit/s signal (DATA) and clock.

A DPLL circuit is utilized with time base supplied by an external oscillator .

The tributary signal is HDB3 encoded. It can be replaced by the AIS signal (all ones) when detecting lossof TU–12.

Finally through the G. 703 interface circuit the ”Mbit/s signal is forwarded to ”HDB3–>NRZ” decodingcircuit.

The ”Aligner” circuit realizes the signal alignment word and setting the frame counter in such a way torecover the 1.544 Mbit/s payload.

Thruogh the ”PLL Demapping” circuit is extracted the 1.544 Mbit/s stream from the 2 Mbit/s signal.A PLL digital circuit with a 51.84 Mhz clock is utilizes.AIS is detected on the 2 Mbit/s signal, a signal ”all ones” is inserted on the 1.544 Mbit/s outgoing stream.

Finally, through the electrical transformer the 1.5 Mbit/s signal is adapted according to the G.703 Rac. andthen sent to an external source of the unit.

On the outgoing signal the ”Equalizer Control” circuit permits to equalize the signal depending on the cablelength.

This operation can be executed at only one tributary level or simultaneously on all the twenty–onetributataries.

Card Controller


CRU selection

This interface selects the CRU from which the synchronism and timing signals to be used as referencefor the unit are extracted. To provide the selection criteria, this interface processes the alarms receivedfrom the two CRU’s, namely:

ISWCAN : internal alarm received from CRU A;

ISWCBN : internal alarm received from CRU B;

The interface also supplies the CKMSTOFF alarm criteria when the selected timing signal is lost.

Local dialog for alarms, configuration and performance

This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive to/from the unit the E2PROM–stored software settingoptions. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.

All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and the OSWi switching criteriato send to all the other units.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

169

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Loop Management

Line looping ( Line L ) and Internal looping are possible at the tributary level. The are managed by the LPTand LPM signals. It is possible to activate them via software .

Through the line loopback the signal received from the external line is looped on the tributary tx side.



AIS Processing


Dialog with the Equipment controller unit

Information on setting options, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit throughthe local LIECB and NIECB wiring.



MSP protection

This function permits to select (through commands PROT WEST and PROT EAST) one of the signalsreceived from aggregates WEST and EAST.

Selection (performed during the turn–on phase) and switching operations (performed during the operatingphase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units.These criteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.

Tributary EPS management

This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from the othertributaries.This circuit also operates with the OSW command.The EPS Protection is described in para. ”Automatic Protections Sub–system” in para. 3.1.5 on page116.

Main unit acknowledgment

Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller Trib. can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

170

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


The power supply voltages at the input of the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit are:

• +5.3V ±3%

• –5.5V ±3%

• +12.1V ±3%

Malfunction or voltage failure generates the PWALM alarm.

The unit is provided with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes, series, dateof construction).

This store is powered by a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit which utilizesit for the Remote Inventory.

The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and is directly connected to theEquipment Controller.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

171

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

G70

3

INT

ER

FAC

E

DA

TAH

DB

3/N

RZ

DE

CO

DE

R

LOS

1.5

Mbi

t/s T

RIB

UTA

RY

– 1

D1.

5EN

1

D1.

5EP

1

CLO

CK

2Mbi

t/s S

IGN

AL

INS

ER

TIO

N IN

TO

C12

(LP

A)

VC

12

FO

RM

AT

TIN

G

(LP

T)

TU

12

FO

RM

AT

TIN

G

(HP

A)

G70

3IN

TE

RFA

CE

NR

Z/H

DB

3

EN

CO

DE

R

CLO

CK

D1.

5UN

1

D1.

5UP

1

PI

PI

PO

H

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

PO

H

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

TU

OH

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

2Mbi

t/s S

IGN

AL

RE

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

( LP

A)

PO

H

EX

TR

AC

TIO

N

( LP

T)

AIS

AIS

1

G

51.8

MH

z

DA

TA

EA

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

T1T

X

T21

TX

2Mbi

t/sT

RIB

.

D1.

5EN

21

D1.

5EP

21

D1.

5UN

21

D1.

5UP

21

1.5

Mbi

t(s

TR

IBU

TAR

Y –

21

T21

TX

T21

RX

+12

V

+5V

–5V

PO

WA

LIM

FU

SE

S

+12

.1V

–5.5

V

+5.

3V

PW

ALM

FR

OM

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

DT

–1E

i

TO

4

DT

–2E

i

/

WE

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

T1T

X

T21

TX

DT

–1W

i

DT

–2W

i

MS

P

DR

–1E

I

DR

–2E

I

PR

OT

EC

T.

PR

OT

ES

T

TU

–12

EA

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

1 21

MS

P

DR

–1W

I

DR

–2W

I

PR

OT

EC

T.

PR

OT

WE

ST

TU

–12

WE

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

1 21

DYNAMIC MATRIX

T1R

X

T21

RX

AIS

AIS

21

T21

RX

CAREM

CKB

CKA

SYNCB

SYNCA

CK

SYNCT

OF

RO

M C

RU

CR

US

ELE

CT

ION

PH

YS

ICA

LP

OS

ITIO

NA

CK

NO

WLE

D

ISWCAND

IALO

G W

ITH

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R U

NIT

1+1

AG

GR

EG

AT

EP

RO

TE

CT

ION

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

INT

ER

NA

L D

IALO

GU

E F

OR

ALA

RM

S C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

SP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

UN

IT T

YP

EA

CK

NO

WLE

DG

ME

NT

LOO

P–B

AC

K

AIS

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

OSWi

1

ALA

RM

S

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

E CT

YP

E 0

– 3:

EP

S

ISWCBN

ID 0 – 4:

LIECBNIECB

ISW1,2W

ISW1,2E

ISWT

TO

ALL

TH

E U

NIT

SF

RO

M C

RU

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

AG

GR

.F

RO

MT

RIB

S

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

FR

OM

/TO

PR

OT

WE

ST

PR

OT

ES

T

TR

IBU

TAR

IES

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

ÇÇÇÇ

ÅÅ

EA

ST

1A

GG

RE

GA

TE

TO

EA

ST

2A

GG

RE

GA

TE

4 / 4 /4 /T

OW

ES

T 1

AG

GR

EG

AT

ET

OW

ES

T 2

AG

GR

EG

AT

E

ÇÇÇÇ

4 / 4 / 4 / 4 /

FR

OM

EA

ST

1A

GG

RE

GA

TE

FR

OM

EA

ST

2A

GG

RE

GA

TE

FR

OM

WE

ST

1A

GG

RE

GA

TE

FR

OM

WE

ST

2A

GG

RE

GA

TE

ÇÇ ÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇ

Å

ÅÅ

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

FR

OM

/TO

FR

OM

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

SN

CP

/I

NR

Z HD

B3

HD

B3 NR

Z

TO

CR

U

+2.

5

+3.

3

T1/

NR

ZM

AP

PIN

G

2 M

bit/s

ALI

GN

ER

PLL

DE

MA

P.

CO

NT

RO

L

51.8

MH

z

51.8

MH

z

RZ

+

RZ

–

NR

Z

CK

2

NR

Z

CK

1.5 LO

S

NR

Z

CK

1.5

NR

Z

CK

2

RZ

+

RZ

–

EQ

UA

LIZ

AT

ION

Figure 76. 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

172

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.3 3x34Mbit/s TRIB

(See Figure 79. on page 178)

The 3x34Mbit/s TRIB unit allows a max. of three 34Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary streams to access theSTM–1 synchronous digital structure.

After having synchronized each tributary to the timing and synchronism signals received from the”ClockReference Units”, the unit, by means of the MATRIX units, transmits the tributary signals (mapped in theSTM–1 structure) towards the EAST and WEST Aggregate units.

The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 34Mbit/s tributary streams are extracted fromthe received STM–1 frames and then transmitted towards external lower hierarchical equipment. Accessmodule units interface the 34Mbit/s tributary signals with the external source (see description further on).

The regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which signal malfunctions to theCard Controller sub–unit. The latter informs the ”Equipment Controller” unit through LEDs and otherindications.

The following are dealt with in the following:

• Transmission

• Reception

• Card Controller


All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

173

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Transmission

The Tx part of the unit interfaces the three 34Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries and the STM–1synchronous digital structure. The latter is transmitted to the units as a 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus structuredstream for processing.

The CKA and CKB 38.88Mbit/s clocks and relative 2kHz SYNA and SYNB synch. signals are receivedfrom the ”Clock Reference Unit (CRU).The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the unit timing signals depends on theoperating status of the two CRU’s.

The unit receives three HDB3 coded/75 ohms unbal. 34.368 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries.

The description that follows concerns only one of the three tribs. in that they follow the same procedure.The signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) consisting of the G.703 Interface and the Decoder.

The G.703 Interface circuit:

• Regenerates the line signal by recovering an 0–12 dB attenuation at the Nyquist frequency.

• Extracts the 34 MHz clock from the line signal.

The Decoder:

• Code–decodes, i.e.: HDB3 –> data NRZ + clock.

• Detects signal loss hence generate the LOS alarm

• Loops back following the CARD CONTROLLER commands

Before being sent to a synchronous network the 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal is adapted and theninserted into the C3 structured container (LPA:Lower order Path Adaptation).

Through the LPT (lower order Path Termination) operation the VC–3 is arranged so as to distribute itsoctets within a time interval of 125msec. corresponding to the duration of 1 STM–1 frame.The VC–3 consists of a C3 container and a POH which in turn consists of nine octets equally distributedwithin the structure.

Figure 77. on page 177 shows the structure of a VC–3 and the POH bytes functions.

The operation that follows formats the TU–3 structure through TUOH generation and insertion.The TUOH consists of nine bytes.The first three bytes (H1, H2 and H3) contain the pointer locating the beginning of the VC–3.The remaining 6 bytes are stuff bytes.

Figure 78. on page 177 illustrates the TU–3 structure.

The operations described are carried out in each of the three 34 Mbit/s Tributaries.At this point, through the Lower order Path Connection (LPC), each n–th tributary (1–3) is cross–connected to one of the three positions assigned to it in the STM–1 frame thus creating a connection matrixtowards the WEST and EAST aggregates.

The 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregates viathe MATRIX units.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

174

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Receive side

The unit receives four 38.88 Mbit/s streams from each EAST 1,2 and WEST 1,2 Aggregates through theMatrix units.

A MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate to analyze (1 Main or 2 Spare) for each side using the PROTWEST and PROT EAST commands received from the Card Controller unit.

Three TU–3’s are chosen from the selected tributaries and, in accordance with the signalling indicationsreceived from the Card Controller, the East or West Rx side is selected (SNCP).The Full Matrix uses only West 1 and 2.The EPS protection of the Full Matrix selects Main or Spare.

The TUOH pointer’s interpreter detects presence of AIS and LOP on each selected stream.

At this point each VC–3 is individually handled. The description that follows deals with one VC–3 but it isapplicable to all of the three tributaries.

The POH is extracted from the VC–3’s thus obtaining the C–3 structures.

The POH Rx processing circuit:

• extracts J1 to check connection continuity( not available in this release).

• compares B3 with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC–3, and if errors are detectedthey are sent to the Card Controller.

• extracts C2 to check the VC–3 configuration

• extracts the FEBE indication from the first 4 bits of byte G1, and the FERF indication from the5th bit; both indications are sent to the Card Controller

The 34 Mbit/s signal is restructured by processing the C–3 in the LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) thusobtaining the signal (DATA) and the34 Mbit/s clock.

The regenerated tributary signal is HDB3 encoded. This signal can be replaced by the AIS signal whenloss of TU–3 signal has been detected (see description above).

Finally, the G.703 Interface circuit adapts the 34368 Kbit/s signal to the characteristics specified by ITU–TRec.G.703 and then sent to a source external to the unit.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

175

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Card Controller

The Card Controller carries out the following main functions

CRU selection

This interface selects the CRU (Clock Reference Unit) from which the synchronism and timing signals tobe used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection criteria, this interface processes the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:

• ISW CAN = internal alarm received from CRU–A

• ISW CBN = internal alarm received from CRU–B

Local dialog for alarms, configuration and performanceThis type of dialog permits to transmit/receive towards the unit the software setting options stored throughthe EEPROM. Alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.

All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and to generate (together withall the other alarms detected by the unit) the OSWi criteria to send to all the equipment units.


Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unitthrough the LIECB and NIECB connections.





Byte J1 interface

This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC3. (Not used in thisrelease).

Loop Management





AIS Processing


All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

176

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

MSP Protection

This function permits to select (PROT WEST command) one of the two signals received from theAggregate WEST, Main or Spare. The reciprocal operation (PROT EAST command) is carried out onAggregate EAST.Selection (performed during the turn–on phase) and switching operations (performed during the operatingphase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units.These criteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.When two Full Matrix are used this protection acts the EPS between these units.


This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from othertributaries.This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para ”EPS for electricaltributaries” on page 119.


The power supply voltages present at the input of the unit are:

+5.3V ± 3%

–5.5V ± 3%

+12.1V ± 3%

The PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.

The electrical ground and chassis ground are strap–connected.

The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes, series, dateof construction).

This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit whichutilizes it for the Remote Inventory.

The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directly connected tothe Equipment Controller.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

177

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

J1B3C2

G1F2H4

Z3

Z4Z5

C–3VC–3

85 byte

POH STRUCTURE:

• J1 (path trace) utilized to transmit in a cyclic mode a 64–octect configuration in order to checkthe connection continuity. Not operative in this release.

• B3 resulting from the BIP–8 performed on the previous VC–3, before the scrambler.• C2 (signal label) = the configurations are utilized to indicate if VC–3 is equipped or not, or the

payload structure• G1 (path status) utilized to transmit information on the link status to the remote terminal.

It contains:

– four bits for the FEBE (Far End Block Error) indication, where the decimal numbers 0–8indicate the number of violations of BIP–8 (the illegal values 9 to 15 indicate absence oferrors);

– one bit for the alarm indication FERF (Far End Receiving Failure) and other three digitsnot utilized.

• F2, utilized for the transmission of one channel coming from the AUX unit (OHBUS circuit).• Z3–Z5 can be accessed via AUX board interface.• H4 not utilized.

Figure 77. VC–3 structure

H1H2H3

SPAYLOAD9 ROWS

86 byte

TUFFING

TU – 3VC–3

• H1,H2,H3 TU Pointer (TUOH)

Figure 78. TU–3 structure

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

178

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

G70

3IN

TE

RFA

CE

DA

TA

LOS

34M

bit/s

D34

E1

VC

3F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(LP

T)

TU

3F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(HP

A)

PI

OH

–BU

SM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

PO

HG

EN

ER

AT

ION

TU

OH

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

G

34M

Hz

EA

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

T1T

X

T21

TX

D34

E3

D34

U3

34M

bit(

s T

RIB

UTA

RY

–3

T21

TX

T21

RX

+12

V

+5V –5V

PO

WA

LIM

FU

SE

S

+12

.1V

–5.5

V

+5.

3V

FROM POWERSUPPLY

EA

ST

14

DT

–1E

i/

EA

ST

24

DT

–2E

i/

EA

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

T1T

X

T21

TX

WE

AS

T 1

4

DT

–1W

i/

WE

AS

T 2

4

DT

–2W

i/

MS

PE

AS

T 1

4D

R–1

EI

/

EA

ST

24

DR

–2E

I/

PR

OT

EC

T.

PR

OT

ES

T

EA

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

1

MS

PW

ES

T 1

4D

R–1

WI

/

WE

ST

24

DR

–2W

I

/P

RO

TE

CT.

PR

OT

WE

ST

WE

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

T1R

X

CAREM

CKB

CKA

SYNCB

SYNCA

CK

SYNC

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

CR

U

CR

US

ELE

CT

ION

PH

YS

ICA

LP

OS

ITIO

NA

CK

NO

WLE

DISWCAN

DIA

LOG

WIT

HE

QU

IPM

EN

TC

ON

TR

OLL

ER

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

INT

ER

NA

L D

IALO

GU

E F

OR

ALA

RM

S C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

SP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

UN

IT T

YP

EA

CK

NO

WLE

AG

ME

NT

BY

TE

J1

OSWi

1A

LAR

MS

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

EC

TY

PE

0 –

3:

LOO

P–B

AC

K

ISWCBN

ID 0 – 4:

LIECBNIECB

ISW1,2W

ISW1,2E

TO

ALL

TH

E U

NIT

SC

RU

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

AG

GR

.

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

PR

OT

WE

ST

PR

OT

ES

T

TO THE MATRIX FROM THE MATRIX

AN

DP

RO

CE

SS

ING

34M

bit/s

SIG

NA

LIN

SE

RT

ION

INT

OC

–3 (

LPA

)

TR

IBU

TAR

Y–1

HD

B3/

NR

ZD

EC

OD

ER

CLO

CK

FU

TU

RE

BU

SD

RIV

ER

OH

–BU

S

G70

3IN

TE

RFA

CE

PI

HD

B3/

NR

ZE

NC

OD

ER

CK

D34

U1

OH

–BU

S

34 Mbit/s TRIB

34M

bit/s

SIG

NA

LR

EG

EN

ER

AT

ION

(LP

A)

DA

TA

J1 B3

C2

G1

INS

.AIS

PO

H R

XJ1 B

3C

2G

1

F2,

Z3–

Z5

PR

OC

ES

SIN

G

INT

ER

FAC

E

MS

PP

RO

TE

CT

ION

EP

ST

RIB

UTA

RIE

SM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

ISW

T T

RIB

S

AIS

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

J1

PO

HE

XT

RA

CT.

(LP

T)

TU

AIS

DE

TE

CT

ION

T2R

X

T3R

X

2 3 1 2 3

PP

S

TU

AIS

DE

TE

CT

ION

T3R

X

AIS

3

AIS

1

Figure 79. Block diagram : 3 x 34 Mbit/s Trib.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

179

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.4 34/2 Tran. Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary

(See Figure 80. on page 185).

The 34/2 Trans Mux and 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary unit allows one 34 Mbit/s and five 2 Mbit/s plesiochronousstream(s) to access the synchronous digital structure.

The 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous structured stream is demultiplexed into sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals.

The twenty–one 2 Mbit/s streams are then processed until a frame structure has been obtained from/towhich a TU–12 can be either add/dropped.

Since the STM–1 structure can carry a max. of 63 2Mbit/s tributary streams, the digital streams leavingthe unit involved result to be equipped with only one third of the general STM–1 frame capacity.

The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 2Mbit/s tributary streams are extracted fromthe received STM–1 frames. The five 2 Mbit/s streams and one 34 Mbit/s stream are obtained bymultiplexing the remaining sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals and transmitting them towards external lowerhierarchical equipment.

The regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which signal any malfunctions tothe Card Controller sub–unit. The latter conveys the information to the ”Equipment Controller ESCT” unitand lights on a local alarm indication (LED).

The description is split into:

• Transmission

• Reception

• Card Controller


All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

180

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Transmission

The unit interfaces the 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary, the five 2 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries andthe STM–1 synchronous digital structure. The latter is then transmitted, in 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus format,to the units processing the aggregate stream.

Two 38.88MHz clocks (CKA and CKB) and the relative 2kHz synchronizing signals (SYNCA and SYNCB)are received from the ”Clock reference unit”(CRU) of the equipment.

The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the general unit timing signals dependson the operating status of the two CRU’s.

The 34 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary is received in HDB3 format with 75 ohms unbal. impedance

Afterwards the signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) consisting of Interface G.703 and the Decoder.

The G.703 interface circuit:

• Regenerates the line signal.

• extracts the 34MHz clock from the line signal.

The Decoder:

• decodes the HDB3 code (HDB3––> data NRZ + clock)

• detects the loss of the signal hence generates the LOS alarm

• Loops back following the Card Controller commands

The ”Demux” circuit decodes and demultiplexes the 34,368 Mbit/s signal into sixteen 2048 Mbit/s NRZstreams.Besides the 34 Mbit/s frame it also acknowledges four 8 Mbit/s frames as requested by the plesiochronousdemultiplexing strategy. It provides access to the 34 Mbit/s service bit (B12) and to the bit slip option.Plesiochronous alarms are detected.

The 65 MHz X0 oscillator generates sixteen 2,048 MHz clock signals associated to the mapped tributariesof the 34 Mbit/s incoming frame.

The five 2Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries are received in HDB3 format with 75/120 ohms bal./unbal.impedance. The termination is strap–set.

The description that follows concerns only one of the five tribs. in that they follow the same procedure.

An electric transformer decouples the line signals. Afterwards the signal accesses the Physical Interface(P.I.) consisting of Interface G.703 and the Decoder.

The function of the G703 interface circuit is to:

• generate the line signal thus recovering a Nyquist attenuation within the 0–6 dB range

• extract the 2MHz clock from the line signal. This clock signal is also sent to the CRU.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

181

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The Decoder:

• decodes the HDB3 code (HDB3––> data NRZ + clock)

• detects the loss of the signal hence generates the LOS alarm

• Loopbacks onto the Card Controller commands

The description that follows is common to all the twenty–one 2 Mbit/s signals.

As primary condition, the 2Mbit/s plesiochronous signal is adapted to transit through a synchronousnetwork. A C–12 container is structured to receive the 2Mbit/s stream (LPA Lower Order PathAdaptation).

Through the LPT operation (Lower Order Path Termination) the VC–12 container is arranged to distributeits octets within a time interval of 500 µsec. which corresponds to a period of 4 STM–1 frames.The VC–12 consists of a C–12 container and a POH octet (path overhead) assigned to the first positionof the structure.


The subsequent HPA operation (Higher order path adaptation) structures the TU–12 through thegeneration and insertion of TUOH. The TUOH is the pointer which indicates the beginning of VC–12 insidethe TU–12 stream. TUOH consists of four bytes (V1, V2, V3, V4) equally distributed within a time interval of 4 STM–1 frames. Figure 74. on page 164 shows the TU–12 structure.

The operations described are performed on all of the twenty–one 2Mbit/s tributaries.

At this point through the Lower Order Path Connection operation (LPC) each n–th tributary (1–21) isassigned to any of the 63 positions of the STM1frame thus structuring the connection matrices towardsthe West and East aggregates.

The 38.88Mbit/s 4–row bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregate units.

The main alarms, collected by the Card Controller, indicate (for each tributary):

• LOS: loss of signal

• over/underflow of the elastic store.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

182

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Reception

On the Rx side, the unit receives the four 38.88Mbit/s streams from each EAST and WEST aggregate unit.

The MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate Main or Spare to analyze between the two received fromWEST and the two received from EAST, through commands PROT WEST, PROT EAST coming from theCard Controller.

The 21 TU–12’s (with SNCP functions) are chosen and extracted from the selected tributaries, throughthe dynamic connection matrix, according to the indications received from the ”Card Controller”.

The TUOH’s pointer interpreter checks AIS on each selected stream.

At this point each VC–12 is individually processed, therefore the description will deal with only one VC–12but is applicable to all the tributaries.

To obtain the C–12 structure the POH is extracted from the VC–12 through the LPT (Low order PathTermination) operation.

The POH MANAGEMENT circuit carries out the following operations:

• BIP–2 estimate. Error counting is utilized to generate the FEBE signal (Tx side).

• SIGNAL LABEL check. Check regular configuration of the signal label bits.

• FEBE check. Check if errors have been detected on the remote equipment by BIP–2calculation.

• FERF check.

• Path Trace extraction (not available in this release).

All the above operations are managed by the Unit Card Controller.

The 2Mbit/s signal is regenerated by processing the C–12 (LPA – Lower order Path Adaptation) thusobtaining the 2Mbit/s signal (DATA) and clock. To this concern a DPLL circuit is utilized with time basesupplied by an external oscillator.

The twenty–one 2 Mbit/s streams are split into two blocks (a 16–stream one and a 5–stream one) and sentto two different paths.

The sixteen 2 Mbit/s signals of the 34 Mbit/s stream (which can be looped back through the CardController) are sent to the ”Mux” circuit to be multiplexed into the 34 Mbit/s structured stream.

The tributary signal is HDB3 encoded and can be replaced by the AIS signal when detecting the loss ofthe 34 Mbit/s signal.

The G703 interface and the electric transformer adapt the 34,368 Mbit/s tributary signal to ITU–TRec. G.703 characteristics and is then sent to an external source.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

183

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Card Controller


CRU selection

This interface selects the CRU (clock reference unit) from which the synchronism and timing signals tobe used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection criteria, this interfaceprocesses the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:ISWCAN : internal alarm received from the CRU A;ISWCBN : internal alarm received from the CRU B;The interface also supplies the CKMSTOFF alarm criteria in case of loss of the selected timing signal.

Local dialog for alarms, configuration and performanceThis type of dialog permits to transmit/receive to/from the unit the EEPROM–stored software settingoptions. Alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.

All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and generate the OSWi switchingsignal to send to all the other units to execute switching.

Loop Management





AIS Processing


Dialog with the Equipment controller ESCT unit

Information on setting options, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the ESCT Equipment Controller unitthrough the local LIECB and NIECB wiring.

Physical position acknowledgmentThrough signals ID 0–4 the Card Controller acknowledges the position of the unit inside the subrack.

MSP protection (for Aggregate APS)This function permits to select (through commands PROT WEST and PROT EAST) one of the signalsreceived from aggregates WEST and EAST , Main or Spare.Selection (performed during the turn–on phase) and switching operations (performed during the operatingphase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units.These criteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

184

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from the othertributaries.This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS Protection is described in para. 3.1.5.2 ”EPSfor electrical tributaries” on page119


Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller Trib. can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.


The power supply voltages present at the input of the 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary Enhanced Monitoring unit are:

+5.3V ± 3%

–5.5V ± 3%

+12.1V ± 3%

PWALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.


The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (Part Nos., series,date of construction).

This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller ESCT unitwhich utilizes it for the Remote Inventory.

The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directly connected tothe Equipment Controller ESCT.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

185

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

TO

CR

U

D2E

N1

D2E

P1

G70

3IN

TE

RFA

CE

2Mbi

t/s T

RIB

UTA

RY

–1 DA

TAH

DB

3/N

RZ

DE

CO

DE

R

CLO

CK

2Mbi

t/s S

IGN

AL

INS

ER

TIO

N IN

TO

C12

(LP

A)

VC

12F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(LP

T)

TU

12F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(HP

A)

ÅÇ

LOS

PI

D2U

N1

D2U

N1

G70

3IN

TE

RFA

CE

DA

TAN

RZ

/HD

B3

EN

CO

DE

R

CLO

CK

2Mbi

t/s S

IGN

AL

(LP

A)

ÇÅ

CK

PI

RE

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

PO

HT

UO

HG

EN

ER

AT

ION

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

DA

TA

PO

HE

XT

RA

C.

(LP

A)

AIS

AIS

1

PO

HG

EN

ER

AT

ION

D2E

N5

D2E

P5

D2U

N5

D2U

P5

2Mbi

t/s T

RIB

UTA

RY

–5

T5T

x

D34

E–A

G70

3IN

TE

RFA

CE

DA

TAH

DB

3/N

RZ

DE

CO

DE

R LOS

PI

T5R

x

CLO

CK

D34

E–B

D34

U–A

G70

3IN

TE

RFA

CE

NR

Z/H

DB

3E

NC

OD

ER

ÇÇÇÇ

PI

D34

U–B

CK

DEMULTIPL.

2Mbi

t/s S

IGN

AL

INS

ER

TIO

N IN

TO

C12

(LP

A)

VC

12F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(LP

T)

TU

12F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(HP

A)

PO

HT

UO

HG

EN

ER

AT

ION

GE

NE

RA

TIO

NT

21X

T6T

X

GC

K 51,8

4MH

z

+12

.1V

+5.

3V

–5.5

V

FU

SE

S

+12

V

+5V –5V

PO

WA

LIM

MULTIPL.

LOO

PB

AC

K

2Mbi

t/s S

IGN

AL

(LP

A)

RE

GE

NE

RA

TIO

NP

OH

EX

TR

AC

.(L

PA

)

PO

HM

AN

AG

EM

EN

TC

K

CK

1 16

T6R

X

T21

X

INT

ER

NA

L D

IALO

GU

E F

OR

ALA

RM

S C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

SP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

MA

IN U

NIT

A

CK

NO

WLE

D.

LOO

P–B

AC

K

AIS

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

EP

ST

RIB

UTA

RIE

SM

AN

AG

EM

EN

TC

AR

D C

ON

TR

OLL

ER

CR

US

ELE

CT

ION

PH

YS

ICA

LP

OS

ITIO

NA

CK

NO

WLE

D

DIA

LOG

WIT

HE

QU

IPM

EN

TC

ON

TR

OLL

ER

ES

CT

UN

IT

MP

SP

RO

TE

CT

ION

ALR

MS

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS

ÇÇP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

CT

YP

E (

3:0)

ÅÅÅÅ

ISWCAN

ISWCBN

ID 0–4:

NIECB

LIECB

ISW1,2WN

ISW1,2EN

ISWT

PR

OT

WE

ST

PR

OT

EA

ST

FR

OM

CR

U

FR

OM

/ T

O E

Q.

CO

NT

R. E

SC

TF

RO

MA

GG

R.

FR

OM

TR

IBS

2Mbi

t/sT

RIB

.

TR

IB.

34M

b/s

NO

T U

SE

D

TR

IB.

34M

b/s

NO

T U

SE

D

FR

OM

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

PW

ALM

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

1

OSWi

SYNC

CK

CAREM

FR

OM

/ T

O E

QC

ON

TR

. ES

CT

TO

EQ

.C

ON

TR

. ES

CT

CKBCKA

SYNCBSYNCA

FR

OM

CR

UT

O A

LLT

HE

UN

ITS

DYNAMIC MATRIX

TU

–12

EA

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

1 21

T1R

X

AIS

AIS

1

AIS

21

T21

RX

T5R

X

T6R

X

T21

RX

PPS

MS

PP

RO

TE

C

TU

–12

WE

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

1 21M

SP

PR

OT

EC

PR

OT

EA

ST

PR

OT

WE

ST

ÇÇÇÇ

Ç

EA

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

T1T

X

T5T

X

T6T

X

T21

TX

ÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇ

EA

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

T5T

X

T6T

X

T21

TX

ÇÇÇÇ

T1T

X

4

DT

–1E

i

4

DT

–1W

i

4 DT

–1W

i

4 DT

–1W

i

TO EASTAGGREGATE

TO WESTAGGREGATE

FROM EASTAGGREGATE

FROM WESTAGGREGATE

Figure 80. 34/2 Trans Mux and 5 x 2 Mbit/s tributary

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

186

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.5 3x45Mbit/s TRIB


The 3x45Mbit/s TRIB unit allows a max. of three 45Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary streams to access theSTM–1 synchronous digital structure.

After having synchronized each tributary to the timing and synchronism signals received from the”CRU”,the unit, by means of the MATRIX units,transmits the tributary signals (mapped in the STM–1 structure)towards the EAST and WEST Aggregate units.

The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 45Mbit/s tributary streams are extracted fromthe received STM–1 frames and then transmitted towards external lower hierarchical equipment. Switchmodule units interface the 34Mbit/s tributary signals with the external source (see description further on).


The following are dealt with in the following:

• Transmission

• Reception

• Card Controller


All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

187

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Transmission

The Tx part of the unit interfaces the three 45Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries and the STM–1synchronous digital structure. The latter is transmitted to the units as a 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus structuredstream for processing.

The CKA and CKB 38.88Mbit/s clocks and relative 2kHz SYNA and SYNB synch. signals are receivedfrom the ”CRU” unit.The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the unit timing signals depends on theoperating status of the two CRU’s.

The unit receives three B3ZS coded/75 ohms unbal. 44.736 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries.

The description that follows concerns only one of the three tribs. in that they follow the same procedure.The signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) consisting of the G.703 Interface (also compliant withANSI T1 102 Rec. – DS3 interface) and the Decoder.

The G.703 Interface circuit:

• Regenerates the line signal by recovering an 0–6 dB attenuation at the Nyquist frequency.• Extracts the 45 MHz clock from the line signal.

The Decoder:

• Code–decodes, i.e.: B3ZS –> data NRZ + clock.• Detects signal loss hence generate the LOS alarm• Loops back following the CARD CONTROLLER commands

Before being sent to a synchronous network the 45 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal at 44.736 Mbit/s isadapted and then inserted into the C3 structured container (LPA: Lower order Path Adaptation).

Through the LPT (lower order Path Termination) operation the VC–3 is arranged so as to distribute itsoctets within a time interval of 125msec. corresponding to the duration of 1 STM–1 frame.The VC–3 consists of a C3 container and a POH which in turn consists of nine octets equally distributedwithin the structure.

Figure 77. on page 177 shows the structure of a VC–3 and the POH bytes functions.

The operation that follows formats the TU–3 structure through TUOH generation and insertion. The TUOHconsists of nine bytes.The first three bytes (H1, H2 and H3) contain the pointer locating the beginning of the VC–3. The remaining6 bytes are stuff bytes.


The operations described are carried out in each of the three 45 Mbit/s Tributaries. At this point, throughthe Lower order Path Connection (LPC), each n–th tributary (1–3) is cross–connected to one of the threepositions assigned to it in the STM–1 frame thus creating a connection matrix towards the WEST andEAST aggregates.

The 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregates viathe MATRIX units.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

188

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Receive side

The unit receives four 38.88 Mbit/s streams from each EAST 1,2 and WEST 1,2 Aggregates through theMatrix units.

A MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate to analyze (1 or 2) for each side using the PROT WESTand PROT EAST commands received from the Card Controller unit.

Three TU–3’s are chosen from the selected tributaries and, in accordance with the signalling indicationsreceived from the Card Controller, the East or West Rx side is selected (SNCP).The Full Matrix uses only West 1 and 2.The EPS protection of the Full Matrix selects Main or Spare.

The TUOH pointer is utilized to detect presence of AIS on each selected stream.

At this point each VC–3 is individually handled. The description that follows deals with one VC–3 but it isapplicable to all of the three tributaries.



• extracts J1 to check connection continuity (not available in this release).

• compares B3 with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC–3, and if errors are detectedthey are sent to the Card Controller.

• extracts C2 to check the VC–3 configuration extracts the FEBE indication from the first 4 bitsof byte G1, and the FERF indication from the 5th bit; both indications are sent to the CardController

The 45 Mbit/s signal is restructured by processing the C–3 in the LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) thusobtaining the signal (DATA) and the 45 Mbit/s clock.

The regenerated tributary signal is B3ZS encoded. This signal can be replaced by the AIS signal whenloss of TU–3 signal has been detected (see description above).

Finally, the G.703 Interface circuit adapts the 44736 Kbit/s signal to the characteristics specified by ITU–TRec.G.703 and then sent to a source external to the unit.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

189

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Card Controller

The Card Controller carries out the following main functions

CRU selection

This interface selects the CRU (Clock Reference Unit) from which the synchronism and timing signals tobe used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection criteria, this interfaceprocesses the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:

• ISW CA = internal alarm received from CRU–A

• ISW CB = internal alarm received from CRU–B

Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance.

This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive towards the unit the software setting options stored throughthe EEPROM. Alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.

All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and to generate (together withall the other alarms detected by the unit) the OSWi criteria to send to all the equipment units.


Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unitthrough the LIECB and NIECB connections.





Byte J1 interface

This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC3. (Not used in thisrelease).

Loop Management



Through the internal loopback the signal received from the aggregate is looped on the tributary tx side.Loops are used to test at various level the equipment and the line.

AIS Processing


All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

190

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

MSP Protection

This function permits to select (PROT WEST command) one of the two signals received from the WEST.The reciprocal operation (PROT EAST command) is carried out on Aggregate EAST.When two Full Matrix are used this protection acts as EPS between these units.


This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from othertributaries. This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para 3.1.5.2 ”EPSfor electrical tributaries” on page 119.



+5.3V ± 3%

–5.5V ± 3%

+12.1V ± 3%






All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

191

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

+12

V

+5V –5V

FU

SE

S

+12

.1V

–5.5

V

+5.

3V

PW

ALM

FR

OM

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

CAREM

CKB

CKA

SYNCB

SYNCA

CK

SYNCE

Q. C

ON

TR

.

CR

US

ELE

CT

ION

PH

YS

ICA

LP

OS

ITIO

NA

CK

NO

WLE

D

ISWCAND

IALO

G W

ITH

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R E

SC

T U

NIT

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

INT

ER

NA

L D

IALO

GU

E F

OR

MA

IN U

NIT

BY

TE

J1

INT

ER

FAC

E

OSWi

1

CT

YP

E 0

– 3:

ISWCBN

ID 0 – 4:

LIECBNIECB

ISW1,2EN

CR

UE

Q C

ON

TR

.A

GG

R.

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

AU

X

AC

KN

OW

LEA

GM

EN

T

J1

D45

E1

G70

3A

NS

I DS

3H

DB

3/N

RZ

DE

CO

DE

R

DA

TA

CLO

CK

LOS

PI

45M

bit/s

SIG

NA

LIN

SE

RT

ION

INT

OC

–3 (

LPA

)

VC

–3F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(LP

T)

TU

3F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(HP

A)

TU

OH

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

PO

H T

XG

EN

ER

AT

ION

AN

DP

RO

CE

SS

ING

J1 B3

C2

G1

F2,

Z3,

–Z5

PO

H R

X

PR

OC

ES

SIN

G

J1 B3

C2

G1

OH

BU

SM

AN

AG

EM

EN

TF

UT

UR

E

BU

SD

RIV

ER

OH

–BU

SO

H–B

US

D45

U1

G70

3N

RZ

/HD

B3

EN

CO

DE

RD

ATA

INS

. AIS

CK

PI

45M

bit/s

SIG

NA

LR

EG

EN

ER

AT

ION

(LP

A)

PO

HE

XT

RA

C.

(LP

T)

TU

AIS

DE

TE

CT

ION

AIS

1

G

45M

Hz

34M

bit/s

TR

IBU

TAR

Y–3

D45

E3

D45

U3

T3T

X

T3R

X

OH

–BU

S

ALA

RM

S C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

SP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

TO

ALL

TH

E U

NIT

SF

RO

MC

RU

LOO

P–B

AC

K

AIS

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

MS

P ISW1,2WN

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

EA

LAR

MS

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS

PR

OT

EA

ST

PR

OT

WE

ST

EA

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

T1T

XT

OE

AS

T 1

AG

GR

EA

GT

E4 DT

–1E

i/

TO

EA

ST

2A

GG

RE

AG

TE

4 DT

–2E

i/

WE

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

TO

WE

AS

T 1

AG

GR

EA

GT

E4

DT

–1W

i/

TO

WE

AS

T 2

AG

GR

EA

GT

E4

DT

–2W

i/

MS

P

TO

EA

ST

1A

GG

RE

AG

TE

4

DT

–1E

i/

TO

EA

ST

2A

GG

RE

AG

TE

4

DT

–2E

i/

PR

OT

EC

T.

PR

OT

WE

ST

EA

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

1

MS

P

TO

WE

ST

1A

GG

RE

AG

TE

4

DT

–1W

i/

TO

WE

ST

2A

GG

RE

AG

TE

4

DT

–2W

i/

PR

OT

EC

T.

PR

OT

WE

ST

WE

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

T2T

X

T3T

X

T1T

X

T2T

X

T3T

X

ÇÇÇÇ

2 3 1 2 3

ÇÇÇÇ

T1R

X

T2R

X

T3R

X

TU

AIS

DE

TE

CT

ION

AIS

3

T3R

X

INT

ER

FAC

E

AN

SI D

S3

INT

ER

FAC

E

PP

S

45M

b/s

TR

IB.

E

PR

OT

EC

TIO

N

EP

ST

RIB

UTA

RY

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

ÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇ

ISW

T

TR

IBS

Figure 81. Schema funzionale 3 x 45Mbit/s TRIB.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

192

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.6 DVB Tributary


The DVB tributary has been introduced to support point to point and broadcast transmission of a DigitalVideo stream compliant with DVB specifications.

It supports the following features :

• transmitting and receiving function selectable by hardware jumpers present on the board

• three indipendent TX or RX channels are available on a single board

• ASI (Asynchronous Serial Interface ) supported by means of standard devices ; both distributedand burst transmission modes are supported

• supported video stream rate between 1.44 and 39.9 Mbit/s automatically detected andmanaged by the board

• both 188 and 204 packet lenght are supported

Three independent bidirectional ASI interfaces are availables . As requested by the standard, input andoutput are decoupled by a transformer.

Separate BNC connectors are provided for ASI Input and Output .

On the Tx side, each of the three ASI ports are mapped into a 45 Mbit/s plesiochronous stream; then the45 Mbit/s channels are mapped into a STM–1 synchronous frame.

The reciprocal operations are performed on the Rx side. The 45Mbit/s streams are extracted from thereceived STM–1 frames and then processed by a Base Processor to obtain three ASI streams .


A DSP is responsible for board configuration and programming.

The following deals with:

• Transmission

• Reception

• Card Controller


All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

193

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Transmission

The following description applies to each of the three input ports.

The Tx side of the board receives an MPEG–TS data packet or data burst stream .The lenght of eachpacket is compliant to the ASI –EN 50083–9 Specs. so it can be 188 or 204 bytes lenght .The ASI streamfrequency is 270 Mbit/s.The incoming stream frequency handled ranges from 1.44 Mbit/s up to 39.9 Mbit/s.

By means of an ASI interface the packets are converted into a serial flow and a 27 Mhz clock is recoveredfrom the data and is locked to a 45 Mhz clock by means of a PLL.

A proprietary solution for MPEG–TS packet mapping into an unframed 45 Mbit/s PDH stream has beenadopted. A DSP processor and an FPGA (programmable device) are used to implement the adaptationprocess.

This flow is then mapped into an STM–1 synchronous digital structure. The latter is transmitted to the unitsas a 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured stream for processing.

The CKA and CKB 38.88Mbit/s clocks and relative 2kHz SYNA and SYNB synch. signals are receivedfrom the ”Clock Reference unit” (CRU).The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generatethe unit timing signals depends on the operating status of the two CRU’s.

Before being sent to a synchronous network the 45 Mbit/s plesiochronous signal is adapted and theninserted into the C3 structured container (LPA:Lower order Path Adaptation).

Then, by means of the LPT (lower order Path Termination) operation the VC–3 is arranged to distributeits bytes within a time interval of 125 µsec. corresponding to a 1 STM–1 frame period. The VC–3 consistsof a C3 container and a POH which in turn consists of nine bytes equally distributed within the structure.


The operation that follows formats the TU–3 structure through TUOH generation and insertion. The TUOHconsists of nine bytes. The first three bytes (H1, H2 and H3) contain the pointer locating the beginning ofthe VC–3. The remaining 6 bytes are stuff bytes.


The operations described are carried out in each of the three 45 Mbit/s Tributaries. At this point, throughthe Lower order Path Connection (LPC), each n–th tributary (1–3) is cross–connected to one of the threepositions assigned to it in the STM–1 frame thus creating a connection matrix towards the WEST andEAST aggregates.

The 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured data is transmitted towards the WEST and EAST aggregatesdepending on the configurations.

The Card Controller (also concerned with presetting options) gathers the main alarms i.e., Loss of signal(LOS), elastic store under/overflow, from each Tributary.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

194

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Reception

The unit can receive up to four 38.88 Mbit/s streams two from the EAST1/2 and two from WEST1/2Aggregates.

An MSP protection circuit selects the aggregate (1 or 2) to analyze using the commands received fromthe Card Controller unit.

Three TU–3’s are chosen from the tributaries selected through the dynamic connection matrix and, inaccordance with the signalling indications received from the Card Controller.

The TU–AIS condition and the loss of pointer are detected by the TUOH’s pointer interpreter.

At this point each VC–3 is individually handled. The description that follows deals with one VC–3 but isapplicable to all of the three tributaries.



• extracts J1 to check connection continuity (not operative in this release)

• compares B3 with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC–3, and any detected errors aresent to the Card Controller.

• extracts C2 to check the VC–3 configuration

• extracts the FEBE indication from the first 4 bits of byte G1, and the RAI indication from the5th bit; both indications are sent to the Card Controller

The 45 Mbit/s signal is restructured by processing the C–3 in the LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation) thusobtaining the signal (DATA) and the 45 Mbit/s clock which lock the 27 Mhz clock. A DPLL is implementedin the DSP processor to guarantee high performance in terms of residual jitter and wander figures.

The 45 Mbit/s signal is then mapped into an MPEG–TS stream by the FPGA. ASI burst or packet data aregenerated and are sent to the ASi interface togheter with the clock.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

195

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Card Controller

The main functions performed by the Card Controller are:

CRU selection

This interface selects the CRU from which the synch. and timing signals to be used as reference signalsfor the unit are extracted.

The interface processes the alarms received from the two CRU’s to supply the selection criteria:

• ISWCAN = internal alarm received from CRU–A

• ISWCBN = internal alarm received from CRU–B

Local dialog for alarms, configuration and performance

This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive towards the unit the E2PROM stored software settingoptions. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and to generate (together withall the other alarms detected by the unit) the OSWi criteria to send to all the equipment units.

Dialogue with the Equipment controller unit

Information on presettings, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller ESCT unitthrough the LIECB and NIECB connections.



MSP protection

This function permits to select (through commands PROT WEST and PROT EAST) one of the signalsreceived from aggregates WEST and EAST.

Selection (performed during the turn–on phase) and switching (performed during the operating phase) areprocessed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. These criteria indicatethe presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.

Tributary EPS management

This unit is not EPS protected


Through the CTYPE signal the Card Controller acknowledges the unit on which it is mounted.

Byte J1 interface (Not operative in this release)

This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC3.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

196

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436



• +5.3V ±3%

• –5.5V ±3%

• +12.1V ±3%

The PWALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.


The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes, series, dateof construction).This store is powered by a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit which utilizesit for the Remote Inventory.

The contents of the Remote Inventory is fully described in on para. 4 on page 279.

The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and is directly connected to theEquipment Controller.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

197

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

DV

B T

RIB

UTA

RY

VC

3F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(LP

T)

TU

3F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(HP

A)

OH

–BU

S

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

PO

H T

XG

EN

ER

AT

ION

TU

OH

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

EA

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

T1T

X

T3T

X

FR

OM

/TO

D45

E3

D45

U3

45M

bit/s

TR

IBU

TAR

Y–3

T3T

X

T3R

X

+3.

3 V

+5V

+ 4

.5F

US

ES

+12

.1V

–5.5

V

+5.

3VF

RO

MP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

TO

DT

–1E

i

DT

–2E

i

WE

ST

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NM

AT

RIX

(LP

C)

T1T

X

DT

–1W

i

DT

–2W

i

MS

P

DR

–1E

I

DR

–2E

I

PR

OT

EC

T.

PR

OT

ES

T

EA

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

1

MS

P

DR

–1W

I

DR

–2W

I

PR

OT

EC

T.

PR

OT

WE

ST

WE

ST

EX

TR

AC

.

T1R

X

CAREM

CKB

CKA

SYNCB

SYNCA

CK

SY

NC

TO

FR

OM

CR

U

CR

US

ELE

CT

ION

PH

YS

ICA

LP

OS

ITIO

NA

CK

NO

WLE

D

ISWCAN

DIA

LOG

WIT

HE

QU

IPM

EN

TC

ON

TR

OLL

ER

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

INT

ER

NA

L D

IALO

GU

E F

OR

ALA

RM

S C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

SP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

UN

IT T

YP

EA

CK

NO

WLE

DG

ME

NT

BY

TE

J1

OSWi

1A

LAR

MS

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

EC

TY

PE

0 –

3:

ISWCBN

ID 0 – 4:

LIECBNIECB

ISW1,2W

ISW1,2E

TO

ALL

TH

E U

NIT

SF

RO

M C

RU

FR

OM

/TO

AG

GR

.

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

FR

OM

/TO

PR

OT

WE

ST

PR

OT

ES

T

AN

DP

RO

CE

SS

ING

45M

bit/s

SIG

NA

LIN

SE

RT

ION

INT

OC

–3 (

LPA

)

FU

TU

RE

BU

SD

RIV

ER

OH

–BU

S

OH

–BU

S

RE

GE

NE

RA

TIO

N

J1 B3

C2

G1

PO

H R

XJ1 B

3C

2G

1

F2,

Z3–

Z5 P

RO

CE

SS

ING

INT

ER

FAC

EM

SP

PR

OT

EC

TIO

N

J1

PO

HE

XT

RA

CT.

(LP

T)

TU

AIS

DE

TE

CT

ION

T2R

X

T3R

X

2 3 1 2 3

SN

CP

/I

TU

AIS

DE

TE

CT

ION

T3R

X

AIS

3

AIS

1

4 /4 / 4 /4 /

EA

ST

1A

GG

RE

GA

TE

TO

EA

ST

2

AG

GR

EG

AT

E

TO

WE

ST

1A

GG

RE

GA

TE

TO

WE

ST

2A

GG

RE

GA

TE

4 /4 / 4 /4 /

FR

OM

EA

ST

1A

GG

RE

GA

TE

FR

OM

EA

ST

2

AG

GR

EG

AT

E

FR

OM

WE

ST

1A

GG

RE

GA

TE

FR

OM

WE

ST

2A

GG

RE

GA

TE

ÇÇ ÇÇ

T2T

X

T3T

X

T2T

X

TU

–3

TU

–3

ÇÇÇÇ

DY

NA

MIC

MA

TR

IX

ÇÇ

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

ÇÇÇÇ

AU

X–C

HE

OW

AG

G.

OH

–BU

S

45M

bit/s

SIG

NA

L

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

FR

OM

PW

ALM

F2,

Z3–

Z5

DV

B–A

SI

PH

YS

ICA

LIN

TE

RFA

CE

FP

GA

CK

45

NR

Z–O

UT

DS

P

PLL

45

TX

/RX

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NR

EG

IST

ER

S

DA

TA

CLO

CK

AS

I–IN

AS

I–O

UT

3 /

3 /

G –4.5

V

DA

TA

PLL

27

CK

45

CK

45

Figure 82. Block diagram : DVB TRIB.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

198

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.7 140/STM1 Switch Tributary Unit


The unit bidirectionally interfaces a 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous or 155 Mbit/s STM–1 synchronouselectrical stream towards the aggregate.

The type of tributary required is software selectable. The Tributary units are interfaced with the externalsource through switch module units (see description further on).

The Card Controller sub–unit belongs to this unit and also manages it.

The operating description is split into:

• Transmission• Reception• Card Controller• Power supply, Remote Inventory

The above are now defined as follows.

TRANSMISSION

The description that follows explains the operations carried out to forward the 140 Mbit/s or 155 Mbit/sRx external signal to the Aggregates via the Matrices.

The CMI–IN input signal accesses the Physical Interface (P.I.) where the following functions are carriedout:

• G.703 interface compliant operations• extraction of the incoming tributary clock,• generation of the LOS N alarm should the signal fail.

The 155 Mbit/s TRIB. clock is sent to the CRU and the CMI/NRZ decoding is carried out.

The EN 140/155 command selects either the 140 Mbit/s or 155 Mbit/s signal to enable either of the tworoutes.

140 Mbit/s

The circuits involved are:

• LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)The 140 Mbit/s plesiochronous stream is inserted in a C4 container to be adapted so as to betransported into the synchronous network.

• HPT (Higher order Path Termination)The Virtual Container (VC4) is formatted.The VC4 is structured so that its octets are distributed within a 125 msec. interval (i.e., oneSTM–1 period), and consists of the C4 container and POH. The latter containing nine octetsequally distributed within the frame. Figure 83. on page 202 depicts the structure of a VC4 andof the POH bytes: J1, B3. C2, G1, F2, H4, Z3–Z5.Bytes F2, Z3–Z5 contained in the OH–BUSdedicated stream are utilized by the AUX unit. The OH–BUS can be accessed through theFUTURE–BUS interface.

• PG (SA) Pointer Generator of the Section Adaptation.A fixed pointer value is inserted in the AUOH to structure the AU4 signal.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

199

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

155 Mbit/s

Only VC4 structured streams are managed.The circuits involved are:

• RST (Regenerator Section termination)terminates the first three rows of the SOH extracting data from it.

• MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)terminates the last five rows of the SOH extracting data from it.

Figure 84. on page 203 illustrates the SOH structure and the bytes making it up.

Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1–Z2 and the spare bytes are utilized by the AUX unit on the OH–BUS dedicatedstream through the FUTURE BUS unit that gives it a logical tension termination .

• SA (Section Adaptation)It synchronizes the Rx timing signal with the internal one received from the selected CRU unit.Adaptation is carried out by the AU pointer.

• B3 parity control on the VC4’s POH for performance monitoring operations.

At this point the selected signal is sent to the output (towards the Aggregates via the Matrices) split overa 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus.

RECEPTION

The signal is received from the Aggregate units over the 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus through the Matrices.The signal is then managed and forwarded towards the Tributary outputs.

The signal is first of all managed by:

• MSP (Multiplex Section Protection)Selects one of the two signals Main or Spare incoming fromEAST (WEST) side Aggregate. Choice is made between the Main or Spare of the same sideAggregate.

• SNCP (Path Protection Switching)Protects the ring network configured streams (path) by means of the alarm detected AIS statusand B3 Parity Control (East or West side selection). Choice is made between the Main or Sparepath coming from the opposite side Aggregate.

Hence one of the two following signals can be accessed:

140 Mbit/s

The circuits concerned are:

• HPT (Higher order Path TerminationExtracts the POH bytes from the VC4 structure and manages them accordingly(see Figure 83. on page 202).Bytes F2, Z3–Z5 are sent to the AUX unit over an OH–BUS dedicated stream through theFUTURE BUS interface.

• LPA (Lower order Path Adaptation)Restructures the 140 Mbit/s Tributary by extracting it from Container C4.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

200

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

155 Mbit/s

• MST (Multiplexer Section Termination)The bytes of the last five rows of the SOH are inserted.

• RST (Regenerator Section termination)The bytes of the first three rows of the SOH are inserted.

Figure 84. on page 203 illustrates the bytes making up the SOH structure.Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1, Z2 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OH–BUS dedicated stream.At this point one of the two signals is selected from the two received paths.The circuitry downstream NRZ/CMI encode, and the Physical Interface (P.I.) executes the G.703 Interfacecompliant operations.Afterwards signal CMI–OUT is forwarded to the Tributary output.

OH BUS

In addition to the above OHBUS streams, on which information is exchanged for data and speechchannels, there is another OHBUS stream for the communication of the K1, K2, S bytes between theaggregates and tributaries.S is a serial stream carrying the external alarm criteria. These bytes are utilized for switching operations.The OHBUS’s are interfaced through the FUTURE BUS DRIVER.Bidirectional switching is not operative in this release.

Card Controller

The following are the main functions carried out by the Card Controller sub–unit:

Dialog with the Equipment Controller unitData on setting options, alarms, actions taken, performance, etc., is exchanged through the LIECBand NIECB connections thereby permitting the Equipment Controller to manage the operations assignedto it.

Internal dialog for alarms, configuration, performanceThis type of dialog permits to transmit/receive to/from the unit the software setting options stored throughthe E2PROM. From the unit are received the alarm and performance criteria. The alarms due to unitfailures light up the red LED (1) (LEDN command), and generates the COSW signal which, added to theEXT ALM (unit external alarms) and to the power supply alarm PW ALM, generate the OSW switchingcommand.LED (2) ON means that the unit is working (WK CH).

Unit type acknowledgementThe Card Controller acknowledges the unit on which it is mounted through signals CTYPE 0–3.

Byte J1 interfaceIt transmits/receives data on byte J1 (VC4 path trace; the digital data structure recurs with a 64 STM –1frame periodicity).Not operative in this release.

Loop ManagementDrives two unit loops:LPT = Equipment loopback (local), permits to transmit, towards the Tx side, the signal received from the aggregatesLPM = Line loopback (remote), permits to transmit, towards the tributary, the signal received from theTributary Line.It is possible to activate them via software .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

201

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

DCC ManagementInternally interfaces the 192 Kbit/s (D1–D3) and 576 Kbit/s (D4–D12) channels of the SOH’s TMN streamwhenever managed by the Equipment Controller unit.

140/155Selects the type of tributary.

CRU SelectionIt selects the CRU (Clock Reference Unit) containing the synch. and timing signals to extract as referencefor the unit involved.The alarms (ISWCA, ISWCB) received from the two units are processed to enable selection.

Physical position acknowledgementThe physical position of the unit inside the subrack is acknowledged by the Card Controller through signalsID0–4.

MSP protection

This function permits to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signal received from aggregates:WEST MAIN or WEST SPARE. The reciprocal operation (Prot EAST command) is carried out onaggregates EAST.

Selection (performed during the turn–on phase) and switching operations (performed during the operatingphase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. Thesecriteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.When two Full Matrix are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signal ISW MA, MB fromFull Matrix are used.


This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from othertributaries.This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para 3.1.5.2 ”EPS for electrical tributaries” on page 119.



+5.3V ± 3%–5.5V ± 3%

+12.1V ± 3%

The PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunctions or voltage failure.

The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes, series, dateof construction).This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit whichutilizes it for the Remote Inventory.The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directly connected tothe Equipment Controller.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

202

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

J1B3C2

G1F2H4

Z3

Z4Z5

C–4

VC–4

261 bytes

orVC4 PAYLOAD

POH OF VC–4

• J1 (path trace) utilized to transmit in a cyclic mode a 64–octet configuration in order to checkthe connection continuity. Not operative in this release.

• B3 resulting from the BIP–8 performed on the previous VC–4, before the scrambler.

• C2 (signal label) = the configurations are utilized to indicate if VC–4 is equipped or not or thepayload structure.

• G1 (path status) utilized to transmit information on the link status to the remote terminal.

– four bits contain the FEBE Tx (Far End Block Error) signal, where the decimal numbers0–8 indicate the number of violations of BIP–8 (the illegal values 9 to 15 indicate absenceof errors);

– one bit to carry the FERF Tx alarm signal and three unused bits

• F2, utilized for the transmission of one channel coming from the AUX unit.

• H4, multiframe indicator (utilized for the payloads structured through TUG) which indicates thesubframe of each multiframe.

• Z3–Z5 can be accessed via AUX board interface.

Figure 83. VC–4 Structure and POH byte contents

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

203

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

9 COLUMNS (Bytes)

RSOH

A1

B1

D1

A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0

F1

D3

E1

D2

AU POINTERS

B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D6

D9

D12

E2

D5

D8

D11

D4

D7

D10

Z2Z2Z1Z1S1 M1

MSOH

261 COLUMNS (bytes)

9 ROWS

PAYLOAD STM–1

• the 6 octets of type A1 = 11110110 and A2 = 00101000 constitute the alignment word (48 digits)• C1 indicates the STM–1 Tributary inside an STM–N signal.• octet B1, resulting from the BIP–8 procedure performed on the previous frame at the scrambler

output, is inserted into the current frame before scrambling. Not operative.Octet B1 is utilized to support maintenance of the radio regenerator section (performancemonitoring).

• The three B2 octets, resulting from the BIP–24 encoding performed on the previous framewithout the first three rows of SOH, are inserted into the current frame before scrambling; theyare not estimated again in the repeaters because they are utilized to estimate the BER betweenmultiplexer.

• E1 and E2 are utilized for service telephone communication between regenerators (E1) andbetween muldex and muldex (E2).

• D1–D3 are utilized as a 192Kbit/s channel for data communication (DCC=Data CommunicationChannel) between Regenerators in the TMN network. To support interworking with radioregenerator equipment (RRA).

• D4–D12 are utilized as a 576Kbit/s channel for data communication (DCC) betweenmultiplexers in the TMN network.

• F1 is utilized to transmit a data or Voice channel received from AUX unit.• K1 and K2 are utilized for MS Linear Trail Protection signalling channel. The last four K2 bits

are used like MS–RDI multiplex section remote indication (FERF) and AIS alarms between the multiplexers.

• S1 indicates synchronism status.• Z1 and Z2 are spare bytes for function not yet defined• M1 byte, indicates MS–REI Far–end Block Errors (FEBE) for the multiplex section.• X Byte reserved for national use.• Bytes are reserved for future international standards, additional national use ect.• ∆ is a Media Dependent byte (only two are accessible). Not operative.• • Bytes are not scrambled (like the whole 1ts row)

Figure 84. STM–1 structure and SOH byte contents

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

204

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

+12

V

+5V –5V

FU

SE

S

+12

.1V

–5.5

V

+5.

3V

PW

ALM

CKB

CKA

SYNCB

SYNCA

CK

SYNC

CR

US

ELE

CT

ION

CO

MM

UN

ICA

TIO

N

ISWCAN

PH

YS

ICA

L

UN

IT T

YP

E14

0/15

5D

CCD

4–D

12:

ISWCBN

ID0–4

ISW1,2EN

CR

UA

GG

R.

J1

CM

I–IN

PI

G.7

03

CM

I

NR

Z

CLO

CK

FU

TU

RE

B

US

DR

IVE

R

RE

MO

TE

CR

U

LOO

P

EP

S

ISW1,2WN

PR

OT

E

PR

OT

W

EA

ST

14 /

EA

ST

24 /

WE

AS

T 1

4 /

WE

AS

T 2

4 /

INT

ER

NA

L

140/

155

Mbi

t/s

ÉÉÉ

LOS

N

LOO

P L

LPT

LOO

P 1

40

140

Mbt

/s

LPA

INS

ER

TIN

TO

C4

HP

TV

C4

SH

AP

ING

PG

(SA

)

OH

–BU

S

OH

–BU

SM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

RS

TR

–SO

HT

ER

MIN

AT

ION

MS

T

J1,B

3,C

2F

2,Z

3,Z

5

B2,

K2.

D4–

D12

B1,

D1–

D3

E1,

F1

:

LPT

LOO

P 1

55

SA

AU

SY

NC

HR

ON

IZA

TIO

N

PO

HB

3C

HE

CK

EN

140

/155

155

Mbi

t/sM

–SO

HT

ER

MIN

AT

ION

B3,

K2

INV

EN

TO

RY

TOMATRIX

K1,

K2,

S

CM

I–O

UT

PI

G.7

03

CM

I

NR

Z

EA

ST

14 /

EA

ST

24 /

WE

AS

T 1

4 /

WE

AS

T 2

4 /

140/

155

Mbi

t/s

LPA

140M

bit/s

RIC

ON

ST

RU

CT

ION

HP

T

PP

S

RS

TR

–SO

HIN

SE

RT

MS

TM

–SO

HIN

SE

RT

ÉÉÉ

VC

X0

140/

155

EN

140

/155

CK

L

CK

LOO

P L

EN

140

/155

LPM

PO

HE

XT

RA

CT

ION

F2,

Z3+

Z5

B3,

J1,C

2,G

1

K2

D4–

D12

E2,

D4–

D12

B1,

D1+

D3

140M

bit/s

LOO

P15

5M

PS

MP

S

PR

OT

E

PR

OT

W

AC

KN

OW

LEA

GM

EN

T

WIT

HC

ON

TR

OLL

ER

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

PO

SIT

ION

AC

KN

OW

LEA

GM

EN

T

SE

LEC

TIO

NM

AN

AG

EM

EN

TM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

TR

IBU

TAR

YM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

BY

TE

J1

INT

ER

FAC

ED

IALO

G F

OR

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

EC

ON

FIG

UU

RA

TIO

NA

LAR

MS

MS

PP

RO

TE

CT

ION

SM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

E

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉC

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

ALA

RM

SLP

TLP

MD

1–D

3:

EN

140

/155

CT

YP

E0–

3:

LIECBNIECB

EQ

CO

NT

R.

:

ISWT TR

IBS

ISW MA,MB FU

LLM

AT

RIX

> =11

LDN

PW

ALM

EX

TALM

2

WK

CK

CO

SW

OS

W

FROMMATRIX

TO

CA

RE

M

ALL

UN

ITS

Figure 85. Block diagram: 140/STM–1 Switch tributary

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

205

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.8 Optical STM1 Tributary units

3.2.8.1 S–1.1 and L–1.1 Optical Tributary Unit


This description is applicable to all optical STM1 tributary unit of this release:

• S–1.1 TRIB. FC

• L–1.1 TRIB. FC

• L–1.2 TRIB. FC

L and S letters define the Long or Short distance unit. FC and SC denote the type of connectors used.

The STM–1 Tributary unit acts as a bidirectional interface between the STM–1 optical signal and thesignals received from the WEST or EAST Aggregate units via the Matrix unit.

On the Rx side, the unit performs the functions described in ITU–T Rec.G783 thus inserting the 38Mbit/ssignals received from the Matrix units into the STM–1 synchronous tributary frame to be transmitted to theoptical fiber line.

The reciprocal operations are carried out on the Tx side, i.e., convert the optical signal into an electricalone, and transmit the 38 Mbit/s signal obtained towards the Matrix Units.

Synchronous streams containing VC4, VC3 or VC12 can be managed through the Full Matrix unit.

The SNCP protection on VC4 streams is not available with this unit, using Connection Card unit.

The regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which signal any malfunctions tothe Card Controller sub–unit. The latter will inform the ”Equipment Controller” unit through LEDs and otherindications.

The description of the unit operation is subdivided as follows:

• Reception

• Transmission

• Card Controller


All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

206

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Reception

The unit receives:

• the informative data (DTiW and DTiE) structured as 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus from the Matrix unit• the CKA and CKB 38.88Mbit/s clocks with the relative 2kHz SYNCA and SYNCB synch. signals

from the ”Clock Reference” units

The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the general unit timing signals,depends on the operating status of the two CRU’s.The selection is performed through a command received from the Card Controller subunit.

The received data is then processed as specified by ITU–T Rec. G.783.As primary condition, this data is inserted in the assigned positions inside VC4 pay–load (LPC Lower orderpath connection). Afterwards the HPT operation (Higher order path termination) structures the higherorder virtual container VC–4 so as to distribute its octets within a time interval of 125msec. whichcorresponds to a one STM –1 frame period.The VC–4 consists of a VC4 payload and a POH which in turn consists of nine octets equally distributedwithin the structure. Figure 83. on page 202 shows the structure of a VC–4 and the J1, B3, C2, G1, F2, H4,Z3–Z5 bytes of the VC–4’s POH.

Bytes F2, Z3–Z5 are utilized by the AUX unit though the OH–BUS dedicated stream accessible throughthe Futurebus unit.

Through the SA (Section Adaptation) operation, the line transmission is synchronized to the stream received from the Aggregate units via the Matrix. This synchronization is obtained by adding the AUOHto the VC–4 structure.

SOH bytes are added to complete the STM–1 frame structure. This phase of the procedure is enabledby the MST operation (Multiplexer Section Termination) to terminate the last 5 rows of SOH, and throughthe RST operation (Regenerator Section Termination) to terminate the first 3 rows.Figure 84. on page 203 shows the SOH structure and the description of the bytes making it up as well asthe STM–1 structure.

Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1, Z2 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OHBUS dedicated stream through theFUTURE BUS Interface.

The STM1 outgoing signal is parallel–series converted to obtain a 155.52Mbit/s digital stream and relativesynchronism signal (D155T and CK155T). To this concern the VCXO generates a 155.52MHz clockphase–locked to the reference clock (PLL) received from the CRU.

Loops LPM (line side) and LPT (station) are possible during the turn–on and maintenance phases.

The two loops are processed by the Card Controller.

The STM–1 signal is then converted by the Tx optical module as stated by ITU–T Rec. G.957requirements.This signal is transmitted to the line through connector (5) and it is detailed in ”Chapter 4 TechnicalSpecification” on page 279.The unit also supplies the ALS criteria, as defined by ITU–T Rec.G.958, and can preset the three differentoptical protection algorithms.The following commands reset the optical protection:

• manual, LASER ON for 2 seconds every time that push–button (3) is pressed• automatic, LASER ON for 2 secs every 180 secs.• manual for test, LASER ON for 90 secs. every time that push–button (3) is pressed for more

than 12 secs.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

207

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Command HIGHREFL is used as the LOS alarm (loss of pulses received from the optical receiver) for theoptical protection over the bidirectional fiber ALS can be excluded through strapping.

Moreover the Tx optical module processes the following alarms:

LDFAIL failure inside the optical transmitter.It intervenes when the Tx power decreases (3dB).

LDDEG LD degradation. It intervenes when the bias current of the optical componentincreases vs. the initial value (50%).

MITL loss of pulses transmitted from the LASER owing to causes external to thetransmitter (e.g. interruption of data set to ”0”, intervention of the optical protectionecc.)

All the alarms are collected by the Card Controller.

Transmission

The unit receives the 155Mbit/s signal from the optical fiber line (connector (3)) .

The Rx optical module uses the APD photodiode to regenerate and convert the signal into an electricalNRZ signal (D155R) with the relative CK155R synchronism.

The Rx optical module processes the LOS alarm, indicating loss of pulses on the Rx optical fiber line, usedon the optical protection circuit.

The 155Mbit/s clocks and data reach the circuit which 1:4 series–parallel converts and then supplies a38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus (D38R) with relative synchronism (CK38R). The CK38R synchronism is sent tothe STX1–PR gate–array and to the two CRU units where it is utilized as an external reference clock.The STX1–PR gate–array uses the D38R data to perform the reciprocal operations as described byITU–T Rec. G783.

The SOH bytes are extracted from the descrambled 38.88Mbit/s signals through RST (RegeneratorSection Termination) and MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) operations.

The RST operation extracts and checks the first 3 rows of SOH:

• Bytes A1 and A2; Alignment word. Loss of alignment generates LOF alarm• Byte B1; check and BIP8 parity counting• Bytes D1–D3; termination towards the Card Controller for data channels• Bytes E1, F1, and any remaining bytes; termination towards the OHBUS

The MST operation extracts and checks the last 5 rows of SOH:

• byte B2; check and BIP24 parity counting. The presence of errors generates the SD (SignalDegrade) or Excessive BER alarms;

• Bytes K1, K2; APS, MS–AIS and MS–FERF signalling;• Bytes D4–D12; termination towards the Card Controller TMN;• termination of the E2, Z1, Z2 bytes and other bytes towards the OHBUS

At this point the SA operation (Section Adaptation) synchronizes the CK38R, (38kHz clock) and CK(internal clock timing signals). Adaptation occurs through AUOH pointer justification.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

208

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The HPT circuit (Higher Order Path Termination) extracts the POH bytes from the VC4 structure.

• J1 is extracted to check connection continuity. Not operative in this release.• B3 is compared with the BIP8 parity estimated on the previous VC–4, and any detected errors

are sent to the Card Controller• C2 is extracted to check the VC–4 configuration• the FEBE indication is extracted from the first half of byte G1, while the FERF indication is

contained in another digit; both indications are sent to the Card Controller

All these bytes and all the bytes that have not been mentioned are sent to the Card Controller of the unitor to the AUX/EOW unit (F2 Byte).

After having extracted the POH bytes, the HPA (Higher Order Path Adaptation) adapts the line multiframewith the internal multiframe. Adaptation occurs by transferring the AU pointer movement to the TU pointershoused in VC4 payload. The last operation performed on the Rx side concerns LPC(Lower Order PathConnection). The LPC operation permits to route the TU’s contained in the STM1 frame. The DRiE andDRiW data will be sent to the EAST and WEST Aggregate units via the Matrix unit. All the signals arestructured as a 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus with the synchronism reference established by the selected CRU.

Card Controller

The Card Controller carries out the following main functions:

CRU selection

This interface selects the CRU (Clock Reference Unit) from which the synchronism and timing signals tobe used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection criteria, this interfaceprocesses the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:



Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance

This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive towards the unit the software setting options stored throughthe EEPROM. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.

All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and generate the COSW signalwhich, added to the EXT ALM (unit external alarms) generates the OSWi switching criteria to send to allthe equipment units.


Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc., is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unitthrough the LIECB and NIECB connections.




Through the CTYPE 0–3 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

209

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Byte J1 interface

It transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC4. The data’s format is repetitiveand has a 64 STM–1 frame periodicity.Not operative in this release.

DCC byte interface

It transmits (and receives) the DCC bytes D1–D3 and D4–D12 towards (from) the processing circuits ofbytes SOH.

LPM/LPT Processing

Remote (station side) and Local looping (line side) can be performed through the LPM/LPT signals.LPT = Equipment loopback (local), permits to transmit, towards the Tx side, the signal received from the aggregatesLPM = Line loopback (remote), permits to transmit, towards the tributary, the signal received from the

Trib. Line.It is possible to activate them via software .

MSP/APS protection

This function allows for APS Aggregate to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signal, Mainor Spare, received from aggregates WEST. The reciprocal operation (Prot EAST command) is carried outon aggregates EAST.

Selection (during the turn–on phase) and switching operations (during the operating phase) areprocessed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. These criteria indicatethe presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.When two Full Matrix are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signals ISW MA, MBfrom Full Matrix are used.The APS is described in para 3.1.5.2 ”Simplified Linear APS” on page 119.

This function is used for EPS Tributary protection utilizing the ISWT command received from othertributaries.This circuit also operates with the OSW command. The EPS is described in para 3.1.5.2 ”EPS forelectrical tributaries” on page 119.



+5.3V 3%–5.5V 3%

+12.1V 3%


The electrical ground and chassis ground are strap–connected.The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) which stores the unit inventory data (codes, series,date of construction).This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit whichutilizes it for the Remote Inventory.The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directly connected tothe Equipment Controller.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

210

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

G

155.

52M

Hz

+12

V

+5V –5V

PO

WA

LIM

FU

SE

S

+12

.1V

–5.5

V

+5.

3V

PW

ALM

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

MS

P

4D

T1E

i/

CAREM

CKB

CKA

SYNCB

SYNCA

CK

SYNCE

Q. C

ON

TR

.

CR

US

ELE

CT

ION

PH

YS

ICA

LP

OS

ITIO

NA

CK

NO

WLE

D

ISWCAND

IALO

G W

ITH

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R E

SC

T U

NIT

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

LPM

/LP

TM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

BY

TE

J1

BY

TE

DC

C

INT

ER

FAC

E

1

LPM

CT

YP

E 0

– 3:

INT

ER

NA

L

ISWCBN

ID 0 – 4:

LIECBNIECB

CR

UE

Q. C

ON

TR

.T

O A

LL

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

4D

T2E

i/ 4

DT

1Wi / 4

DT

2Wi /

FR

OM

MA

TR

IX

PO

H T

XP

RO

CE

SS

ING

B3

J1

C2

G1

H4P

OH

TX

FU

TU

RE

BU

SD

RIV

ER

HO

BU

SA

UX

OH

BU

SM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

PO

H R

XP

RO

CE

SS

ING

B3

J1

C2

G1

LAS

T F

IVE

SO

H (

MS

T)

RO

WS

INS

ER

TIO

N

FIR

ST

TH

RE

ES

OH

(R

ST

)R

OW

SIN

SE

RT

ION

P L L

CK

D15

5T

CK

155T

TX

155M

bit/s

TU

RO

UT

ING

(LP

C)

4D

R1E

i / 4D

R2E

i / 4D

R1W

i / 4D

R2W

i /

TO

MA

TR

IX

PO

HE

XT

RA

CT

ION

(HP

T)

(SA

)T

IMIN

GS

YN

CH

.

4 /S

/PC

ON

VE

RS

ION

D15

5R

CK

155R

RX

155M

bit/s

AU

/TU

PO

INT

ER

SS

YN

CH

.(H

PA

)

PO

HR

X

AU

4F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(SA

)

VC

4F

OR

MA

TT

ING

(HP

T)

AU

OH

GE

NE

RA

TIO

IN

SO

H T

XM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

B2

B1

K1,

K2

A1–

A2

D1–

D3

D4–

D12

: :

LAS

T F

IVE

SO

H (

MS

T)

RO

WS

EX

TR

AC

TIO

N

FIR

ST

TH

RE

ES

OH

(R

ST

)R

OW

SE

XT

RA

CT

ION

MIT

L

D38

R

SO

H R

XM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

B2

B1

K1,

K2

A1–

A2

D1–

D3

D4–

D12

: :

CK

CK

38R

LPT

LPM

LPT

UN

IT T

YP

EA

CK

NO

WLE

DIN

TE

RFA

CE

DIA

LOG

FO

RA

LAR

MS

ÙC

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

SP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

J1D

1–D

3:

D1–

D12

:

TH

E U

NIT

SMP

S /A

PS

5 4

MS

P

TU

RO

UT

ING

(LP

C)

E WP

PS

OP

TIC

AL

MO

DU

LE

LDD

EG

LDFA

IL

P /

SC

ON

VE

RS

ION

4 /

OP

TIC

AL

MO

DU

LE

OP

TIC

AL

PR

OT

EC

TIO

NM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

ALS

LDS

SH

UT

HIG

HR

EF

L

LOS

3

CR

U

> =1

EX

T A

LM

COSWi

PR

OT

EC

TIO

NM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

OS

W

ISWT

ISW MA,MB

ISW1,2WISW1,2E

TR

IBS

.F

ULL

MA

TR

IXA

GG

.

PR

OT

EP

RO

TW

ALA

RM

S

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

E

Figure 86. Block diagram: Optical Trib.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

211

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.8.2 S–1.1 and L–1.1 Optical Tributary 600


This description is applicable to the following optical STM1 tributary unit:

• S–1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SC

• L–1.1 TRIB. 600 FC/SC

• L–1.2 TRIB. 600 FC

L and S letters define the Long or Short distance unit. FC and SC denote the type of connectors used.

The STM–1 Tributary unit acts as a bidirectional interface between the STM–1 optical signal and thesignals received from the WEST or EAST Aggregate units via the Matrix unit.

On the Rx side, the unit performs the functions described in ITU–T Rec. G783 to insert the 38Mbit/ssignals, received from the Matrix units, into the STM–1 synchronous tributary frame to transmit to theoptical fiber line.

The reciprocal operations are carried out on the Tx side, i.e., convert the optical signal into an electricalone, and transmit the 38 Mbit/s signal obtained towards the Matrix Units.

This unit allows SNCP protection on VC4 stream also with Connection Card Unit.

All levels of VC are managed by means of the Full Matrix Unit.

In this unit LPC circuit even present are not utilised.

The regular operation of the unit is controlled through alarm detectors which signal any malfunctions tothe Card Controller sub–unit which will signal it through LEDs and other indications to the ”EquipmentController” unit.

Unit operation is subdivided into:

• Reception

• Transmission

• Card Controller


All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

212

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Reception

The unit receives:

• the informative data (DTiW and DTiE), structured as 38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus, from the Matrixunit

• the CKA and CKB 38.88Mbit/s clocks and relative 2kHz SYNCA and SYNCB synch. signalsfrom the ”Clock Reference” units

The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the general unit timing signals,depends on the operating status of the two CRU’s and is performed through a command received fromthe Card Controller subunit.

The received data is then processed as specified by ITU–T Rec. G.783.

The Aggregate and Matrix units are logically connected through the four ”backpanel” physical interfaces.The Multiplex Section Protection module (MSP) protects the streams extracted from the aggregates.Path Protection Switching (SNCP) protects the ring–network configured streams extracted from theAggregates through the detection of the Path–AIS and parity control (B3).

Bytes F2, Z3–Z5 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OH–BUS dedicated stream through the Futurebusinterface.

Through the SA (Section Adaptation) operation the line transmission is synchronized to the streamreceived from the Aggregate units via the Matrix. Synchronization is obtained through the AUOH’s pointeron the AU–4 structure.

SOH bytes are added to complete the STM–1 frame structure. This phase of the procedure is enabled bythe MST operation (Multiplexer Section Termination) to terminate the last 5 rows of SOH, and through theRST operation (Regenerator Section Termination) to terminate the first 3 rows. Figure 84. on page 203shows the SOH structure and the description of the bytes making it up as well as the STM–1 structure.

The MST inserts the following overhead bytes:

• D4/D12 incoming from the Card Controller or from the OH–BUS D (Clear channel)

• E2 incoming from the OH–BUS S/P

• B2 locally calculated

• third byte Z2, contains the number of B2 parity errors detected on the Tx side

• first byte Z1, whose less significative nibble contains the timing marker data processed by theCard Controller

The RST realizes the scrambler, adds the alignment word and inserts:

• the locally calculated B1 parity

• bytes E1 and F1 coming from the OH–BUS S/P

• bytes D1/D3 coming from the Card Controller

Bytes E1, E2, F1, Z1, Z2 are utilized by the AUX unit on the OHBUS dedicated stream through theFUTURE BUS Interface.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

213

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The STM1 outgoing signal is parallel–series converted to obtain a 155.52 Mbit/s digital stream and relativesynchronism signal (D155T and CK155T). To this purpose the VCXO generates a 155.52MHz clockphase–locked to the reference clock (PLL) received from the CRU.

Loops LPM (line side) and LPT (station side) are performed during the turn–on and maintenance phases.

The two loops are processed by the Card Controller.

The STM–1 signal is then converted by the Tx optical module as stated by ITU–T Rec. G.957.This signal is transmitted to the line through connector (5) and its characteristics are detailed in Chapter4 ”Technical Specifications” on page 279 .

The unit also supplies the ALS criteria, as defined by ITU–T Rec.G.958, and can preset the three differentoptical protection algorithms.

The following commands reset the optical protection:

• manual, LASER ON for 2 seconds everytime that push–button (3) is pushed

• automatic, LASER ON for 2 secs every 180 secs.

• manual for test, LASER ON for 90 secs. everytime that push–button (3) is pushed for more than12 secs.

Command HIGHREFL is used as the LOS alarm (loss of pulses received from the optical receiver) for theoptical protection over the bidirectional fiber.ALS can be excluded through strapping.

Moreover the Tx optical module processes the following alarms:

LDFAIL failure inside the optical transmitter.It intervenes when the Tx power decreases (3dB).

LDDEG LD degradation. It intervenes when the bias current of the optical component increasesvs. the initial value (50%).

MITL loss of pulses transmitted from the LASER owing to causes external to the transmitter(e.g. interruption of data set to ”0”, intervention of the optical protection ecc.)

All the alarms are collected by the Card Controller.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

214

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Transmission

The unit receives the 155Mbit/s NRZ signal from the optical fiber line (connector (3) ).

The Rx optical module uses the APD photodiode to regenerate and convert the signal into an electricalNRZ signal (D155R) with relative CK155R synchronism.

The Rx optical module processes the LOS alarm, indicating loss of pulses on the Rx optical fiber line, usedon the optical protection circuit.

The 155Mbit/s clock and data reach the circuit which 1:4 series–parallel converts and supplies a38.88Mbit/s 4–wire bus (D38R) with relative synchronism (CK38R). The CK38R synchronism is sent tothe STX1–PR gate–array and to the two CRU units where it is utilized as external reference clock.The STX1–PR gate–array uses the D38R data to perform the reciprocal operations as described byITU–T Rec. G783.

The SOH bytes are extracted from the descrambled 38.88Mbit/s signals through RST (RegeneratorSection Termination) and MST (Multiplexer Section Termination) operations.

The RST operation extracts and checks the first 3 rows of SOH:

• Bytes A1 and A2; Alignment word. Loss of alignment generates LOF alarm

• Byte B1; check and BIP8 parity counting

• Bytes D1–D3; termination towards the Card Controller for data channels

• Bytes E1, F1, and any remaining bytes; termination towards the OHBUS

The MST operation extracts and checks the last 5 rows of SOH:

• byte B2; check and BIP24 parity counting. The presence of errors generates the SD (SignalDegrade) or Excessive BER alarms;

• Bytes K1, K2; APS, MS–AIS and MS–FERF signalling;

• Bytes D4–D12; termination towards the Card Controller TMN;

• termination of the E2, Z1. Z2 bytes and other bytes towards the OHBUS

At this point, the SA operation (Section Adaptation) synchronizes the CK38R, (38kHz clock) and CK(internal clock timing signals). Adaptation occurs through AUOH pointer justification.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

215

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Card Controller

The Card Controller carries out the following main functions:

CRU selection

This interface selects the CRU, Main or Spare (Clock Reference Unit) from which the synchronism andtiming signals to be used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selection criteria,this interface processes the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:



Internal dialog for alarms, configuration and performance

This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive towards the unit the software setting options stored throughthe EEPROM. The alarms and performance criteria are received from the unit.

All the internal unit alarms are collected to activate the red alarm LED (1) and generate the COSW signalwhich, added to the EXT ALM (unit external alarms), generate the OSWi switching criteria to send to allthe equipment units.


Information on presettings, criteria, reset, alarms etc., is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unitthrough the LIECB and NIECB connections.




Through the CTYPE 0–3 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.

DCC byte interface

This interface transmits (and receives) the DCC bytes D1–D3 and D4–D12 towards (from) the processingcircuits of bytes SOH.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

216

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

LPM/LPT Processing

Remote (station side) and Local (line side) looping is performed through the LPM/LPT signals.

LPT = Equipment loopback (local), permits to transmit, towards the Tx side, the signal received from the aggregatesLPM = Line loopback (remote), permits to transmit, towards the tributary, the signal received from the

Trib. Line.

It is possible to activate them via software .

MSP/APS protection

This function allows for the APS Aggregate, to select (PROT WEST commands) one of the two signalreceived from aggregates WEST, Main or Spare. The reciprocal operation (Prot EAST command) iscarried out on aggregates EAST.

Selection (performed during the turn–on phase) and switching operations (performed during the operatingphase) are processed by analyzing the ISW switch criteria received from the aggregate units. These criteria indicate the presence of a failure on the unit or the detection of alarms along the fiber line.When two Full Matrix units are used, this protection acts as EPS between these units. Signals ISW MA,MB from Full Matrix are used.

The APS Tributary protection utilizes the ISWT command received from other tributaries.The ISWT also operates with the previously defined OSW command. The APS is described in para 3.1.5.2 ”Simplified Linear APS” on page 119.

On a 1+1 configured STM–1 Tributary network (APS) the green LED (2) on the front panel indicates thatthe unit is operating. Its activation is handled by the Card Controller.



+5.3V 3%

–5.5V 3%

+12.1V 3%






All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

217

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

G

155.

52M

Hz

+12

V

+5V –5V

PO

WA

LIM

FU

SE

S

+12

.1V

–5.5

V

+5.

3V

PW

ALM

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

MS

P

4D

T1E

i/

CAREM

CKB

CKA

SYNCB

SYNCA

CK

SYNC

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

CR

US

ELE

CT

ION

PH

YS

ICA

LP

OS

ITIO

NA

CK

NO

WLE

D

ISWCAN

DIA

LOG

WIT

HE

QU

IPM

EN

TC

ON

TR

OLL

ER

ES

CT

UN

IT

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

LPM

/LP

TM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

BY

TE

J1

BY

TE

DC

C

INT

ER

FAC

E

2LP

MC

TY

PE

0 –

3:

INT

ER

NA

L

ISWCBN

ID 0 – 4:

LIECBNIECB

CR

UE

Q. C

ON

TR

.T

O A

LL

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

4D

T2E

i/ 4

DT

1Wi / 4

DT

2Wi /

FR

OM

MA

TR

IX

FU

TU

RE

BU

SD

RIV

ER

HO

BU

SA

UX

OH

BU

SM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

FIR

ST

TH

RE

ES

OH

(R

ST

)R

OW

SIN

SE

RT

ION

P L L

CK

D15

5T

CK

155T

TX

155M

bit/s

75oh

m

4D

R1E

i / 4D

R2E

i / 4D

R1W

i / 4D

R2W

i /

TO

MA

TR

IX

4 /S

/PC

ON

VE

RS

ION

D15

5R

CK

155R

RX

155M

bit/s

(SA

)

LAS

T F

IVE

SO

H T

XM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

B2

B1

K1,

K2

A1–

A2

D1–

D3

D4–

D12

: :

MIT

L

D38

R

SO

H R

XM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

B2

B1

K1,

K2

A1–

A2

D1–

D3

D4–

D12

: :

CK

38R

LPT

LPM

LPT

UN

IT T

YP

EA

CK

NO

WLE

DIN

TE

RFA

CE

DIA

LOG

FO

RA

LAR

MS

ÙC

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

SP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

J1D

1–D

3:

D1–

D12

:

TH

E U

NIT

SMP

S /A

PS

5 4

MS

P

E WP

PS

OP

TIC

AL

MO

DU

LE

LDD

EG

LDFA

IL

P /

SC

ON

VE

RS

ION

4 /

OP

TIC

AL

MO

DU

LE

OP

TIC

AL

PR

OT

EC

TIO

NM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

ALS

LDS

SH

UT

HIG

HR

EF

L

LOS

3

CR

U

> =1

EX

T A

LM

COSWi

PR

OT

EC

TIO

NM

AN

AG

EM

EN

T

OS

W

ISWT

ISW MA,MB

ISW1,2WISW1,2E

TR

IBS

.F

ULL

MA

TR

IXA

GG

.

PR

OT

EP

RO

TW

ALA

RM

S

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

E

PR

OT

E

MS

P

MS

P

P–A

IS–E

PR

OT

WP

–AIS

–W

SO

H (

MS

T)

RO

WS

INS

ER

TIO

N

FIR

ST

TH

RE

ES

OH

(R

ST

)R

OW

SIN

SE

RT

ION

MA

TC

HIN

G

TIM

ING

SY

NC

H

LAS

T F

IVE

SO

H (

MS

T)

RO

WS

EX

TR

AC

TIO

N

FIR

ST

TH

RE

ES

OH

(R

ST

)R

OW

SE

XT

RA

CT

ION

E2

E1

Z1,

Z2

F1

CK

EQ

.C

ON

TR

.

1

Figure 87. Block diagram: Optical Trib. S/L–1.1 600 FC/SC

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

218

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.9 Connection Card unit

This unit physically connects the signals of 10 tributaries max. (38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus each) to theSTM–4/STM–16 main WEST/EAST aggregates.

An additional Connection Card must be provided to perform all the connections. This one is not the Spareof the former. In order to perform the connections towards the Aggregates, both Connection Card Unitsare required.

This unit allows the use of the 140/STM1 SWITCH TRIBUTARY and STM–1 optical Tributary only.The STM–1 signal is managed at VC4 level. If the STM1 signals contain VC12 and VC3 levels they willnot be processed but only transferred.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

219

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.10 Matrix unit: Full Matrix Unit & 16x16 Matrix Units


The following description is suitable for both units named in the title. The new 16x16 Matrix Unit is anhardware upgrade for the present Full Matrix Unit. For the future release this unit is already preset tosupport the new standard ITU–T management functions (J1/J2, TIM, POM, SNCP/N). In current releasethese new features are not performed, therefore the ”16x16 Full Matrix Unit ” and the Full Matrix Unit carryout the same functions.

Unit streams VC4, VC3, VC12, corresponding to sixteen STM–1 bidirectional signals, are provided withan AU4 payload to be cross–connected.

The AU4 interfaces are:

• 10 for the tributaries, i.e.: max. 8 regular + max. 2 spare

• 16 for the aggregates, i.e.: 8 regular (4 for EAST1, 4 for WEST1) and 8 spare (4 for EAST2, 4for WEST2). When STM–16 Aggregate is used and no VC12/VC3 SNCP rings are present theconnections can be distributed any where, and not only 4 East + 4 West.When STM–16 Aggregate is used and the Enhanced Connectivity is activated (cfr. Line ShelfConnection Configuration – Operator’s Manual) and even if VC12/VC3 SNCP rings arepresent, the connections can be distributed any where, and not only 4 East + 4 West.(See para. 3.1.3.1 ”STM–16 Aggregate differences (1661 SM–C)” on page 107).

Each AU4 signal is connected over a 38.88 Mbit/s 4–row bus.

The following connections are established between:

• Aggregates and Tributaries (DROP/INSERT)

• Aggregates and Aggregates (both pass–through between the two sides and Cross Connectionof a VC/AU inside the same side Aggregate)

• Tributaries and Tributaries (CROSS CONNECTION)

The description has been split into:

• cross–connection• Card Controller and ASIC Controller• Power Supply and Remote Inventory

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

220

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Specifically:

• Cross Connection

The operations required to cross–connect the various units depend on the type of interfacingunit and on the type of cross–connection to establish.

The following structures can be distinguished:

a ) Connection with aggregates or STM–1 synchronous tributaries containing the VC12and/or VC3 to process. These streams can be terminated towards the plesiochronoustributaries or rerouted with other STM–1’s trib. or aggregates.

The VC12 and VC3 of the STM1 electrical trib. can also be processed. When using theoptical STM1 trib., the relevant mapping/demapping functions are disabled and performedon the full matrix.

b ) Connection with aggregates or STM–1 synchronous tributaries for which VC4 demappinghas not been requested.In this case the VC4 can be fully rerouted or, if containing C4, can be terminated onto the140 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributary.

c ) Connection with 2/34/45/140 Mbit/s plesiochronous tributaries.

The various structures need various functional blocks.

To cross–connect it might be necessary to connect together different structures (e.g., type–aaggregate signals to connect to type–c synchronous tributaries), hence both are used.

The following Rx streams are indicated for all the cited structures, see Figure 89. on page 225:

• sixteen STM–1 signals from the Rx side of the EAST 1/2, WEST 1/2 Aggregates (MSP circuit)

• ten STM–1 signals from the Tx side of the 10 plesiochronous or synchronous tributaries,(HWP, Rx side).

The purpose of the MSP is to select, for each EAST/WEST sides, the Aggregate regular operating streamsinstead of the spare ones (eight STM–1 streams leaving MSP vs. the 16 incoming ones).The HWP circuit must select the 8 regular streams from the 10 streams received from the tributaries.The resulting sixteen STM–1 signals are individually handled by the circuitry down stream.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

221

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The above structures are now defined as follows:

• Structure a)

The following circuits are used if the received signals have to be structured:

– PI (SA) – Pointer Interpreter of Section Adaptation. Identifies the AU4 pointer in order tolocate the start of VC4

– HPT – (Higher order Path Termination)Terminates the POH’s of VC4 by carrying out the proper operations (see Figure 83. onpage 202).Bytes F2, Z3, Z4 and Z5 are sent towards the AUX unit via the OH–BUS dedicated stream(Futurebus interface)

– HPA – (Higher order Path Adaptation)Processes the TU pointers of VC12 and VC3 to generate the TU pointers from position”0” of VC4 (as if AUOH pointed at ”0”).

– LPOM – (Lower order Path Overhead Monitoring)One of the POH’s of VC12 and VC3 are checked to count and control the BIP of POH(B3 for the POH of VC3, or BIP2 for the POH of VC12).

– LPC – (Lower order Path Connection)This circuit space/time switches the TU12s and TU3s (max. of 1008 TU12) and choosesthe structure (a, b or c) towards which the signals will be sent.

The following circuits are implemented to transmit towards the STM–1 signals (aggregates orsynchronous tributaries):

– HPT – (Higher order Path Termination)Inserts the POH of VC4 to fill up the Higher Order Virtual Container (see Figure 83. onpage 202).Bytes F2, Z3, Z4 and Z5 are received from the AUX unit via the OH–BUS dedicated stream(Futurebus Interface)

– PG (SA) – Pointer Generator of Section Adaptation.It generates the new pointer AUOH for the VC4 (AU4 structure of Figure 88. on page 222).It is set at ”0”.

• Structure b)

– PI (SA) – Pointer Interpreter of Section Adaptation.Identifies the AU4 pointer to locate the beginning of VC4.

– HPOM – (Higher order Path Overhead Monitoring)Monitors the POH of VC4 by checking bytes J1, B3, C2, G1 only (see Figure 83. on page202).

– HPC – (Higher order Path Connection)This circuit switches the AU4 structure by selecting the structure towards which the signalswill be sent.

The following circuits are implemented to transmit towards the STM–1 signals (aggregatesor synchronous tributaries):

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

222

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

– HUG – (Higher order Unequipped Generator)This circuit is active only when the VC4 are not equipped, by setting default configurationsfor the AUOH pointer and payload of VC4 (the structure is AU4, see Figure 88. on page222).

AUOH

Figure 88. AU4 structure

• Structure c)

In this case the information received from the tributaries is directly sent to thecross–connection circuit.

Two possibilities can be distinguished:

– For the 2 and 34 Mbit/s Tributaries: the relevant TU12 and TU3 are sent to the LPC withcomplete cross–connection like that of structure a).

– For the 140 Mbit/s Tributaries: the relevant AU4 are sent to the HPC with signalscross–connected like that of structure b).

The signals exiting the cross–connection will be directly routed towards the interface circuitsto be transmitted to the plesiochronous tributaries.

The interface circuits utilize the signals of structure a), b), c). Therefore:

– Sixteen STM1’s can be connected to the Tx side of the EAST/WEST Aggregates towardsthe regular and spare (1, 2) paths of both sides.

– Eight STM1’s can be connected to the Rx side of 10 Tributaries (max.)This function enables the use of the Rx side of the HWP circuit to transmit eight STM1’stowards 10 possible tributaries (8 regular + 2 spare).

The unit is timed by two 38.88 MHz clocks (CKA, CKB) and relevant synch. signals SYNCA,SYNCB received from the two CRU units.The selection of one of the two synch. sources depends on the state of the two CRU’s.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

223

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

• Card Controller and ASIC Controller

The Card Controller carries out the following functions:


Information on setting options, criteria, reset, alarms, etc., is exchanged with the ESCTEquipment Controller unit through the LIECB and NIECB connections.

Unit Configuration storing


Through signals ID 0–4 the Card Controller acknowledges the position of the unit inside thesubrack.



Dialog with ASIC Controller

This function allows the Equipment Controller to dialog with the ASIC Controller.

Led and switch commands

The signals exchanged with the ASIC Controller light up the red LED (1) to indicate local unitalarms, and activate the switching command OSW to be sent to the other units.OSW is also operated by ISWM received from other Matrixes for the Matrix EPS. This functionis described in para. 3.1.5.3 ”EPS for Full Matrix and CRU” on page 128.

The ASIC Controller carries out the following operations:

Dialog with the Card Controller

Through this dialog the ASIC controller executes the operations required by the EquipmentController.

Internal/External Alarm Detection

Performance Monitoring

Command and reading of Software Settings

Generation of SNCP switch commands and AISCommands generated internally for alarms detection

CRU selection

This interface selects the CRU (clock reference unit) from which the synchronism and timingsignals to be used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selectioncriteria, this interface processes the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:

ISWCA : internal alarm received from the CRU A;

ISWCB : internal alarm received from the CRU B;

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

224

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Byte J1 interface

This interface transmits and receives the data of byte J1 utilized as path trace for VC4.Data structure recurs with a 64 STM – 1 frame periodicity.Not operative in this release

MSP and HWP Protection

The PROT signal are generated to protect the Aggregate or tributaries streams when receivingISW from the Aggregate or Trib..


The power supply voltages present at the input of the Full Matrix unit are:

+5.3V 3%

–5.5V 3%

+12.1V 3%

PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.


The unit is equipped with an E2PROM ( serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data(codes, series, date of construction).

This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controllerunit which utilizes it for the Remote Inventory.

The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directlyconnected to the Equipment Controller.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

225

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

+5V –5V

+12

V

FU

SE

S+

5,3V

+12

1,1V

–5,3

V

4 /

FROM CRU

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

/ / /

OH

BU

S(A

UX

)F

UT

UR

E

EQ

.C

ON

TR

.

BU

S D

RIV

ER

OH

–BU

SIN

TE

RFA

CE

*F

2Z

1,Z

2,Z

3

MS

PS

ELE

CT

AU

4

PR

OT

1–4:

EA

ST

1

: : :

EA

ST

2

WE

ST

1

WE

ST

2

FROM Rx AGG. SIDE

HW

P–R

xS

ELE

CT

AU

41–

10:F

RO

MT

xT

RIB

.S

IDE

PR

OT

1–4:

AG

G.E

1–4:

AG

G.O

1–8:

TR

IB.

PI (

SA

)V

C4

BE

GIN

CH

EC

K 1 16

ST

RU

CT.

A

PI (

SA

)V

C4

BE

GIN

CH

EC

K 1 16

ST

RU

CT.

B

HP

TP

OH

–VC

4E

XT

RA

CT

ION

*

HP

AT

UP

OIN

TE

R

LPO

MC

HE

CK

BIP

–PO

HO

F V

C3

–VC

12

LPC

ST

RU

CT

UR

E C

(2,

34 M

bit/s

)

TU

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NS

ELE

CT

ION

HP

TP

OH

–VC

4IN

SE

RT.

*

PG

(S

A)

AU

OH

PO

INT

ER

INS

ER

TI N T E R F A C E

1–4:

WE

ST

1

1–4:

WE

ST

2

E1–

4:

1–4:

EA

ST

1

1–4:

EA

ST

2

W1–

4:

TO Tx AGG. SIDE

HP

OM

MO

NIT

OR

PO

H–V

C4

HP

CA

U4

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NS

ELE

CT

ION

ST

RU

CT

UR

E C

( 1

40 M

bit/s

)

1–8:

TR

IB.

HW

PT

x

PR

OT

TO Rx TRIB. 1–10 SIDE:

PW

ALM

CK

A

CK

SY

NC

A

SY

WB

CK

SY

NC

MS

P–H

WP

PR

OT

EC

TIO

NS

BY

TE

J1

INT

ER

FAC

E

INT

ER

NA

LU

NIT

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

CR

US

ELE

CT.

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS

PP

S S

WIT

CH

ING

S

AIS

ALA

RM

S

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

E

PR

OT

CK

SE

L

FR

OM

AG

G. A

ND

TR

IBS

.

ISW

A S I C

C O N T R O L L E R

DIA

LOG

WIT

HC

AR

DC

ON

TR

OLL

ER

LED

AN

DS

WIT

CH

CO

MM

AN

DS

DIA

LOG

WIT

HA

SIC

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

UN

ITT

YP

EA

CK

NO

WLE

DG

E

A S I C

C O N T R O L L E R

DIA

LOG

WIT

HE

QU

IPM

EN

TC

ON

TR

OLL

ER

PH

ISIC

AL

PO

SIT

ION

AC

KN

OW

LED

.C

TY

PE

0–3:

1IS

WT

OS

WT

RIB

.

TO

ALL

UN

ITS

LIE

CB

ID0

FR

OM

CR

UISWCB

ISWCA

EQ

.C

ON

TR

.

CA

RE

M

Figure 89. Block diagram: Full Matrix

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

226

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.11 STM4 Aggregate unit


This description is applicable to all the STM–4 Aggregate units of this release.

The units can be distinguished by letters L and S defining their dependence on optical components usedfor Long distance or Short distance.

The Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the unit’s front coverplate.

The units identified by DIN or SC denote type of connector used, the other units use FC–PC connectors.The units which operate in the 2nd window are indicated with 4.1, those operating in the third window with4.2.. For the ”JE” Aggregate some optical interface characteristics are improved.

The STM4 Aggregate unit acts as a bidirectional interface between the STM–4 signal and the AU4structured signals (Tx/Rx matrix–connected signals and the STM4 aggregates of the opposite side).

The Card Controller subunit belongs to the cited unit and, upon interfacing the Equipment Controller unitexecutes management functions, i.e., alarms checks, configuration commands, cross–connections etc..


• Transmission

• Reception

• OH bus

• Card Controller


All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

227

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Transmission

When using the Connection Card the unit receives:

• 10 signals (DTT1–10) from the connection card unit. These signals concern the Tributary units,including spares

• 8 signals (DTB1–4A and DTB1–4B) from the two STM4 Aggregate units of the opposite side.These signals are the streams transiting from the opposite Rx side.

Each of the above signals are 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured and represent an AU4–mapped signal.The MSP–HWP block selects the main or spare Trib. and Aggregate of the opposite side. Since the STM–4signal contains four AU4 structures the HPC circuit selects 4 signals from those available.

When using the Full Matrix the unit receives:

• Four signal (DTT 1:4) from Matrix A and four (DTT 6:9) from Matrix B, already selected andmanaged by the Full Matrix unit.The function of MSP is to select between A or B Full Matrix.The HPC circuit is not used (function performed in the Full Matrix).

Bytes SOH (9 rows and 36 columns) are inserted into circuits MST, RST as shown in Figure 90. on page231.The Multiplexing section bytes are inserted into MST, i.e.:

• D4–D12, K1–K2, B2, S1, M1

The Regeneration section bytes are inserted into RST, i.e.:

• D1–D3, B1, C1• alignment bytes A1, A2.

Circuits MST, RST also contain the SOH bytes of the speech, data, service channels etc., received fromthe AUX unit via the 5.2 Mbit/s bus.

The circuits that follow scramble the signal but not the first line of SOH.

At this point the signals are Parallel/Serial converted to obtain the STM–4 stream. To do this twoconsecutive operations are necessary:

• the first – obtains eight 77.76 Mbit/s streams from the sixteen 38.88 Mbit/s ones;• the second – serializes them at 622.08 Mbit/s (signal D622T).

Note that the four AUG structures are byte–interleaved in the STM–4 structure (see Figure 91. on page232) with fixed phase relationship vs. the same multiple signal.

Serialization takes place through the clock extracted from the 622.08 MHz VCO. The latter isphase–locked to the 38.88 MHz clock coming from the two Clock Reference 150/600 units(CKA,B and relevant synchronism SYA,B).

The selection of one of the two synch. sources, utilized to generate the unit timing signals (CK38T),depends on the operating status of the two CRU’s.

The end operation is the electro/optical conversion achieved through the Tx Optical Module, and theresulting signal can be accessed at connector (4) on the front cover.

The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) facility is also provided in compliancy with ITU–T Rec. G.958through the Card Controller’s software settings and management.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

228

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Reception

The unit receives the 622 Mbit/s signal from the optical line. This signal can be accessed at the front coverconnector (3).

The Rx optical module electrically converts the signal (D622R) by regenerating it and extracting theCK622R clock.

The S/P circuit splits the four streams of the STM–4. Each stream is represented by a 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wirebus (16 in all). This operation is achieved by intermediate paralleling a 77.76 Mbit/s 8–wire bus.The CK38R clock is generated through further subdivisions and sent to the two CRU units. The circuit thatfollows checks alignment (byte A1, A2) and synchronism.

After Descrambling, circuits RST and MST extract the SOH bytes.

RST D1–D3, C1, B1 Byte extraction from the regeneration section (BIP8 estimate andcomparison with the received bytes)

MST D4–D12, S1, M1, K1–K2, B2 Byte extraction from the regeneration section (BIP96estimate and comparison with the received bytes)

Additionally, the SOH bytes are also extracted from both of the above circuits and sent to the AUX unit viathe 5.2 Mbit/s SOH bus.

The SA circuit synchronizes the extracted timing (CK38R) with the local clock received from the selectedCRU.Adaptation is through justification of the AU4’s pointer (pointer interpretation and generation).Hence byte B3 is extracted from the POH of each VC4.

When using the Connection Card unit the HPC circuit cross–connects the four AU–4’s towards thetributaries and/or towards the Aggregates on the opposite side.The MSP–HWP block selects the tributaries (DRT 1–10) or aggregate main/spare on the opposite side(8 transit signals DRBA1–4 and DRBB1–4) toward swich information will be sent. Each AU–4 is a 38.88Mbit/s 4–row bus structured signals.

When Full Matrix is used the DRT 1:4 and DRT 6:9 connect the signals AU–4 towards matrix A and B.MSP and HPC functions are performed in the Full Matrix.

OH bus

A 4.86 MHz OHBUS stream is generated to achieve bidirectional APS between aggregates andtributaries. The STM4 Aggregate unit transmits/receives the K1, K2 and S bytes over such stream.S is a serial stream containing the LOS, LOF, EX–BER, MS–AIS, MS–FERF alarms. tributaries. TheOH–BUS is interfaced by the Future Bus Driver.Bidirectional switching is not operative in this release.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

229

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Card Controller

The Card Controller sub–unit carries out the following operations:

• Dialog with the Equipment controller unit

Information on setting options, criteria, loop, reset, switching is exchanged with the EquipmentController unit through the LIECB and NIECB connection.

• Alarms, Configuration, Performance Internal dialog

This dialog permits to transmit/receive the E2PROM stored unit software settings. Alarms andperformance are received from the unit.The alarms indicating local unit failure activate the red LED (1) (LEDN command). SignalsCOSW, added to EXT ALM (sum of external alarms LOS, LOF, MS–AIS, MS–FERF, EXBER),generate the OSW switching command.LED (2) ON denotes that the unit is in–service (command WK CH).

CRU selection

This interface selects the CRU (clock reference unit) from which the synchronism and timingsignals to be used as reference for the unit are extracted. In order to provide the selectioncriteria, this interface processes the alarms received from the two CRU’s, namely:



• Loop Management

Enables two loop commands on the unit:

L622, line side loop The STM4 Rx signal (D622R) and relevant clock (CK622R) can besimultaneously transmitted towards the line and AU–4 Rx side.

L77, station side loop The 77 Mbit/s Tx data (inside the P/S Converter) can be simultaneouslysent back over the Rx side towards the AU–4 side and the Tx line side.

• DCC Management

Locally interfaces the 192 Kbit/s channels (D1–D3) and 576 Kbit/s channels (D4–D12) of theSOH’s TMN stream.

• Unit type acknowledgment

Through the CTYPE 0–3 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it ismounted.

• Optical Protection Management

This facility enables the ALS performance as specified by ITU–T Rec.G.958, i.e., shuts downLaser when no optical signal is received.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

230

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Laser can be reset through the following commands:

– manual, Laser ON for 2 secs. every time push–button (5) is pressed.– automatic, Laser ON for 2 secs. every 180 secs.– manual for test: Laser ON for 9 secs. every time push–button (5) is pressed for more than

12 seconds.

• Protection Management

The Protection function is enabled through the ISW commands which cause switching betweenregular and spare units.

The ISW commands are received from:

1 ) the other Aggregate on the same side (to know the alarm conditions, not operative in thisrelease)

2 ) the two full matrixes (to select the one to use)

3 ) the trib. (to select the one to use).

The protection signals (PROT) are generated.

This function is used for APS Tributary protection utilizing the ISW command received from theaggregates of the same sideThis circuit also operates with the OSW command. The APS is described in para 3.1.5.4”Simplified Linear APS” on page 130.


Through signals ID 0–4 the Card Controller acknowledges the position of the unit inside thesubrack.



+5.3V 3%

–5.5V 3%

+12.1V 3%The voltages are protected through fuses.PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.The electrical ground and chassis ground strap–connected.

The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes,series, date of construction).This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controllerunit which utilizes it for the Remote Inventory.

The CAREM signal indicates the presence of the board (ground contact) and it is directlyconnected to the Equipment Controller.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

231

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 A2 C1 C1 C1 C1

B1

D1

E1

D2

F1

D3

B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 B2 K1

D4

D7

D10

S1 Z1 Z1

K1

D5

D8

D11

Z2 Z2M1 Z2

K2

D6

D9

D12

E2

36 Bytes

9 B

ytes

RS

OH

MS

OH

B2 B2

Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1Z1 Z1Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z2Z2

LEGENDA

A1–A2 Alignment word A1=11110110, A2=00101000. Utilizes all slots of the four STM–1

C1 Indicates the STM–1 stream inside STM4.

B1 BIP8 calculation result on the previous frame (after scrambling). Utilized to assess errorrate between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.

E1 EOW operations between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.

F1 Available for the user (data from AUX unit). Uses slot of 1st STM–1.

D1–D3 192 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.

B2 Result of BIP4x24 calculation on previous frame exempt of three RSOH rows. Used to assess error rate between multiplexers. Uses all slots.

K1,K2 For MS Trail Linear Protection indications and MS–RDI (FERF), AIS alarms. Uses slot of1st STM–1

D4–D12 576 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM–1

S1 Indicates synchronism status. Uses slot of 1st STM–1. Bits 1:4 set Transmission direction.

Z1,Z2 Spare bytes for function not yet defined. Uses all slots.

E2 For EOW operations between multiplexers. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.

M1 Indicates section MS–REI (FEBE) STM4. Uses slot of 3rd STM–1.

X For national use

O Bytes not specified for future international use.

Media Dependent byte (only two accessible). Not operative

Bytes not scrambled (like the whole first row)

Figure 90. SOH structure of STM–4

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

232

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1 2611...9

AUG–4

1

1 2611...9

AUG–4

2

1 2611...9

AUG–4

3

1 2611...9

AUG–4

4

SOH

SOH12341234.............

123412341234.............

4 x 94 x 261STM–4

Figure 91. STM–4 structure

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

233

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

+12

V

+5V –5V

ELE

CT

RO

NIC

+12

.1V

–5.5

V

+5.

3V

PW

ALM

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

MS

P/

4 / * =

FR

OM

TR

IB (

WIT

H C

ON

NE

CT

ION

CA

RD

) or

FR

OM

CR

US

ELE

CT

ION

ISWCA

DIA

LOG

WIT

H

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

OP

TIC

AL

PR

OT

EC

T.D

CC

LOO

P

CT

YP

E 0

– 3:

UN

IT

ISWCB

ID 0 – 4:

LIECBNIECB

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

/ / /

FR

OM

AG

G. O

F

SO

H

PR

OT

AU

X

TX

ST

M–4

RX

ST

M–4

MS

T

LF

ALS

DIA

LOG

D1–

D3

:D

4–D

12:

4

5

OP

TIC

AL

MO

DU

LE

LDT

EM

P

OP

TIC

AL

MO

DU

LE

L622

CR

U

M–S

OH

INS

ER

TIO

NO

PP

OS

ITE

SID

E(W

HE

NC

ON

NE

CT

ION

CA

RD

SI

US

ED

)

HW

P/ / / / / /

DT

T1

DT

T10

*

DT

BA

1–4 :

DT

BB

1–4:

HP

CS

ELE

CT.

OF

4 A

U4

4 / / / /

D4–

D12

K1

K2

B2

S1,

M1

:

RS

TR

–SO

HIN

SE

RT

ION

4 / / / /

D1–

D3

:

S4 / / / /

C R A M B L E R

MU

X

4 / / / /

B1,

C1,

A1,

A2

PA

RA

LLE

/S

ER

IES

CO

NV

ER

SIO

N

ALS

INT

ER

FAC

E5.

2 M

bit/s

FR

OM

AG

G. O

FB

3 O

F

OP

PO

SIT

ES

IDE

(WH

EN

CO

NN

EC

TIO

NC

AR

D S

IU

SE

D)

DT

T1

DT

T10

*

DT

BA

1–4 :

DT

BB

1–4:

HP

CA

U4

CR

OS

S–

B3

4 / / / /C

ON

N.

PO

H–V

C4

DR

OP

MS

TM

–SO

HE

XT

RA

CT

ION

SA

PO

INT

ER

SA

U4

MS

AIS

4 // / /

RS

TR

–SO

HE

XT

RA

CT

ION

4 / / / /

D E S C R A M B L E R

ST

M1–

4:

4 / / / /

A L I G N M E N T

4 / / / /

DE

MU

XS

ER

IES

/P

AR

ALL

EL

CO

NV

ER

SIO

N

CK

622

R

D62

2R

L77

LOF

CK

38R

LOS

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

EQ

.C

ON

TR

.

FU

SE

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

CA

RE

M

+12

CK

38

MS

P/

/ / / /

PR

OT

HW

P/ / / / / /

FU

TU

RE

BU

ST

O/F

RO

M

DR

IVE

RA

LLU

NIT

SO

H B

US

OH

–BU

SIN

TE

RFA

CE

K1,

K2,

S

MG

MT

FO

R A

LAR

MS

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

MG

MT

MG

MT

L77

L622

2

1

LED

N

WK

CH

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

E

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS

ALA

RM

S

TY

PE

AC

KN

OW

LED

PH

YS

ICA

LP

OS

ITIO

NA

CK

NO

WLE

D

P R O T E C T I O N

M G M T

PR

OT

> =1

EX

TALM

OS

W

TO

ALL

UN

ITS

PU

LS

ISW

AG

GR

.F

ULL

MA

TR

IX/T

RIB

TR

IB +

AG

G. O

PP

OS

ITE

SID

E (

WIT

H F

ULL

MA

TR

IX)

CR

U

CK

A

CK

B

SY

A

SY

B

CK

38T

SY

NC

4 4 44

4 4 44

4 4 44

4 4 4

4 4 4

4 4 4

4 4 4

4 4 4

4 4 4

Figure 92. Block diagram: STM–4 Aggregate

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

234

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.12 STM–16 Aggregate unit


The description is applicable to all the STM–16 Aggregate units of this release.

The Tx/Rx unit optical connectors can be accessed from the unit’s front coverplate. The units whichoperate in the second window are indicated with 16.1, those operating in the third window with 16.2.

The units can be distinguished by letters L and S defining their dependance on optical components usedfor Long distance or Short distance.

The units identified by DIN or SC denote type of connector used, the other units use FC–PC connectors.

Some Units are marked by the ”ID” or “ENH” abbreviation or named ”Enhanced”. These items are presetin order to supply additional ITU–T management functions for the future Releases of the 1661SM–CEquipment. In current release these new functions are not operative and all the Aggregates have the sameperformances.The same units cannot work with previous kind of Aggregate placed on the other side of the optical span.Previous kind of Aggregate (with different optical interface) are no more supplied in this release but canhave been upgraded from previous release.

The units identified by ”JE” (Joint Engineering) have better optical characteristics, typically for thedispersion values (see para.4 on page 279). In some cases also the sensitivity value is indicated.

The STM16 Aggregates with ”192.3” to ”195.7” indication, are used when interfaced with 1686 WDMequipment.

These sixteen units are independently characterized by different wavelength.The 1686 WDM equipment must receive up to sixteen different wavelength signals from sixteen differentSTM16 Aggregates.The ”New Aggregate” units contain new generation gate–arrays which permit evolution towards newnetwork features.

The STM–16 Aggregate unit bidirectionally interfaces the STM–16 signal and the AU4 structured signals:the Tx/Rx matrix–connected signals multiplexed in a proprietary frame and the STM–16 aggregate of theopposite side are coaxially connected on the front coverplate.

Each unit is made up of:

• STM16 Aggregate unit (Main Board)

• Expansion sub–unit

• DC/DC converter sub–unit

• O/E converter sub–unit

• E/O converter sub–unit

• Card Controller sub–unit

The Main Board performs the RST, MST, SA, HPC functions.The ”Expansion” performs an additional HPC function (four x AU4 for tributary subsystem).

The DC/DC converter is used to obtain a 15+V power supply for the O/E and E/O sub–units.

The O/E and E/O sub–units perform the optical/electrical line conversion and viceversa.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

235

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The Card Controller sub–unit executes management functions (alarms check, configuration commands,etc.) when interfacing the Equipment Controller unit.


• Transmission

• Reception

• Card Controller

• Power Supply, Remote inventory

Tx and Rx sections describe the functions of the unit and sub–units making up the STM–16 Aggregate.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

236

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Transmission

The unit receives:

• 4 x 622 Mbit/s signals (direct cabling) from the opposite side Aggregate (pass–through).

• 10 signals via Matrix units on the ”Expansion Tx” circuit and on the ”Expansion sub–unit”, alwaysmounted on the unit.

Each Matrix signal is 38.88 Mbit/s 4–wire bus structured and represent an AU4–mapped signal.When using the Connection Card, the 10 signals are connected with tributaries and access theHWP and HPC circuits.The HWP block selects the main or spare trib. signals.The HPC block selects 4 trib. signals from the ones available.

The use of the Full Matrix excludes the HWP and HPC blocks. The same functions areperformed in the Full Matrix connecting each of the 4 ”Expansion” signals. These signals can contain tributary information or VC12/VC3 pass–through information.

Each Expansion block transmits four AU4 signals to the HPC 24 x 16.

The following is carried out on the four 622 Mb/s coming from the Aggregate of the opposite side:

• 622 MHz Clock extraction

• Demultiplexing, to obtain the 16 STM1

• Alignment check on STM–16 frame (A1, A2 bytes)

• Descrambler

• Section Adaptation, to synchronize the extracted clock to the local clock received from the CRU.

In this way further sixteen AU4 are presented to the HPC 24 x 16.Sixteen AU4 are selected from the HPC block to pass to:

• MST: insertion of the Multiplexing SOH byte

• RST: insertion of the Regeneration SOH byteThe SOH byte are indicated in Figure 93. on page 240 The SOH byte received from the AUX unitare interfaced with the OH BUS at 5.2 Mb/s through the FUTURE BUS DRIVER.

• Scrambler (except the first SOH line)

• Multiplexer: the 2488Mbit/s stream is obtained through parallel/serial conversion. To multiplex,the 16 signals are byte interleaved in the STM–16 (see Figure 94. on page 241).The CK 2488 MHz clock is obtained through a VCO synchronized to the CK 38T received fromCRU.

• Electro/optical conversion, achieved through a sub–unit always mounted on the Aggregate,permits to access the resulting signal at the connector(4) on the front converplate.The E/O Converter is power supplied at +15V, derived from a DC/DC converter sub–unitmounted on the Aggregate.The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) facility provided through the Card Controller softwaresetting and management complies with ITU–T Rec G.958.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

237

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Reception

The unit receives the 2488 Mbit/s Signal from the optical line. This signal can be accessed at the frontcoverplate connector (3).The Optical/Electrical sub–unit converts the signal (D 2488 R) by regenerating it and extracting theCK 2488 R clock.The Serial/Parallel circuit demultiplexes the 16 streams of the STM–16.The CK 38 R clock is generated through subdivision and sent to the CRU units.The circuits that follow are:

• Alignment check (A1, A2 bytes)

• Descrambler

• RST: extraction of the regeneration SOH bytes

• MST: extraction of the multiplexer SOH bytes.The use of the terminated SOH byte is indicated in Figure 93. on page 240. The auxiliary SOHbyte terminated on the AUX units, are transmitted on an SOH BUS at 5.2 Mb/s through aFUTURE BUS DRIVER.

• Section Adaptation to synchronize the extracted timing CK 38 R to the local clock received fromthe CRU selected.

Adaptation is through AU4 pointer justification (pointer interpretation and generation).

At this point the AU4’s follow different directions, towards the Aggregate opposite side (AU4Pass–Through and the Matrix (for tributaries and VC12/VC3 pass–through).

The following are the circuits towards the opposite side aggregate:

• Alignment (A1, A2 bytes insertion)

• Scrambler

• Multiplexing the 16 streams in four 622 Mb/s.

The 4 x 622 Mb/s are coaxially connected to the opposite side aggregate via the front coverplate.

Towards the Matrix, the HPC 16 x 16 block selects four AU4 max signals to send to the ”expansion block”circuit and 4 AU4 max. signals to send to the expansion sub–unit.

On the Expansion, the HWP + HPC chooses the tributaries (10) to which the AU4’s will be transmitted viathe Matrices.

This operation is performed on the same Full Matrix unit, therefore the HWP + HPC block is not used.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

238

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Card Controller

The Card Controller sub–unit carries out the following operations:

• Dialog with the Equipment controller unit

Information on setting options, criteria, loop, reset, switching is exchanged with the EquipmentController unit through the LIECB and NIEBC connection.

• Alarms, Configuration, Performance, Internal dialogThis dialog permits to transmit/receive the E2PROM stored unit software settings. Alarms andperformance are received from the unit.The alarms indicating local unit failure activates the red LED (1) (LEDN command). SignalsCOSW, added to EXT ALM (sum of external alarms LOS, LOF, MS–AIS, MS–FERF, EXBER),generate the OSW switching command.LED (2) ON denotes operating unit (command WK CH).

CRU selection


ISWCA : internal alarm received from the CRU A;ISWCB : internal alarm received from the CRU B;

• DCC ManagementAllows to locally interface the 192 Kbit/s channels (D1–D3) and 576 Kbit/s channels (D4–D12)of the SOH’s TMN stream.

• Unit type acknowledgmentThrough the CTYPE 0–3 signal the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it ismounted.

• Optical Protection ManagementThis facility enables the ALS performance as specified by ITU–T Rec. G.958, i.e., shuts downLaser when no optical signal is received.

Laser can be reset through the following commands:

– manual, Laser ON for.2 secs. every time push–button (5) is pressed.

– automatic, Laser ON for 2 secs. every 180 secs.

– manual for test: Laser ON for 9 secs. every time push–button (5)is pressed for more than12 seconds.

• Protection ManagementThe Protection function is enabled through the ISW commands which cause switching betweenregular and spare units.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

239

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The ISW commands are received from:

1 ) the other Aggregate on the same side (to know the alarm conditions, not operative in thisrelease).

2 ) the two full matrixes (to select the one to use)

3 ) the trib. (to select the one to use).

Protection signals (PROT) are generated.





+5.3V 3%

–5.5V 3%

+12.1V 3%

The voltages are protected through fuses.PW ALM alarm is generated in case of malfunction or voltage failure.As before indicated, a DC/DC converter sub–unit obtains a +15V to power the E/O and O/E sub–units.The electrical ground and chassis ground strap–connected.




All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

240

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 C1 C1

B1

D1

E1

D2

F1

D3

B2 B2 B2 K1

D4

D7

D10

S1 Z1 Z1

K1

D5

D8

D11

Z2 Z2 Z2

K2

D6

D9

D12

E2

144 BYTES9

Byt

es

RS

OH

MS

OH

Z1 Z2Z1 Z1

Z2 Z2M1 Z2

LEGENDA

A1–A2 Alignment word A1=11110110, A2=00101000. Utilizes all slots of the 16 STM–1

C1 Identifies the STM–1 stream inside the STM–n.

B1 BIP8 calculation result on the previous frame (after scrambling).Utilized to assess errorrate between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.

E1 EOW operations between regenerators. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.

F1 Available for the user (data from AUX unit). Uses slot of 1st STM–1.

D1–D3 192 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.

B2 Result of BIP16x24 calculation on previous frame except for three RSOH rows. Used toassess error rate between multiplexers. Uses all slots.

K1,K2 For MS Linear Trail Protection indications (not operative) and MS–RDI (FERF), AISalarms. Uses slot of 1st STM–1

D4–D12 576 Kbit/s channel for DCC on TMN network. Uses slot of 1st STM–1

S1 Indicates synchronism status. Uses slot of 1st STM–1. Bits 1:4 set Transmission direction.

Z1,Z2 Spare bytes for function not yet defined. Uses all slots.

E2 For EOW operations between multiplexers. Uses slot of 1st STM–1.

M1 Indicates section MS–REI (FEBE) STM4. Uses slot of 3rd STM–1.

X For national use

O Bytes not specified for future international use.

Media Dependent byte (only two accessible). Used to perform the Bidirectional Workingon Single Fibre.

Bytes not scrambled (like the whole first row)

Figure 93. SOH structure of STM–16

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

241

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1 2611...9

AUG–4

1

1 2611...9

AUG–4

n

1 2611...9

AUG–4

n

1 2611...9

AUG–4

16

SOH

SOH123....16, 123.... 16.

123456789101111213141516. 12345...........

16 x 916 x 261

STM–16

Figure 94. STM–16 structure

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

242

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

+5V

+5V +

12V

ELE

CT

RO

NIC

+–5

,3V

+12

,1V

–5,5

VP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

CK

CR

US

ELE

CT

ION

ISWCA

DIA

LOG

WIT

H

EQ

UIP

ME

NT

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

OP

TIC

AL

PR

OT

EC

T.D

CC

CT

YP

E 0

– 3:

UN

IT

ISWCB

ID 0 – 4:

LIECBNIECB

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

FR

OM

AG

G.

ST

M–1

6

ST

M–1

6

ALS

DIA

LOG

D1–

D3

:D

4–D

12:

4

6

CR

U

OP

PO

SIT

ES

IDE

EX

TR

4x62

2

ST

M1–

4

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

EQ

.C

ON

TR

.

FU

SE

CA

RE

M

CK

38

PR

OT

MG

MT

FO

R A

LAR

MS

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

MG

MT

2

1

LED

N

WK

CH

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

E

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS

ALA

RM

S

TY

PE

AC

KN

OW

LED

PH

YS

ICA

LP

OS

ITIO

NA

CK

NO

WLE

D

P R O T E C T I O N

M G M T

PR

OT

> =1

EX

TALM

OS

W

TO

ALL

UN

ITS

PU

LS

ISW

AG

GR

.F

ULL

MA

TR

IX/T

RIB

CR

U

CK

A

CK

B

SY

A

SY

B

CK

38T

SY

NC

CK

DE

MU

XM

bit/s

EX

PA

NS

ION

Tx

HW

P+

HP

C

10

EX

PA

NS

ION

SU

B–U

NIT

Tx

HW

P+

HP

C

Rx

HW

P+

HP

C

10 10

EX

PA

NS

ION

Tx

HW

P+

HP

C

10

MU

X

4x62

2M

bit/s

TO

AG

G.

OP

PO

SIT

ES

IDE

S C R A M B L E R

A L I G N M E N T

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

TO

/FR

OM

TR

IB.

(VIA

MA

TR

IX)

6

DC

/DC

CO

NV

ER

TE

RS

UB

–UN

IT

+12

V

ALI

GN

.D

ES

CR

AM

BLE

RS

AP

OIN

TE

RA

U4

HP

C24

x16

AU

4

4 x

AU

4

4 x

AU

4

MS

TM

–SO

HIN

SE

RT

ION

RS

TR

–SO

HIN

SE

RT

ION

S C R A M B L E R

MU

XP

AR

ALL

E/

SE

RIA

LC

ON

VE

RS

ION

SU

B–U

NIT

E/O Tx

CO

NV

ER

SIO

N

2488

T

LFLD

TE

MP

VC

O24

88M

Hz

CK

2488

CK

38T

R–S

OH

M–S

OH

FU

TU

RE

BU

SD

RIV

ER

+15

VA

LS

OH

–BU

S5,

2Mbi

t/s

AU

X

HP

C16

x16

AU

4

SA

PO

INT

ER

AU

4

4 x

AU

4

4 x

AU

4

MS

TM

–SO

HE

XT

RA

CT

ION

RS

TR

–SO

HE

XT

RA

CT

ION

M–S

OH

R–S

OH

A L I G N M E N T

DE

MU

XP

AR

ALL

E/

SE

RIA

LC

ON

VE

RS

ION

SU

B–U

NIT

E/O Tx

CO

NV

ER

SIO

N

OH

–BU

S

D24

88R

CK

2488

R

3

Figure 95. Block diagram : STM–16 Aggregate

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

243

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.13 AUX/EOW Unit


This description is applicable to all the different Auxiliary unit.

The Auxiliary units process all the overhead streams of the 1st STM–1 frame of stream STM4/STM16 notterminated onto the gate–array of the aggregate and tributary units. It is also possible to select both theaggregates spare to convey to the vocal terminations the dedicated byte (E1).

The streams involved are:

• aggregate SOH (side WEST and side EAST)• Tributary SOH• POH of VC–3 (not operative)• POH of VC–4

Byte transit and termination operations are performed on the above streams.

The streams and bytes being managed depend on the software program (see Operator’s Manual).

To utilize the terminated bytes the unit makes available:

• 6 data channels: 3 with 64 Kbit/s codirectional G.703 Interface and 3 with ITU–T Rec.V11 interface (RS422 A)

• 1 order–wire for selective call, local operator’s telephone set and hybrid circuit• 1 analog EOW extension (for the SL/SM AUX/EOW EXTENSION unit only) to set up external

telephone connections.

Speech connection differentiates the units:

– The AUX/EOW EXTENSION unit realizes the analog speech by–pass between the two aggregatesides, and establishes a connection with an external telephone set.The external connection is realized through the Voice channel connector on the front cover of theAuxiliary Access Module (see Figure 22. on page 66 ).

– The SL/SM AUX/EOW unit allows digital speech by–bass and can be used on wide networks.

ORDER WIRE CHANNEL

A user can establish three types of connections:

• call another ADM• call a Line Terminal• setting up a conference call (omnibus)

When establishing a call the two users must take account of:

• the green LED (7) : indicating free line• the yellow LED (6) : glowing indicates busy line; flashing indicates incoming selective call• the yellow LED (5) : indicating incoming conference call• key J (4) : line seizure• Key R (3) : line reset• Socket (2) for telephone handset connection

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

244

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Before starting a call the user checks the state of the line, inserts the telephone handset into socket (2).Presses key J (4) to seize the line and dials the subscriber number.

The connection between two subscribers is established through dialling i.e., the calling party dials thenumber identifying the called subscriber.The identification number consists of two digits within 10 and 99 and is DTMF encoded.

The called subscriber identifies the incoming call through the lighting up (flashing) of the relevant LED andthe activation of the buzzer. The call starts when the called party lifts the handset. This operation will inhibitthe buzzer.

The conversation in progress is private, i.e., upon lifting the telephone handset, all the other connectedsubscribers receive the busy tone. A third subscriber can cut in by pressing key ”J” (4).Subscriber presence is indicated through an inclusion tone.

Moreover any subscriber can set up a conference–call by dialling the number 00. In this case all theconnected subscribers can hear the conversation and can intervene by keeping key ”J” (4) pressed.The ”back call” tonality is not received.

If You want to silence the buzzer of people who are not interested on the conference call and have notanswered, You have to select number ”0”.

The call terminates when the calling or called party hangs up the telephone handset thus releasing theline. Should the line continue to be engaged because the telephone handsets of both subscribers havenot been positioned correctly, the subscriber will send the RESET (R) command (3) to release it.

When calling a Terminal Line from an ADM , the two users must take account of these two differences :

• key ”*” on the telephone keyboard: line seizure

• key ” #” on the telephone keyboard: line reset

• the omnibus call is not supported

• a third Terminal line can not intervene into a private conversation

N.B. Be careful that if You push the # key on the telephone keyboard , You will reset the line evenif You are calling another ADM .

For details on the behavior of the Line Terminal refer to the proper Manual.

The Hybrid circuit section connects the ”selective call” circuits and the local operator’s set to the COMBOto encode the speech channel.At this point the signals are exchanged between the AUX and MATASSA gate arrays.

Data Channels

The 64 Kbit/s and V11 data channels transit through the Interface circuits to be then sequentiallyconnected to the AUX and MATASSA Gate Arrays.

Gate Array AUX

The AUX gate array multiplexes and demultiplexes the local overheads to/from the MATASSA gate array(multiplexing/demultiplexing circuits) and arranges them in the required order.

If properly programmed it can transmit the 64Kbit/s bytes in a codirectional or contradirectional modethrough the G703, V11 and COMBO interfaces.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

245

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Gate Array MATASSA

The MATASSA gate array interfaces the SL/SM AUX/EOW unit with the aggregates, matrices andtributaries.

The gate array processes the 5.2Mbit/s frames connected with aggregate A and B and the frame of the4.86Mbit/s overhead bus (OH–B) connected with the tributary and matrix unit.

Therefore the gate array can be considered as a component which branches signals over four bidirectionalports:

• Aggregate A

• Aggregate B

• OH BUS (tributaries and matrices)

• Local (data and voice accesses)

This function is performed through matrices.Since all the incoming signals have to be synchronized before being processed through the local clock,a 5.184MHz PLL must be utilized to synchronize the local clock to the incoming 38.88MHz clock.Moreover the Gate array MATASSA interfaces, as master, the AUX gate array with its synchronism andclock.

Bytes A1 and A2, B1, B2 and the AU pointer are not handled by the unit (see Figure 6.53 on page 146,and Figure 6.59 on page 188).

All cross–connected bytes can be addressed, starting from any incoming frame, towards any outgoingone.Selection is referred in the Operator’s Handbook.

Futurebus driver

The Futurebus driver is an electrical interface which increases the rate and integrity of the data processedby the gate array MATASSA with OH BUS.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

246

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Card Controller

The Card Controller sub–unit carries out the following functions:

CRU selection





Information on presettings, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit through theLIECB and NIECB connections.





Internal dialog for Alarms, Configuration and Performance

This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive the unit SW settings stored through the EEPROM, defineall the OH bytes and define the matrices for POH and SOH bytes routing (to this purpose the interface processes the switching signals ISW received from the units). Alarm and performance criteria arereceived from the local unit.

The local unit alarms light up red LED (1).



+5.3V 3%–5.5V 3%

+12.1V 3%




This store is power supplied with a service voltage and connected to the Equipment Controller unit whichutilizes it for the Remote Inventory.The contents of the Remote Inventory is fully described in para 4.1 on page 279.


All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

247

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

+5V

ELE

CT

RO

NIC

–5.5

V

+5.

3V

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

/

UN

IT T

YP

EA

CK

NO

W

DIA

LOG

WIT

HE

QU

IPM

EN

T

PH

YS

ICA

L

ISW

1E

INT

ER

NA

L D

IALO

GU

E F

OR

D64

TN

/P1

FU

SE

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

CA

RE

M

+12

V

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

E

CO

NF

IG.

CR

U

CT

YP

E 0

– 3

/ /2 2 2

D64

TN

/P2

D64

TN

/P3

G.7

03T

xIN

TE

RFA

CE

V11

TN

/P1

/ /2 2 2

V11

TN

/P2

V11

TM

/P3

V11 Tx

INT

ER

FAC

E

/

MU

XO

H

/2

PO

H/S

OH

BY

TE

MA

TR

IX

/ / /2 2

D64

RN

/P2

D64

RN

/P3

G.7

03T

xIN

TE

RFA

CE

V11

RN

/P1

/ /2 2 2

V11

RN

/P2

V11

RN

/P3

V11 Tx

INT

ER

FAC

E

/

DE

MU

XO

H

/2

D64

RN

/P1

LOC

AL

OP.

SE

TP

AR

TY

LIN

E

ÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉ

CO

MB

O

SZ

F

SE

LEC

TIV

EC

ALL

J 4

R 3

–5V

PW

ALM

.

2

LIN

ES

TAT

US

CH

EC

K

56

7

ALA

RM

S C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

SP

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

PO

SIT

ION

AC

KN

OW

SE

LEC

TIO

N

1

ÉÉÉÉ

ISW

2E

ISW

2E

ISW

2W

PW

ALM

CH

FAIL

:

CK

SY

NC

TIM

EG

EN

ER

AT

ION

CK

38S

Y38

PO

H/S

OH

MA

TR

IX

AN

ALO

G E

OW

EX

TE

NS

ION

/4

BU

ZZ

ER

Acc

ess

FR

OM

/TO

UN

IT

ISW

CA

ISW

CB

CK

A

CK

B

SY

NC

A

SY

NC

B

IEC

B

CR

U

FR

OM

AG

GR

EG

AT

ES

ID 0

– 4:

Acc

ess

Mod

ule

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

/3/3 /3 /3

D–C

K–S

5.2

R1E

D–C

K–S

5.2

R2E

D–C

K–S

5.2

R1W

D–C

K–S

5.2

R2W

D–C

K–S

5.2

T1E

D–C

K–S

5.2

T2E

D–C

K–S

5.2

T1W

D–C

K–S

5.2

T2W

/3/3 /3 /3

FU

TU

RE

BU

SD

RIV

ER

PLL

OH

–BU

S

GA

TE

AR

RA

Y M

ATA

SS

A

GA

TE

A

RR

AY

AU

X

Mod

ule

Acc

ess

Mod

ule

Figure 96. Block diagram: SL/SM AUX/EOW

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

248

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.14 Clock Reference Unit


The clock reference unit (CRU) is supplied in the ”Enhanced” versions, distinguished by the compliancewith ITU–T Rec.G81s. and by different hold–over stability.

In this release the following Clock Reference units are available:

• Enhanced CRU

• Enhanced CRU 0,37 ppm.

The first have a stability in Hold over mode of 1 ppm / day and and the second of 0,37 ppm / day.

The CRU delivers synch. signals to all units of the equipment (T0). and to the external source tosynchronize other equipment (T4).

For this purpose the CRU unit is able to:

• select the reference involved

• change the reference (or mode) when loosing synchronism locking another reference availableor the local oscillator.

• operate in a Hold–Over/Free Running mode.

A max. of 16 references are available at the input:

• ten references received from the 21x2Mbit/s Units (2.048MHz) as T2, or STM–1 Tributary Unitsas T1 (38.88MHz).

• four references received from the 38.88MHz Aggregate units (T1)

• two 2.048 MHz external synchronism references received from connector M150 (T3).

Operation

The 16 input references are named:

• RCKT1–5 A and B received from the 10 tributary units

• RCK381, 2 E – RCK381,2 W received from the four aggregate units

• CKIN A,B received from the external source

A 16.364MHz CK16R clock can be received from a Local Oscillator mounted on the card or from one ofthe VCO’s utilized in the PLL’s (SETG). Loss of clock generates the CK16ALL alarm.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

249

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

All the references received from the aggregate and tributary units are associated to:

• a signal indicating integrity

• a reference command or mode switch (ISWi)

Afterwards the duplicated signals are sent to the inputs of two different selection circuits (SELA, SELB).

This condition creates two independent paths:

• the 2MHz path towards the outside of the equipment (T4)

• the 38MHz path to send to all the units of the equipment (T0)

Different references and/or operating modes can be selected for each path.

The Equipment Controller configures the CRU to use twelve of the input signals, arranged in anycombination, as synch. signals, i.e., up to six for the internal reference (38.88 MHz), and up to six for theexternal reference (2.048 MHz).

The selected reference (REF) is processed by SETG and digitally compared with the 38.88 and 2048 MHzclocks (generated by the relative VCO’s).

The LOS and DRIFT 1–6 alarm roots are detected on those reference signals configured by E.C.

Synch. reference selection is principally based on quality (byte S1) and also on the priorities assignedthrough the CT.

Having to select among signals with the same quality level, the one with the highest priority will bechosen. The selection algorithm relates the alarms to the inputs (LOS, LOF AIS, BER and DRIFT).The use of the SSM is fully described in the Configuration Application of the Operator’s Manual.

LOCKED the SETG output is frequency–locked to the referenceselected through the algorithm among those chosen by theoperator.

HOLD OVER/FREE RUNNING These operating modes are enabled if the references selectedare absent. If a previous reference has been selected and hasworked for at least half an hour, the unit will work in the”hold–over” operating mode.In the hold–over mode this stored reference lasts for anunlimited period of time.The free–running operating mode is determined by absenceof reference or the impossibility of using the ”Hold–overmode”.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

250

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

A CK38i reference clock (38.88MHz) and the S38i multiframe synchronism (2kHz) are generated on the38 MHz path by SETG and sent to all the equipment units.

Loss of the above signals generates the MFSALL and CK38ALL alarm roots.

The CKOUT synchronism clock (2048 MHz) is generated on the 2MHz path by SETG and sent to theexternal source through the G703 interface.The 2MHz clock is enabled by the SWCKMN signal received from the Equipment Controller.

SELC is preset through the CT/OS when wanting to obtain T4 for the selection of the T1 inputs, or directlyfrom the T0 criteria.

Squelch Criteria

Two CT/OS configured squelch functions are available at the output:

T4 = T1 can select only the SQ threshold

T4 = T0 can enable/disable the SQ, and selects a SQ threshold. Output T4 can be squelched throughCT/OS.

Card Controller

The Card Controller sub–unit carries out the following functions:

Internal dialog for Alarms, Configuration, Performance

This type of dialog permits to transmit/receive the SW settings stored through the EEPROM; receive alarmand performance criteria from the unit.

The LEDN (loss of +5) and SWALL (unit alarm) alarms are also generated, and their OR’ing with theCK16ALL, MFS ALL and CK38ALL alarms activates the red alarm LED (1) and the OSWC switch criteria.The OSWC criteria is then sent to all the equipment units.

References and operations are SW settable.


Information on presettings, criteria, reset etc. is exchanged with the Equipment Controller unit through theLIEC, NIECB connections.



Unit Type acknowledgment

Through the CTYPE signal 0–3 the Card Controller can acknowledge the unit on which it is mounted.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

251

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436



+5.3V 3%

–5.5V 3%

+12.1V 3%

The PWALM alarm is generated following malfunction or failure of the –5V voltage.


The unit is equipped with an E2PROM (serial protocol) to store the unit inventory data (codes, series, dateof construction)


The CAREM CR Tx signal indicates the presence of the unit (ground contact) and it is directly connectedto the Clock Reference unit and the Equipment Controller.

The equipment can be provided with two Clock Reference units.

The CAREM CR Rx signal indicates if the other Clock Reference unit is present (or not).

Both units deliver the SYNCHRONISM signal and the relative INTEGRITY (or SWITCH) signal (OSWC).CRU selection depends on the OSWC signal.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

252

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

VC

5VE

LEC

TR

ON

IC–5

.5V

+5.

3V

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

PH

YS

ICA

LU

NIT

TY

PE

INT

ER

NA

L D

IALO

GU

E F

OR

FU

SE

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

CA

RE

MC

R T

x

+12

,1V

PE

RF

OR

MA

NC

E

CO

NF

IGU

RA

TIO

NS

DIA

LOG

WIT

H

CT

YP

E 0

– 3

ISW

i

F

–VC

5V

ALA

RM

S C

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

S P

ER

FO

RM

AN

CE

:

2048

KH

z or

(TO

)

<

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

&

3888

0KH

zF

RO

M T

RIB

S.

ISW

i

RC

K T

1A

LOS

DR

IFT

1

ISW

i

&R

CK

TN

A/B

LOS

DR

IFT

N

ISW

i

&R

CK

38 1

E/W

LOS

DR

IFT

1

VC

12V

PW

ALM

CA

RE

MC

R

RX

ISW

iDE

TC

K16

CK

OU

T

ISW

i

&R

CK

38

NE

/W

LOS

DR

IFT

N

CK

INA

LOS

DR

IFT

A

G

INT

G.7

03

CK

INB

LOS

DR

IFT

B

INT

G.7

03

CA

RE

MC

RR

X

CK

16R

16,3

84M

Hz

ÉÉÉÉ

SE

LB

RE

FS

ET

G

RIV

CK

38R

IVM

FS

CK

38 A

LLM

FS

ALL

ÉÉÉÉ

SE

LB

RE

FS

ET

G

CK

OU

T

SQ

UE

LC

T1

–T4

SE

L

C

INT

G70

3

ÉÉ

CK

OU

T

SQ

UE

LC

T0

– T

4

CK

38I/S

Y38

TO

ALL

UN

ITS

SY

38i

(T4)

2048

KH

zT

O E

XT

M15

0

SW

CK

MN

CA

RD

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

PO

SIT

ION

AC

KN

OW

LED

.A

CK

NO

WLE

DE

QU

IPM

EN

T

CO

NT

RO

LLE

R

LOS

– 1

6:

PW

ALMP

WA

LM MF

SA

LLCK

16A

LL

ALA

RM

S

ID 0

– 4:

LIE

CB

NIE

CB

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

=1

LED

N

MF

SA

LL

CK

16A

LL

CK

38A

LLS

WA

LL PW

ALM

OS

WC

TO

ALL

OT

HE

R U

NIT

S

Figure 97. Block diagram: Clock Reference

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

253

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.15 Equipment Controller SMEC

(See Figure 98. on page 259.)

The ”Equipment Controller SMEC” must manage:

• dialog with the units housed in the subrack through interface S0 relevant to alarm collection,performance monitoring, execution and check of the software presettings.

• equipment alarm interfacing through interface A and P with:

– front cover LED– Remote alarms– alarm criteria towards the rack lamps– parallel contacts to/from external source

As well as interfacing for:

– unit type and presence checks– protection management– ANDOR management (on Alarm interface subunit)– Power supply alarms processing– Remote Inventory

• local dialog with a personal computer through interface F

• dialog with the Operation System for Network Management operations through Interface Q3

• dialog with the external equipment for Network Management operations through Interface Q2(Mediation Device function. )

The interfaces and relevant functions are mainly carried out through:

• Microprocessor with Control BUS logic

• Memories

Interface S0

As previously mentioned this interface manages dialog between the Equipment Controller and the CardController subunits inside the various equipment units.

The ALARM COLLECTION, PERFORMANCE MONITORING, SOFTWARE SETTINGCONFIGURATION operations are dialogued.

Interface S consists of two serial buses defined as INTRA EQUIPMENT CONTROL BUS (IECB):

LIECB, CKL this channel represents the message exchange link between the EquipmentController and the Card Controllers for the information flow pertaining to theinternal equipment control operation (local).

NIECB, CKN this channel is used by the equipment controller and the card controller as adedicated path to TMN messages that require access to the DCC channels(network).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

254

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Interface S1

This interface manages dialog between the Equipment Controller and the Drop–Shelf units (externalequipment).

The function realized are the same of the S0 interface, using in this case the L1–IECB, Ck1–L, N1–IECB,CK1–N signals.

Interfaces A and P

Interfaces A and P permit to activate the equipment alarm signalling (i.e. parallel contacts, remote alarms,LEDs) by processing the unit alarm indications

Additionally, they carry out management and switching operations.

Interface A mainly supports the following features:

– Led and access point of the unit front coverplate

– alarm signalling

Interface P mainly Supports

– Protection Switching

– Card presence and Card type

– Remote Inventory

The detail of the features is presented in next points.

The following generated remote alarms can be accessed at the relevant terminal tagblock:

• INT : indicates the internal alarm condition

• URG : indicates the urgent alarm condition

• NURG : indicates the not urgent alarm condition

• IND : indicates the indicative alarm condition

• EXT: indicates the external aggregate alarm condition

• TORC : indicates that one of the Power supply units is faulty or absent. It is the OR’ing of PFAIL1, 2, 3 alarm

• TANC : indicates the faulty condition of two or all the Power supply units through a relay contact

• LOS–Q2 :indicates that there is no connection with the TMN system, interface Q3

• TUP : indicates the alarm of the Equipment Controller unit through a relay contact.

The alarm condition is indicated with ground contact except for the TUP (open contact).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

255

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The following are the alarms utilized to activate the rack LEDs:

• RURG indicates the urgent alarm condition and lights up the relative rack red LED

• RNURG indicates the not urgent alarm condition and lights up the relative rack red LED

• M indicates the storing status of the RURG+RNURG alarms and lights up the rack yellow LEDand yellow ATTD LED (5) on the front coverplate.

• C is the storing command of the alarms activated by pressing push–button (10) on the unit frontcoverplate

The C command is also sent to the Alarm interface access module (ANDOR circuit) together with:

• CAND indicates the faulty condition of all POWER SUPPLY units through a relay contact(usually open)

• UP indicates the alarm of the Equipment Controller through a relay contact (usually open)The EUA contact is used to inform the Alarm interface subunit on the presence/absence of the unitinvolved.

Moreover, the ”LED Processing” circuit activates the following LEDs of the unit:

• red LED (7) URG indicates the presence of an urgent alarm. When it is ON together with thered LED (1), it indicates unit reset activation.

• red LED (6) NURG indicates the presence of a not urgent alarm

• yellow LED (4) ABN indicates the ”Abnormal” condition (type: active loopbacks, forcing unitsinto service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS)

• yellow LED (3) IND indicates the presence of an indicative alarm

• red INT LED (1) indicates the presence of an alarm inside the unit or, when red LED (7) is ONtoo, it indicates the activation of the unit reset

• yellow ATTD LED (5) indicates the URG/NURG alarm storing status when pressingpush–button (10) on the unit’s front coverplate or when sending a command from the CraftTerminal or Operation System, or through the Remote Alarms Connection .

• green LED (2) indicates in Service Unit. Always on.

By pressing push–button (11) on the unit’s front coverplate ( LAMPTEST ) the operator checks if all theLEDs light up (except the LEDs on the AUX/EOW unit and Power Supply) without having to generatealarms.

The Parallel Contacts Management circuit supplies six configurable alarms criteria (CP01–3 andCPO5–7) to external sources (not operative in this release). The circuit also receives 8 criteria (CPI1–8)from the external source to be used for the Housekeeping criteria 3 of witch (CPI1–3) are available forany kind of purpose and the remaining 5 (CPI4–8) are fixed as follows:

• SSU FAIL – Fault on the external ”Synchronous Supply Unit”• OFA URG – Urgent Alarm on external OFA (Optical Fibre Amplifier)• OFA ABN – Abnormal Condition indication on external OFA• OFA NURG – Not Urgent Alarm on on external OFA• AND BATT EXT – OFA Station Battery Alarm ( or Batt. Alarm of Drop Shelf extension

equipment)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

256

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The Interface also processes the following alarms coming from the Alarm Interface module:

• PWANDOR – indicates failure or absence of Alarm interface module and Service Batteryabsence.

• ORALIM – Battery OR’ing indicating failure or absence of one of the two station batteries.

The Power Supply unit is managed through the PFAIL1/2/3 alarms.

The Interface analyzes the unit’s status, and provides protection through switchings inside the equipment.

The operating Clock Reference unit is selected by analyzing the OSWCA/B signals which represent theoperating status of the two units, and by generating the SWCKMN selection command, used in the CRUto transmit the 2MHz clock to the external source.

The OSW 1–10 signal are received from the tributaries. This criteria generates the MSW 1–8 command(sent to the Access modules ) to activate tributaries EPS Switching.

The Detection circuit:

• checks the presence/absence of the units through the CAREM 1–26 command.

• checks the type of unit Matrices.

• checks the type of presetting on the SWITCH unit.

The Remote Inventory circuits dialogs with the units and Bus termination sub–unit of the equipment toreceive the inventory data respectively of units and equipment.

From the Bus termination is also received the Equipment Mac Address.

The Inventory data (also that of Equipment Controller itself) can be accessed from local Craft Terminal(interface F) or Operation system (interface QB3)

The Clock/Calendar circuit provides to the Equipment Controller unit the following features:

– full time/data features : seconds, minutes, hours

– day–of–week, month, years, auto–leap year.

This is permitted by an internal oscillator at 32.768 KHz.The circuit maintain correct time/date updating for at least 24 hours during power loss.

Interface D

This interface is used for debugging purposesTo access this interface dedicated 8 pin RJ 45 is present (8)Only for internal factory use.

Interface I (Not operative in this release)

This interface is interface to manage the signal of a second Equipment Controller, when a protected 1+1configuration is present.The purpose is to provide the information exchange in order to define the active/standby unit and decidethe relevant command toward the alarm interface.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

257

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Interface F

Interface F connects the equipment to a personal computer through the front panel connector (9).This connection allows a local operator to software–handle the equipment.

Specifically:

• display the current and stored alarms and status of the equipment units,

• send operative command (example: alarm attention, restant equipment, loop backs etc.

• performance monitoring

• display and configure software settings

• administrative selections (password and operator profile)

• download the equipment software for installation and updating following the equipmentevolution.

These operations are fully described in the Operator’s Manual.

Interface Q2

Interface Q2/RQ2 implements a standard RS485 serial channel suitable for multipoint link synchronous(Q2) or asynchronous (RQ2) communication at a max. speed of 64K baud.The interface is accessed through the relevant terminal tagblock on the QX & Sync access panel.It permits to establish a connection between external equipment (non–SDH Alcatel equipment, max. 32)and the TMN.In this manner the Equipment Controller executes a Mediation Device function.

Interface Q3

Interface Q3 connects the equipment to an Operation System of local networks as specified by IEEE802.3Standards.

Connection to the network is established via the QX & SYNC access module that permits the connectionto the thin Ethernet cable (10 base 2 ) or to 10 BT interface.

Other equipment can be connected via the DCC channels provided by the SOH bytes of the synchronousframe (D1–D12).

In this manner management operations can be carried out from a Center (Operation System) towardsseveral and different configured equipment. This facilitates initial turn–on and maintenance operations onthe network equipment (see the functions of interface F).The operations are detailed in the Operation System Handbook.

R–ECT Remote network management

If the R–ECT Craft Terminal SW Package has been loaded it is possible to perform a remote managementon up to 31 NEs trough the F interface . The Management operations are those carried out from an OS,exception made for the SW Download.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

258

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Unit Management

This operation is carried out by a microprocessor (CPU) which acquires data and makes it available to allthe interfaces. To carry out these functions CPU acts also as a BUS CONTROL LOGIC and useMEMORIES.

CPU use a 2MHz clock internally generated .

The Bus Control Logic handles the data exchange modes between the unit devices. It also handles theRESET logic of the unit devices (CPU included). The Reset logic is enabled:

• by pressing push–button (12)

• after software command from Craft Terminal or Operation System

• after having turned on the equipment

• when unit power decrease below a fixed threshold

• when unit internal alarm is detected.

The local alarm lights up the red alarm indicating LED (1).

The reset command activates LEDs (1) and (7).

Various types of memories reside on the unit:

• Boot Memories , 1 Mbytes FEPROM

• Pluggable Memories, 16 Mbytes FEPROM, 8 Mbytes RAM

Connectors are also provided to install the MEMORY EXPANSION modules.

The FLASH (FEPROM) memories are used to load software during the installation, operation andmaintenance phases. In this manner the equipment’s software release is updated in accordance withproduct evolution.

The power supply present at the input (+5.3V, –5.5V, +12.1V) are protected by fuses.

The +V and –V distributed to the internal circuit are controlled and when decrease below the threshold,the detection contribute to generate the internal Local alarm.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

259

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

EU

AP

LUG

GA

BLE

ALA

RM

INT.

INT

ER

FAC

EE

QU

IPM

EN

T S

OU

NIT

SD

IALO

G

TO

/FR

OM

UN

ITS

AN

DF

UT

UR

EB

US

TE

RM

INA

TIO

N

O–I

EC

B

CK

O–L

NO

–IE

CB

CK

O–N

TR

IBU

TAR

IES

SW

ITC

HM

AN

AG

EM

EN

TP R O T E C T

CR

U S

WIT

CH

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

MS

Wi

1–8

OS

WC

AO

SW

CB

SW

CK

MN

OS

Wi 1

–10

PO

WE

R S

UP

PLY

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

PFA

IL–1

–3

TO

/FR

OM

CR

U

FR

OM

/TR

IB.

TO

SW

ITC

HM

OD

ULE

SA

ND

UN

ITS

FR

OM

PO

WE

RS

UP

PLY

ALA

RM

IN

TE

RFA

CE

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

PW

AN

DO

R

ALI

MI

FR

OM

ALA

RM

INT.

TY

PE

OF

SW

ITC

HIN

G

TY

PE

OF

MA

TR

IXE

S

PR

ES

EN

CE

OF

UN

ITS

CT

YP

ES

1–3

CA

RE

Mi 1

–26

FR

OM

UN

IT

CT

YP

EM

1–2

D E T E C T O R S

STA

TIO

NS

ALA

RM

SG

AT

HE

RIN

GC

PI 1

–8

SE

ND

ING

ALA

RM

SIG

NA

LLIN

G

CP

O1–

3

PC

HA R A L L E L

O N T R A C T

A N D L I N G

INT

ER

F. I/

O

INTC

NU

RG

IND

TO

RC

TAN

CT

UP

RE

MO

TE

ALA

RM

S

UP

ALA

RM

INT.

RU

RG

RN

UR

GM

RA

CK

LE

D A

LAR

MS

RE

MO

TE

IN

VE

NT

OR

YT

O/F

RO

MU

NIT

S A

ND

BU

ST

ER

MIN

AT

ION

25M

Hz

RE

SE

T

12R

ES

ET

INT

ER

FAC

E

FLO

CA

LT

ER

MIN

AL

9

INT

ER

FAC

EQ

2M

ED

IAT

ION

DE

VIC

E

QX

& S

YN

C

INT

ER

FAC

EQ

3O

PE

RA

TIO

NS

YS

TE

M

INT

ER

FAC

EA

/P

LED

MA

NA

GE

ME

NT

1011

7U

RG

6N

UR

G

5A

TT

D

4A

BN

3IN

D

2

LOC

AL

ALA

RMRE

SE

T

+V –V

GN

D

–5.5

V

+5.

3V

+12

.1V

PO

WE

R

SU

PP

LY

INT

ER

FAC

ES

1D

RO

P–S

HE

LFD

IALO

G

L1–I

EC

B

CK

1–L

N1–

IEC

BC

K1–

N

INT

ER

FAC

EI

1+1

SM

EC

NO

T O

PE

RA

TIV

ES

PI–

CP

E–A

CT

ME

MO

RIE

S16

Mby

te F

EP

RO

M8M

byte

s R

AM

BO

OT

ME

MO

RIE

1Mby

tes

FE

PR

OM

INT

ER

FAC

ED

DE

BU

GG

ER

7C

LOC

K S

OU

RC

E

QX

& S

YN

C

FU

SE

S+

V –V

INT

ER

NA

L

1

CLO

CK

/ C

ALE

ND

AR

C

UR

GR

EM

OT

E A

LAR

M

CA

ND

RA

CK

LA

MP

S

BU

S C

ON

TR

OL

LOG

IC

CP

U W

ITH

CP

O 8

(NO

T O

PE

RA

TIV

E)

Figure 98. Block diagram : Equipment Controller SMEC 2A8R + 16F

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

260

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.16 Power Supply unit

(See Figure 99. on page 261 )

The Power supply unit converts the voltage received from a –48/–60 Vdc battery into three Vdc +5.3V,–5.5V and –12.1 V voltages (stabilized and galvanically isolated from the battery).

There are two decoupler of the Battery inputs (–BATT1 and –BATT2), thus permitting a stand–by powersupply.

The following access points can be accessed on the power supply unit’s front coverplate:

• ON/OFF switch (2)

• green LED indicating the regular operation of the unit (1)

As shown in Figure 6.59 on page 188, the OR’ed and fuse–protected battery voltages are applied to theinput filter through the ON/OFF switch.This filter must protect the power supply unit against abrupt variations or battery noise.

The voltage present after the ON/OFF switch is utilized as auxiliary power supply for the Pulse WidthModulation circuit during the circuit switch–ON phase.

When the circuit is at steady state, the power supply is obtained after the power switch.

A voltage comparator inhibits the circuit operation if the input voltage value drops below an establishedthreshold.

The Pulse Width Modulation circuit establishes the conduction time of two power transistors thusmodulating the power sent to the outputs.

Modulation occurs through regulation loops detecting the two currents and voltages I1, I2, V1 and V2 atoutputs –5.5 and +5.3V.

The voltages are then rectified, filtered and output. The –12.1V voltage transits through the seriesregulator which maintains the voltages and currents at the established output value.

The three voltages output are delivered decoupled and stabilized. This solution permits to parallel severalunits without causing interferences.

During regular operating conditions, green LED is ON and a +5V voltage is present at the PFAILoutput pin.

If one of the voltages drops below an established threshold, a command is generated which reversiblyswitch–off the unit. Moreover the green LED goes off and the PFAIL alarm arises (PFAIL output open).

An excessive increase of one of the output voltages generates the V3, or V4, or V5 commands. The lattercause the irreversible protection circuit to intervene.This condition:

• irreversibly blocks the unit operation

• switches off the green LED

• transmits the PFAIL alarm.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

261

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

BATTERY

–BA

TT

1F

–BA

TT

2

AU

XIL

IAR

YP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

SE

LFP

OW

ER

SU

PP

LY

2

PU

LSE

WID

TH

MO

DU

LAT

ION

I1

+5,

3V

SE

RIE

SR

EG

ULA

TO

R

+12

,1V

V1

V

V3

V4

TO

ALL

UN

ITS

RE

GU

LAT

ION

LOO

P

V2

I1 I2 V1

V2

IRR

EV

ER

SIB

LEP

RO

TE

CT

ION

V3

V4

V5

RE

MO

TE

INV

EN

TO

RY

EQ

. CO

NT

R.

–5,5

V

V5

I2

> =1

PFA

IL

1

EQ

.C

ON

TR

.

DE

CO

UP

LER

STA

BIL

IZE

R

DE

CO

UP

LER

STA

BIL

IZE

R

DE

CO

UP

LER

STA

BIL

IZE

R

DE

CO

UP

LER

DE

CO

UP

LER

+B

AT

T1

+B

AT

T2

Figure 99. Block Diagram: Power Supply Unit

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

262

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.17 DS Futurebus Termination sub–unit

(See Figure 100. ).

This subunit adapts the levels on the LIECB and NIECB channels and the relevant CKL and CKN clocksconcerned with informative data exchanged between the Equipment Controller unit and the Card Controller subunit mounted on the various units of the equipment.

Level adaptation is also carried out on the OHBUS streams exchanged between the units.

A serial EPROM is available for the Remote Inventory containing equipment inventory data (P/N., serialnumber, construction date).

The sub–unit stores the ”MAC Address” of the equipment utilized for the TMN configuration.

Furthermore the Unit allows the transit of the LIECB channel that flows between SMEC unit and theDROP SHELF 2 Mbit/s Tributaries.

OH–BUS 5

F

TO VARIOUS UNITS

OH–BUS 1

L–IECB

CK–L

N–IECB

CK–N

VOLTAGEREGULATOR

+2V+5VFROM

POWERSUPPLY

TO ALL UNITS

OH–BUS 5

F

OH–BUS 1

L–IECB

CK–L

N–IECB

CK–N

VOLTAGEREGULATOR

+2V

TO VARIOUS UNITS

TO ALL UNITS

TO EQUIPMENTCONTROLLERREMOTE

INVENTORY

CKL

DL

CKN

DN

TO DROP SHELFFROM

S–CKL

S–DL

S–CKN

S–DN

SMEC

Figure 100. Block diagram: Futurebus Termination

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

263

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.18 Alarm Interface Access Module


This Alarm Interface Access Module unit includes:

– AND/OR circuit.

– Future Bus Termination ( not used in this release).

– Remote Inventory. ( not used in this release).

– MAC Address function ( not used in this release).

– R.A.B. interface towards Rack Lamps.

– Remote alarms interface.

– Parallel Input/Serial Output MFAIL Alarms ( not used in this release).

• – AND/OR circuit.

The function of this unit is of detecting power supply failures on the station batteries or on the assemblies,and of processing the criteria coming from the Equipment Controller.

These alarm statuses control the generation of the rack lamps command and remote alarms criteria.

The unit is powered from a Service Battery.Through setting options it can be adapted to the–48 or –60 V voltages.In case of faulty of the Service Battery that feeds this unit in which is housed the ANDOR function, thePWANDOR criteria is generated and sent to the Equipment Controller unit to light up LED (6) NURG seeFigure 30. on page 89. and to light up the alarm ”LB” (Battery Control Failure / Missing) on the OperatorManual ”A.S. & Control” application.

The alarm generated following station battery failure is due to a voltage drop of approx. 20% vs. nominalvalue.The alarm disappears upon restoring the nominal value, less the allowed tolerances.

The failure of both station batteries generates an AND criteria and the TAND remote alarm.Moreover, the AND criteria is OR’ed with the CAND criteria received from the Equipment Controller unit.

The failure of only one battery generates the OR criteria which, upon being inhibited by the AND criteria,delivers the TOR remote alarm and the ORALIM criteria to the Equipment Controller unit that lights up thealarm ”LF” (Battery – Fuse/ Broken alarm) on the Operator Manual ”A.S. & Control” application.

The UP criteria is received from the Equipment Controller unit and when OR’ed with EUA, EquipmentController presence (settable) generates the AU signal.The AND, OR and AU criteria are each stored in an appropriate memory circuit.

The rack lamps receive the RNURG and RURG output commands. The RURG command is the sum ofthe power supply AND and AU criteria, and both are accessed at output A of the memory which corresponds to the non–stored output.The alarm statuses can be memorized through the C command activated through push–button (10) onthe Equipment Controller unit.

In this case the output A of the store is de–activated thus causing the RURG and/or RNURG criteria todisappear, while output M is activated thus concurring to the formation of the M criteria.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

264

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

If the alarm disappears all the criteria and remote alarms that might be active are automaticallyde–activated.

The RURG, RNURG, M alarms operate like the alarms of the Equipment Controller towards the top rackLEDs.

• Remote inventory ( not used in this release).

This function manages the Equipment data.This function is performed by a serial EEPROM that stores the management data of the Equipment.For this circuit is implemented a protection against short circuit by means of fuse resistors.

• MAC Address ( not used in this release).

This function manages the Equipment LAN address.This function is performed by a serial EEPROM that stores the Lan Address of the Equipment.For this circuit is implemented a protection against short circuit by means of fuse resistors.

• R/M interface

This function provides the necessary criteria to manage Rack Lamps.

• Remote Alarms

This function provides the necessary informations towards a 15 contacts connector to manage remotealarms.

• Parallel input / Serial output module fail alarms ( not used in this release).

This function provides the alarm faults of all Access Module towards Equipment Controller.

• Switch Unit/Alarm Interface Access Module Presetting

The same Craft Terminal SW packet can be used for both Equipment 1651 SM ”Old Practice” that foreseethe Switch Unit (that is used for the EPS N+1 for the 34/45 or 140/155 electrical Trib) and for the ”NewPractice” version of the same Equipment that doesn’t house the former unit but however performs thesame protection functions by means the dedicated Access Module sub units. On the Craft Terminal thesame slot that allows to SW equip the Switch Unit is used to equip the type of Alarm Int. Acc. Module tobe used. This slot on the Craft Terminal becomes active only if an Hw setting has been made onthe Alarm Interface Access Module Unit .

Doing the HW presetting for the Alarm Interface Access Module unit as indicated in the Hardware settingSection of this Technical Handbook the Subrack SW Configuration selection about the Switch Unit/AlarmInterface Access Module slot on the Craft Terminal, is enabled and the User can choose if the EPS is tobe performed or not.

The HW presetting on the Alarm Interface Access Module Unit must be made when the EPS1+N protection for the 34/45 or 140/155 electrical Tributaries is to be performed.

This unit is compliant with IEC–950 norms on electrical safety.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

265

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

M–BATT1

POWERACCESSMODULE

AND

–BATT2

OR<= 1

&

CAND

ORALIMI

C

–VSERV

+VSERV

–5V

PWANDOR

AND<= 1

EUA

UP

RM

INTERF.

<= 1

& M

MAU

<= 1

<= 1

A

M

A

M

RURG

RNURG

M

REMOTEALARMS

MAC ADDRESS

REMOTE INVENTORY

CONNECTOR

CONNECTOR

TAND

RMINTERF.

CONNECTOR

TOR

TOR

C

EQCONTR.

EQCONTR.

URG

NURG

INTIND

LOS Q3

TORC

TANC

TUP

FROM

TO

GND

–5VEQ

CONTR.

TO / FROM

(not used)

FROMACCESSMODULE

MFAIL

PISO

(not used)

EQCONTR.

TO / FROM

OH–BUSL–IECBCKLN–IECB

CKN

VOLTAGEREGULATOR

+2V+5V

OH–BUSL–IECB

CKLN–IECB

CKN

VOLTAGEREGULATOR

+2V+5V

TO AGGREGATES

TO ALLUNITS

TO ALLUNITS

(not used)

Figure 101. Block diagram: Alarm Interface Access Module

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

266

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.19 Qx & Synchronism Access Module


This subunit is available in three versions:

Qx & Synch. 120 Access Module

Qx & Synch. 120 ohm or 1.0/2.3 interface

Qx & Synch. T43

The above modules are functionally identical except for the type of connector used for synchronismsignals connection.

The Qx & SYNCH. ACCESS MODULE makes the functionality of three different circuits:

QB3* interface (10–B2)

Synch. interface (SYNC)

Q2–LTS interface (Q INT)

Another circuit, named CARD FAIL ALARM that has the purpose of monitoring the functionality of the card,

is foreseen.

QB3* interface (10–B2)

The purpose of the QB3* interface is to convert the signals present on the back panel connectors to the

10Base2 option for LAN interfaces. The implementation is compliant with the IEE 802.3 standard for

CSMA/CD type of local area networks.

The ADM uses this module when the plant requires to connect a LAN cable to reach the centralized

Operation System: they can be directly connected to the same office LAN or can be reached through an

intermediate gateway equipment.

BNC thin–wire connectors constitutes the LAN side of QX module. They are compliant with the standard

10base2 electrical characteristics and can be directly attached to the LAN coax cable. The B2 connectors

are located on the front cover of the unit.

The QB3* Interface connects the equipment to the Telecommunication Management Network by meansthe Thin Ethernet (10 base 2) cable through a BNC female connector.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

267

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The Qx Interface consists of the following functional circuits:

1 ) DC/DC Converter and isolation transformers. They establish an electric isolation between thecoaxial cable and the transceiver cable.

2 ) Transceiver: it carries out the following functions as specified by the IEEE 802.3 standard(Ethernet):

a ) Transmit: the data received from the equipment (DO–A, DO–B differential signals) are level adapted in compliancy with the coaxial cables utilized.

b ) Receive: the data transiting over the coaxial cable are sent to the equipment (DI–A, DI–Bdifferential signals)

c ) Collision detection: should two or more stations collide (following two or more stationssimultaneously transmitting) then the transmission of the CI–A and CI–B signals will fail.

d ) Check length of the transmitted packets: a jabber timer interrupts transmission should thelength of the data packets exceed the maximum allowed standard. Failure of CI signaltransmission is detected.

The Control–out signal (CO), specified by the IEEE 802.3 standard to enable/disable transmission, is notutilized and the module is always enabled (see Standard should signal fail).

Synchronism interface

This interface is realized by connectors that allow the connections between external synchronism and theinternal synchronisms according to ITU–T G.703 for 2 MHz signals , towards and from CRUs.As already specified the connectors are of the following type:One 120 ohms connectors mounted on the ”Qx & Synch. 120 Acc. Mod.” (see Figure 102. on page268 ).Three 1.0/2.3 75 ohms connectors mounted on the ”Qx & Synch. 1.0/2.3 Acc. Mod.”Three Type 43 75 ohms connectors mounted on the ”Qx & Synch. T43 Acc. mod.”

Q2–LTS Interface

Q2–LTS interface is a RS 485 interface that allows the dialogue from EC to a mediation device utilized fornetwork management operation (transfer and receive configuration data, alarm status and so on).SeeFigure 102. on page 268.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

268

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

DO–A

DO–B

DI–A

DI–B

CI–A

CI–B

CO–A

CO–B

COAXIALCABLE

TRANSCEIVER

+12V +9V

THINETHERNET

TO EQUIPMENT

CONTROLLER

TO EQUIPMENT

CONTROLLER

Q2 LTSINTERFACE

SYNCHRONISM

I /O

TX A

RX A

CK A

TX B

TX SH

RX B

RX SH

CKB

GND

CKA IN P

CKB IN N

CK OUT P

TO CRU

CKA IN N

CKB IN P

CK OUT N

3

QB3*

1

2

Figure 102. Block diagram: Qx & Synch. Access Module

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

269

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.20 Qx 10 BT & Synchronism Access Module


This unit is available in three versions:

Qx 10 BT & Synch. 120 Access Module

Qx 10 BT & Synch. 1.0/2.3

Qx 10 BT & Synch. T43

The above modules are functionally identical except for the type of connector used for synchronismsignals connection.

The Qx 10 BT & SYNCH. ACCESS MODULE makes the functionality of three different circuits:

10 BT interface

Synch. 120 ohm / 1.0–2.3 interface (SYNC)

Q2–LTS interface (Q int)

Another circuit, named Card Fail Alarm that has the purpose of monitoring the functionality of the card,

is foreseen.

– 10 BT interface

The10 BT function provides the electrical and functional interface between the IEEE 802.3 standardAttachment Unit Interface (AUI) present on the back panel and the Twisted Pair cable.

This interface implements the Medium Attachment Unit (MAU) function for the Twisted pair Mediumas specified by the supplement to the IEEE 802.3 standard ( type 10 base T ).

The ADM uses this module when the plant requires to connect a LAN cable to reach the centralizedOperation System: they can be directly connected to the same office LAN or can be reached throughan intermediate gateway equipment.

The Twisted Pair side ( BT connector) of the Qx 10–BT & Synch access module is constituted byan 8 pins RJ45 connector. It is compliant to the electrical characteristics of the 10 base T standardand can be directly connected to the Twisted Pair cable.

The Qx Interface consists of the following functional circuits:

1 ) A specialized signal transformer provides electrical isolation between the I/O differential pair ofthe Twisted Pair and the Twisted Pair Interface (TPI) internal circuits . Moreover it provides alow–pass filter block on the TPI side signals.

2 ) Card fail alarm : it monitors the output voltage of he DC/DC converter. In case of fault of theDC/DC converter the circuit provides an alarm (MFAIL) towards ALARM INTERFACE ACCESSMODULE (not operative).

3 ) Power supply controller : interrupts the transceiver power voltage if the Equipment Controlleris extracted

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

270

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4 ) Transceiver: it carries out the following functions as specified by the IEEE 802.3 standard (10Base T):

a ) Transmitter: it accepts data streams from the AUI interface and transmits it towards theTwisted Pair cable.

b ) Receiver: it receives data stream from the Twieted Pair cable and sends it to the AUIinterface.

c ) Collision detection:it indicates to the AUI interface if there is a collision on the Twisted Paircable

d ) The transceiver provides a number of features including transmit digital predistorsion,receiver squelch, link status indication with automatic Twisted Pair receive polaritydetedction /correction and SQE test.

– Synchronism interface

This interface is realized by a 9 pin SUB–D connector (cod. 040.655.101) that allows the connectionsbetween external synchronism and the internal synchronisms according to ITU–T G.703 for 2 MHzsignals with 120 ohm impedance, towards and from CRU.Three 1.0/2.3 75 ohms connectors mounted on the ”Qx & Synch. 1.0/2.3 Acc. Mod.”Three Type 43 75 ohms connectors mounted on the ”Qx & Synch. T43 Acc. mod.”

– Q2–LTS Interface (not operative in this release)

Q2–LTS interface is a RS 485 interface that allows the dialogue from EC to a mediation device utilizedfor network management operation (transfer and receive configuration data, alarm status and so on).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

271

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

DO–A

DO–B

DI–A

DI–B

CI–A

CI–B

INTERFACE

TWISTED

PAIR

+5V +5V

TO EQUIPMENTCONTROLLER

TO EQUIPMENTCONTROLLER

Q2

INTERFACE

SYNCHRONISMI /O

TX ARX ACK ATX BTX SHRX B

RX SHCKB

GND

CKA IN P/N

CKB IN P/NCK OUT P/N

TO CRU

+12 VFROM EQUIPMENTCONTROLLER

TPRXP

TPRXN

TPTXP

TPTXN

Figure 103. Block diagram: Qx 10–BT & Synch. Access Module

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

272

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.21 Power and Housekeeping Access Module

This module provides an external access for the Equipment Controller ( Houskeeping contacts) and thepower supply for the DC/DC converters. See Figure 104.

The module houses:

• Battery access

Connectors (1) on the front panel delivers the station voltage to the Power Supply units.Two E.M.C. filters are placed between the battery voltage and ground.

• Housekeeping contacts

Front –panel connector (2) provides connections for the parallel contacts (housekeeping).

Two criteria are sent to the Alarm Interface to activate the AND/OR function.

EMCFILTERS

EMCFILTERS

+ BATT1

– BATT1

+ BATT2

– BATT2

FROMSTATION

BATTERIES

1

CPI 1CPI 2CPI 3CPI 4CPI 5CPI 6CPI 7CPI 8CPO 1CPO 2CPO 3CPO 4CPO 5CPO 6CPO 7

2

TO/FROMSTATION

TO/FROM

EQ. CONTROLLER

TO POWER SUPPLY

TO POWER SUPPLY

TO ANDOR

TO ANDOR

Figure 104. Power Access Module

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

273

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.22 Power and Housekeeping Access Module/2

(See Figure 105. on page 273 )

The module houses:

• Battery access

Connectors (1) on the front panel deliver the station voltage to the Power Supply units.Two E.M.C. filters are placed between the battery voltage and ground.

• Housekeeping contacts

Front –panel connector (2) provide connection for the parallel contacts (housekeeping).

When using this module the AND/OR function is available by strapping.

EMCFILTERS

EMCFILTERS

+ BATT1

– BATT1

+ BATT2

– BATT2

FROMSTATION

BATTERIES

1

CPI 1CPI 2CPI 3CPI 4CPI 5CPI 6CPI 7CPI 8CPO 1CPO 2CPO 3CPO 4CPO 5CPO 6CPO 7

2

TO/FROMSTATION

TO/FROM

EQ. CONTROLLER

TO POWER SUPPLY

TO POWER SUPPLY

TO ANDOR

TO ANDOR

SZ

SZ

Figure 105. Power Access Module

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

274

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.23 Auxiliary Access Module

This module provides an external access for the AUX/EOW unit.

Three interfaces are present :

• 64 Kbit connections

• V11 connections

• EOW extension

3.2.24 Tributary Access Module sub–unit

The sub–units connect the tributary signals to the relevant units and switche onto the stand–by tributaryunit following switching command.

The type of sub–units used depend on the bit–rate of the tributary signal, on the impedance, on theconnectors and on the K20 standard protection.

3.2.24.1 21x2/1.5 Mbit/s Access Module

(See Figure 106. on page 275 ).

The description is applicable to the following kind of physical connection:

– 2 Mbit/s coax. connectors (75 ohm) – With Micro Siemens connectors 1.0 /2.3

– 2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm – K20 – 120 ohm modules with Sub–D connectors and K20 protection

– 2 Mbit/s T43 (75 ohm) – 75 ohm module with Type T43 connector

– 2 Mbit/s 120 ohm – 120 ohm module with Sub–D connector

This subunit is available in two versions:

21x2 Mb/s Protected Access Module – 120 ohm

21x2 Mb/s Unprotected Access Module – 120 ohm

The 21x2 Mb/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 120 ohm is a unit that makes the connection from the 2 Mb/s BackPanel signals to the external signals in accordance with ITU–T G.703 for 120 ohm impedance.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

275

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The blocks of the switch module are:

• 2 Mb/s Analog interface (120 or 75 ohm) towards Tx and Rx physical connector access.

• K20 protection against lightning (only for Sub–unit with K20 indication)

• The 1+N EPS protection is SW set

• EPS switches, both for Tx and Rx side.The MSW command, coming from the Equipment Controller, selects the connection with theworking or with the spare tributary unit.

• –Power failure detection and alarm generation. The Switch circuit have power protection, madeby fuse resistors with power failure detection and alarm generation. When power failure occursa alarm condition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE unit.

The 21x2 Mb/s UNPROT. ACC. MOD. 120 ohm is a unit that makes the connection from the 2 Mb/s BackPanel signals to the external signals in accordance with ITU–T G.703 for 120 ohm impedance. It usesthe same pcb of the 21x2 Mb/s PROT. ACC. MOD. 120 ohm with jumping resistors mounted instead ofrelays when a unprotected configuration is foreseen.The CARD FAIL ALARM and the SWITCH DRIVER circuits are not implemented on this unit.

2 Mbit/s #1 INANALOG

INTERFACE

2 Mbit/s #1 OUT

EPS

D2E TO WORKING TRIB.

D2ESPTO SPARE TRIB.

D2U FROM WORKING TRIB.

D2USPFROM SPARE TRIB.

MSW FROM EQUIPMENT

CONTROLLER

FUSES+5,3V

–5,5V

+5V

–5VPOWER SUPPLY

ALARMDETEC.

MFAILTO ALARM

INT.ACCESSMODULE

Figure 106. 21x2 Mbit/s Access Module block diagram (one of the 21 switch functions performed)

N.B. 21x2 Mbit/s Access Module (120 Ohm and 120 Ohm K20 type) can be used for 21x1.5 Mbit/sTributary connection too.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

276

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.24.2 TRMUX + 5x2 Mbit/s Access Module

(See Figure 107. )

The description is applicable to the following kind of physical connection :

– TRMUX & 5x2 Mbit/s Prot. Acc. Mod.120 Ohm – With SUB–D connectors for 2 Mbit/s signals and Siemens connector for 34 Mbit/s signal

– TRMUX & 5x2 Mbit/s Prot. Acc. Mod. 75 Ohm – With Siemens connectors

The functional blocks of each module are :

• 34 Mbit/s interface towards the Tx and Rx coaxial connectors• 2 Mbit/s interface towards the Tx and Rx SUB–D connectors / coaxial connectors.• The 1+N EPS protection is SW set.• EPS switches, for both Tx and Rx sides.

Two relays, one for Tx side an the other for Rx side , switch the I/O signals towards working orspare tributary.The MSW command sets the relay contacts to + 5 V for main tributary, to 0 V for protection andhigh impedance to have no switching action.

• Power failure detection and alarm generation.The access module has power protection, made by fuse resistors. A power failure detectioncircuit and an alarm generation circuit are present. When power failure occurs an alarmcondition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE subunit.

2 Mbit/s #1 IN

2 Mbit/s #1 OUT

EPS

D2E TO WORKING TRIB.

D2ESP TO SPARE TRIB.

D2U FROM WORKING TRIB.

D2USP FROM SPARE TRIB.

MSW FROM EQUIPMENTCONTROLLER

34 IN

ANALOGINTERFACE

34 OUT

EPS

FUSES+5,3V

–5,5V

+5V

–5V

ALARMDETEC

MFAIL

D34E1Ti ( 34 Mb IN TO WORK. TRIB)D34E1SNi ( 34 Mb IN SPARE N+1) D34E1Si (34 Mb IN SPARE 1+1)

D34U1SNi ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE N+1)

D34U1Si ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE 1+1)

D34U1Ti ( 34 Mb OUT FROM WORK. TRIB

SW

SW

SWITCH

DRIVER

INT.ACCESSMODULE

TO ALARM

Figure 107. TRMUX +5x2 Mbit/s block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

277

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.24.3 34/45 Mbit/s Access Module

(See Figure 108. ).

The description is applicable to:

– 3x34 Mbit/s Access Module T43 – With type 43 connector

– 3x34 Mbit/s Access Module – E – With Micro Siemens connectors 1.0/2.3

The switch module operates on 3x34 Mbit/s and 45 Mbit/s Tributaries. The blocks of each function switchare:

• 34 Mbit/s interface towards the Tx and Rx coaxial connectors• EPS switches, both for Tx and Rx side.

The MSW command, coming from the Equipment Controller, selects the connection with theworking or with the spare tributary unit.In 1+1 EPS the Main trib is connected with the spare and in N+1 EPS up to four workingtributaries are connected with the spare trib through the Access Module.

• The default factory EPS setting is to allow the N+1 protection.• The kind of EPS to activate besides the SW selection carried out by means the Craft

Terminal, must be hardware set on this subunit (see the Hardware setting Section,Table 26. on page 428).

• In order to activate this protection the User must define the consistent Hardware settingalso for the Alarm Interface Access Module. (see the Hardware setting Section, Table 26. onpage 428).

• –Power failure detection and alarm generation. The Switch circuit have power protection, madeby fuse resistors with power failure detection and alarm generation. When power failure occursa alarm condition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE subunit.

The MSW command, coming from Equipment Controller unit, sets the relay contacts. This command isset to + 5 V for main tributary, to 0 V for protection and high impedance to have no switching action.

34 IN

ANALOGINTERFACE

34 OUT

EPS

FUSES+5,3V

–5,5V

+5V

–5V

EPS

SETTING

ALARM

DETEC

MFAIL

D34E1Ti ( 34 Mb IN TO WORK. TRIB)D34E1SNi ( 34 Mb IN SPARE N+1)D34E1Si (34 Mb IN SPARE 1+1)

D34U1SNi ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE N+1)D34U1Si ( 34 Mb OUT SPARE 1+1)

D34U1Ti ( 34 Mb OUT FROM WORK. TRIB

MSW (FROM EC)TO ALARM

INT.ACCESSMODULE

Figure 108. 34 Mbit/s Access Module – Switch block diagram (one of three switch function performed)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

278

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

3.2.24.4 140 Mbit/s Access Module

(See Figure 109. ).

The description is applicable to:

– Access Module 140 Mbit/s K20 – With Siemens Connections and K20 protection

– Access Module 140 Mbit/s T43 – With type 43 connections

– 140 Mbit/s Access Module – With all microsiemens connectors

The Access module operates: on 140 Mbit/s and STM1 electrical tributary.The blocks of the switch module are:

• 140 Mb/s interface towards the Rx and Tx coaxial connectors• K20 protection against lightning (only for sub–unit with K20 indication)• EPS switches, both for Tx and Rx side.

The MSW command, coming from the Equipment Controller selects the connection with theworking or the spare tributary unit.In 1+1 EPS the spare trib is connected through the spare Unit and in N+1 EPS the spare trib.is connected with the working tributaries through the Access Module.

• The default factory EPS setting is to allow the N+1 protection.• The kind of EPS to activate besides the SW selection carried out by means the Craft

Terminal, must be hardware set on this subunit (see the Hardware setting Section,Table 26. on page 428).

• In order to activate this protection the User must define the consistent Hardware settingalso for the Alarm Interface Access Module. (see the Hardware setting Section, Table 26. onpage 428).

• –Power failure detection and alarm generation. The Switch circuit have power protection, madeby fuse resistors with power failure detection and alarm generation. When power failure occursa alarm condition ( MFAIL) is sent to the ALARM INTERFACE ACCESS MODULE subunit.

The +5V and –5.5V input power supply are fuse–protected.

K20PROTEC.

140 IN

ANALOGINTERFACE

140 OUT

EPS

MSW FROM EQUIPMENTCONTROLLER

FUSES+5,3V

–5,5V

+5V

–5V

J1

J6 EPS

SETTING

G703CMI

REGEN.

ALARMDETEC

MFAIL

D140ETi (140 Mb IN)D140ESNi (140 Mb IN SPARE N+1)D34E1Si (140 Mb IN SPARE 1+1)

D140UTi (140 Mb OUT)

D140USNi (140 Mb OUT SPARE N+1)D34U1Si (140 Mb OUT SPARE 1+1)

TO ALARMINT.

ACCESSMODULE

Figure 109. 140 Mbit/s Access Module – Switch block diagram

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

279

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as standard values

Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values

4.1 General Characteristics

Optical Line bit rate (aggregates) 622 Mbit/s (STM–4) or 2488 Mbit/s (STM–16)

Optical tributaries bit rate 155 Mbit/s (STM–1)

Electrical tributaries bit rate 140 Mbit/s or 155 Mbit/s software settable,34 Mbit/s,45 Mbit/s, 2 Mbit/s, 1.5 Mbit/s

Type of optical fiber Single–mode, Rec.G.652 / G.653 compliant

Aggregates Wavelength

(Central, nominal)

1310 nm (2nd window) and 1550 nm (3rd window)

Application code for Aggregate Interfaces

(see Table 15. on page 284 up to Table 16.

on page 286).

S4.1, L4.1, L4.2 , L4.1 JE, L4.2 JE – S16.1, L16.1,L16.2, L16.2 JE.

Coloured Aggregates Wavelength (WDMapplications)

1531.90 – 1533.47 – 1535.04 –1536.61 – 1538.19 –1539.77 – 1541.35 – 1542.94 (nm)

1547.72 – 1549.32 – 1550.92 –1552.52 – 1554.13 –1555.75 – 1557.36 – 1558.98 (nm)

Application codes for Aggregate Interfaces(Table 1/G.957)

S 16.1, L 16.1, L 16.2, L16.2 JE–1 (1900 ps/nm.), L16.2JE–1.1, L16.2 JE–2 (3000 ps/nm), L16.3 JE–3 (4000ps/nm)

L16.2 JE WDM (6400 ps/nm)

L16.2 JE WDM (12800 ps/nm)

Standard applied:

Electrical Interfaces Rec. G.703

SDH frame and multiplexing structure Recs. G.707, G.708, G.709

Equipment function Recs. G.782, G.783, G.784

Optical Interfaces Recs. G.957, G.958, G.653

Transmission quality Rec. G.784, G.826

System management functions (SW) Recs. X.733, X.734, X.736

Jitter and wander Recs. G.783, G.823, G.825

MS SPRING Protection Recs. G.841

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

280

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Drop–Insert capacity

140 Mbit/s, DVB, 155 Mbit/s Tributaries 8

34, 45 Mbit/s Tributaries 24

2 Mbit/s Tributaries 63 in the Line Shelf and further 3x63 2Mbit/s Tribssupplied by 1641SM–D Drop Shelf

Tributari 1.5 Mbit/s 63

Cross–connection

Level VC4 Aggregate to Aggregate (only with Full Matrix)Aggregate to TributaryTributary to Tributary (only with Full Matrix)

Level VC3 and VC12 With Full MatrixIn four VC4 of East Aggregate, four VC4 of the WestAggregate (N.B.) eight Tributaries’ VC4s. Aggregate to AggregateBetween VC in one side Aggregate.Tributaries to TributaryAggregate to Tributary

N.B. – With STM–16 Aggregate, also 8 distributed VC4 on the aggregate sides.

Worst transfer delay <100µsec. per traffic pathway ( aggregate to tributary)

Protections 1651 SM / 1661 SMC ; 1641SM–D (as for asapplicable)

SL–APS. Simplified linear APS for 1+1 unidirectionalline protection for aggregate and STM1 optical andelectrical tributary. Not revertive.

2 MS SPRING. Only for 1661SM–C, using 8 Highpriority AU4.

1+1 EPS for CRU (not revertive) and FULL MATRIX(revertive or not revertive) units

SNCP Unidirectional Subnetwork ConnectionProtection on 2 fibers in ring networks (TU and AU4). Revertive or not revertive

TRIBUTARIES EPS:

– 2/1.5 Mb/s:

• 1+N (3 max.) revertive.– 1615SM/1661SM–C

• 1+N (9 max.) revertive.– 1641SM–D

– 34 Mb/s or 140 Mb/s or STM1 electrical:

• 2 benchs with 1+N (4 max), revertive .And/or:

• 2 benchs with 1+1 EPS ,revertive .

2+1 power supply LINE SHELF protection

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

281

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

1+1 power supply DROP SHELF protection

DVB Tribs are not EPS protected.

Management Interface

Local: Craft Interface(Personal Computer)

RS2329–pin D, PC compatible 9600 B/S

Remote Craft Interface(Personal Computer)

IRS232 9–pin D, PC compatible 9600 B/S it handles up toother 31 NEs via DCC.

Remote: TransmissionManagement Network(TMN) Interface

Qx G.773 QB3 10 base 2 and base T, QECC G.784

Protocol Stack/Information Modelmessages

In this release QB3*/QECC* proprietary(Alcatel 7.1 – 7.2 layers are adopted)

Dual addressing to O.S.: It allows O.S redundancy

Local and Remote ManagementInterfaces functions

Alarms status checks, equipment, connection and TMNconfigurations, administrative function for security(password and operator profile), maintenance memory forall the equipment events, monitoring on performance.

Equipment software download on non–volatile memorieswithout traffic interruption.

Unit and Equipment acknowledgement Through Remote Inventory(Company id, Unit Type, Unit Part Number, Serial PartNumber, Software Part Number, CLEI code,Manufacturing Plant Date identifier, Date).For detail refer to Operator Handbook .

Unit substitution characteristics

Tributary unit without interfering on other channels

Spare unit without interfering on traffic

Output Housekeeping signals andRemote Alarms

outputs CPO, not operative in this release + remotealarms.

Max. guaranteed current with closedcondition

50 mA

Max. allowed voltage with open condition –72 V

Voltage drop vs. ground with closedcondition

–2 V 0 V

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

282

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Input Housekeeping signals 8 inputs CPI (only three available for the customer)

Max. guaranteed current with closedcondition

3mA

Max. allowed voltage with open condition –72 V

Voltage drop vs. ground with closedcondition

–2 V 0 V

4.1.1 Electrical and optical safety

Protection against lightning surges K20 (optional)

Optical Safety According to IEC 825 and ITU–T Rec. G.958 regardingALS. WARNING: Booster +17 dBm is a Class 3BLASER. All Other Optical Interfaces are Class 3ALASERS (Rec. IEC–825).

Electrical Safety

Safety status of the connections with otherequipment

TNV (Telecommunication Network Voltage) for Remotealarms, Housekeeping (CPO,CPI) , Rack lamp (RM)and for Tributary connections if K20 protected. SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) for all the other.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

283

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.2 Unit Characteristics

The following specification are in addition to those specified in para. 4.1 on page 279.

4.2.1 STM–4 Aggregate units

Types of optical interfaces S–4.1, L–4.1, L–4.2 or L–4.2JE. Characteristics are given inTable 15.

Optical connectors FC/PC, DIN or SC/PC.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

284

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 15. Parameters specified for STM–4 Optical Interfaces

CHARACTERISTICS UNIT VALUES

DIGITAL SIGNAL STM–4 according to G.707 and G.958

Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 622.080

Application code (table 1 / G.957) S–4.1 L–4.1 L–4.2 L–4.2 JE

Operating wavelength range 1274–1356 1280–1335 1480–1580 1530–1560

TRANSMITTER AT REFERENCE POINT S

Source type MLM SLM SLM SLM

Special characteristics:

• maximum RMS width• maximum –20 dB width• minimum side mode suppression ratio

nmnmdB

2.5––

–130

–130

–0,830

Mean launched power:

• maximum• minimum

dBmdBm

–8–15

+2–3

+2–3

+2–3

Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 10 10 10

OPTICAL PATH BETWEEN S AND R

Attenuation range dB 0–12 10–27 10–24 10–28

Maximum dispersion ps/nm 84 300 1900 2400

Minimum optical return loss of cable plant at S, including anyconnectors

dB 14 20 24 24

Maximum discrete reflectancebetween S and R

dB –20 –25 –27 –27

RECEIVER AT REFERENCE POINT R

Type of detector InGaAs PIN InGaAs PIN InGaAs PIN InGaAs PIN

Mean received power @ BER=1E –10: dB 1 1 1 1

• minimum (sensitivity)• maximum (overload)

dBm

dBm

–28–8

–31–8

–28–8

–32–8

Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 1 1

Maximum reflectance of receivermeasured at R

dB –20 –20 –27 –27

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

285

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.2.2 STM–16 Aggregate units

Types of optical interfaces S–16.1, L–16.1, L–16–2 L–16–2 JE 1,2 and 3.

The single channel optical interface characteristics are given inTable 16.

L–16.2 JE WDM multi channel characteristics are given in Table 17. on page 287

Optical connectors FC/PC, DIN or SC/PC.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

286

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 16. Parameters specified for STM–16 Optical Interfaces (Single Channel).



Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 2 488 320

Application code (table 1 / G.957) S–16.1 L–16.1 L–16.2L–16.2JE1

NB1L–16.2 JE2

NB2L–16.2 JE3

NB3

Operating wavelength range 1270–1360 1280–1335 1500–1580 1530–1560 1550–1560 1550–1560


Source type SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM–IM SLM–IM

Special characteristics:

• maximum RMS width• maximum –20 dB width• minimum side m\ode

suppression ratio

nmnmdB

–130

–130

–130

–0.530

–0.230

–0.230



dBmdBm

0–5

+2–2

+2–2

+4+1

–1–3

–1–3

Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2


Attenuation rangeMaximum dispersion

dBps/nm

0–12100

10–24250

10–241600

13–281900

NB23200

NB34000

Minimum optical return loss of cableplant at S, including any connectors

dB 24 24 24 24 24 24


dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27 –27


Type of detectorInGaAs

PINInGaAs

APDInGaAs

APDInGaAs

APDInGaAs

APDInGaAs

APD

Mean received power @BER=1E–10:


dBmdBm

–180

–27–8

–28–8

–29–9

–29–9

NB3–9

Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 2 2 1 1


dB –27 –27 –27 –27 –27 –27

NB1 To be used with Booster (Optical Amplifier) up to +15 dBm on G.653 fiber or in stand alone configurationNB2 To be used with Booster (Optical Amplifier) on G.652 fiber; attenuation range according to output power of the BoosterNB3 To be used with Booster (Optical Amplifier) in conjunction with the 1664 OA Preamplifier on G.652 and G.653 fiber;

attenuation range according to Booster and Preamplifier power budget. Sensitivity value measured on Preamplifier.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

287

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 17. Parameters specified for STM–16 Optical Interfaces (Multi Channel)


DIGITAL SIGNAL STM–16 according to G.707and G.958

Nominal bit rate kbit/s 2 488 320

Application code (Table 1/G.957) L–16.2 JE WDM 6400


Central operating wavelength nm NB1

Source type ILM

Spectral characteristics :

maximum RMS width

maximum –20 dB width

minimum side mode suppression ratio

nm

nm

dB

–

0.2

30


maximum dBm + 2

minimum dBm – 3

Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2

OPTICAL PATH BETWEEN S’ AND R’

Max loss budget dB NB2

Loss limited distance Km NB2

Maximum chromatic dispersion ps/nm 6400

Dispersion limited distance Km 320

Minimum optical return loss at S’, including anyconnectors

dB 24

Total average PMD (1th order) ps 40


Operating wavelength range nm 1530–1561

Type of detector InGaAs APD

OSNR dB/0.1nm 17 (NB3)

Mean received power @ BER=1E–12 with fiber:

minimum (sensitivity)

maximum (overload)

dBm

dBm

–23

–10

Maximum reflectance of receiver, measured at R dB – 27

NOTES:

NB1 Trasmitters used up to 16 wavelenght Wdm system. The 16 wavelenght are (nm):1547.72, 1549.32, 1550.92, 1552.52, 1554.13, 1555.75, 1557.36, 1558.98 (red)1531.90, 1533.47, 1535.04, 1536.61, 1538.19, 1539.77, 1541.35, 1542.94 (blue)

NB2 Attenuation range and relevant limited distance depend on WDM system specs.NB3 For NOT “Enhanced” 6400 ps/nm Aggregate units is 19 dB/0.1nm.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

288

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.2.2.1 Example of a link specification using 1661 SMC with L–16.2 JE2 Aggregate and a 15dBm Booster

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

Aggregate ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎ

RS

AggregateSTM16STM16

Booster (on 1664OA)

min –6dBm 15dBm –29dBmmax 4dBm –9dBm

BoosterInput

17dBm

SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum chromatic dispersion 3200 (ps/nm)

Optical fiber used G.652

– fiber attenuation 0.25 dB/km

– chromatic dispersion of the fiber 18 ps/nm/km

– penalty 1 dB

Attenuation rangemin = +17–(–9)max = +15 –(–29)–1

26 dB43 dB

Minimum span length (26dB/0.25) 104 Km

Maximum span lengthdue to the attenuation (sensitivity) 43/0.25=172

172 Km

Following there are the formulas to calculate the minimum and maximum span length. The maximumlength can be limited by the receiver sensitivity or by the maximum chromatic dispersion, whichever ismost restrictive; the minimum length is limited by the receiver overload.The optical interface characteristics are deduced from Table 16. and Table 17. depending on the typeof interface.The optical fiber characteristics are reported in rec. ITU–T G.957.

Span attenuation range:Min Atten.= (max Tx Power)–(min. Rx Overload)=+17–(–9)=26dBMax Atten.= (minTx Power)–(min. Rx Sensitivity)–(penalty)=+15–(–29)–1=43 dB

Minimum span length for overload = (Min Att.)/(fiber att.)=26/0.25=104 KmMaximum span length for attenuation (sensitivity) = (Max Att.)/(fiber att.)=43/0.25=172 KmMaximum span length for dispersion = (Max dispers.)/(fiber disp.)=3200/18=177.7 Km

Thus the maximum fiber span length is limited for attenuation (sensitivity): 172 Km,while the minimum span to avoid overload problems should be 104 Km.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

289

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.2.3 Example of a link specification using 1661 SMC with L–16.2 JE3 Aggregate , a 15 dBmBooster and a Preamplifier unit.

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

S

AggregateSTM16

Booster (on the 1664OA)

R Preamplifier

Preamplifier(on the 1664OA)

min –6dBm 15dBm –37dBmmax 4dBm –18dBm

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

AggregateSTM16

BoosterInput

–15.5dBm17dBm

Output

–12.5dBm

SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum chromatic dispersion 4000 (ps/nm)

Optical fiber used G.652

– fiber attenuation 0.25 dB/km

– chromatic dispersion of the fiber 18 ps/nm/km

– penalty 1 dB

Attenuation rangemin = +17–(–18)max = +15 –(–37)–1

35 dB51 dB

Minimum span length (35dB/0.25) 140 Km

Maximum span length(due to attenuation: 51dB/0.25)

204 Km

Note (*): Preamplifier Optical characteristics are reported in 1664OA Technical Handbook.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

290

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.2.4 Optical Tributary units

Types of optical interfaces S–1.1, L–1.1, L–1.2 . Characteristics are given in Table 18.

Optical connectors FC/PC, SC/PC

Table 18. Parameters specified for STM–1 Optical Interfaces



Nominal bit rate Kbit/s 155 520

Application code (table 1 / G.957) S–1.1 L–1.1 L–1.2

Operating wavelength range 1261–1360 1280–1335 1480–1580


Source type MLM MLM SLM

Spectral characteristics:

• maximum RMS width• maximum –20 dB width• minimum side mode suppression ratio

nmnmdB

7.7––

4––

–130



dBmdBm

–8–15

0–5

0–5

Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2 10 10


Attenuation range dB 0–12 10–28 10–28

Maximum dispersion ps/nm 100 250 1900

Minimum optical return loss of cable plant at S, including any connectors dB NA NA 20


dB NA NA –25


Type of detector InGaAs PIN InGaAs PIN InGaAs PIN

Mean received power @ BER= 1E–10:


dBmdBm

–28–8

–34–10

–34–10

Maximum optical path penalty dB 1 1 1


dB –14 –14 –25

Note :NA = Not Applicable

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

291

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.2.5 140/STM1 Switch Tributary

Selection between 140 Mbit/s and STM1 Through SW setting

Type of Interface Electrical, ITU–T Rec. G.703 compliant

Bit rate 139264 Kbit/s 15 ppm, or 155 520Kbit/s 20ppm

Code CMI

Attenuation accepted on the incoming signal 0–12 dB at 70MHz with law f.0–12.7 dB at 78MHz with law f.

Return loss 15dB at 7–210 MHz – 15dB at 8–240 MHz

Pulse shape G.703, Fig.19, 20 G.703, Fig.24, 25

4.2.6 3x34 Mbit/s TRIB.

Type of interface Electrical, according to ITU–T Rec. G703

Bit Rate 34368 Kbit/s 20 ppm

No. of tributaries 3

Code HDB3

Signal amplitude 1Vp/75ohms

Attenuation accepted on the incoming signal 0–12dB at 17.184kHz with law f

Return loss 12 dB 860–1720 kHz18 dB 1720–34368 kHz14 dB 34368–51550 kHz

Pulse shape as per Fig.17 of ITU–T Rec. G.703

4.2.7 3x45 Mbit/s TRIB.

Type of interface Electrical, according to ITU–T Rec. G703 and toANSI TS 102 Rec.

Bit rate 44.736 Kbit/s 20ppm


Code B3ZS

Signal amplitude According to ITU–T Rec. G.703 par.5.8 and ANSIT1 102 Rec, Tab.5

Attenuation accepted on the incoming signal According to ANSI T1 102, Annex A2.5

Pulse shape as per Fig.14 of ITU–T Rec.G.703 or per Fig.14 ofANSI T1 102 Rec.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

292

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.2.8 DVB TRIB.

Type of interface Electrical, according to EN 50083–9

Bit rate 270 Mbit/s


Code 8B /10B code

Signal amplitude 0.8 Vp/75 ohms

Managed bit rate 1.44 to 38.9 Mbit/s

4.2.9 21x2 Mbit/s Trib.


Bit rate 2048Kbit/s 50ppm


Code HDB3

Signal amplitude 3Vp/120ohms, or 2.37/75ohms (bal/unbal.)

Attenuation accepted on the incoming signal 0–6dB at 1024kHz with law f.

Return loss 12 dB 51–102 kHz18 dB 102–2048 kHz14 dB 2048–3072 kHz

Pulse shape as per Fig.15 of ITU–T Rec.G.703

4.2.10 21x1.5 Mbit/s TRIB.


Bit rate 1544 Kbit/s ± 50 ppm


Code B8ZS

Signal amplitude 3Vp/100 ohms

Pulse shape as per Fig.15 of ITU–T Rec.G.703

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

293

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.2.11 Clock Reference Units

Selectable input reference clock 2048 Kbit/s Tributaries, Aggregates, STM–1 Tributaries and 2048 kHzexternal clock 2

Number of selected clock (normal mode) 6 max Internal and 6 max external reference

Output clock (to external) 2048 kHz

Other local frequencies Free–run mode 4.6 ppm (CRU PLL withoutreference)Holdover mode drift 1.0 ppm max./day (CRU PLLwith stored frequency for more than half an hour, inabsence of selected input reference)

The ”Enhanced CRU” version has an holdoverstability of 0.37ppm max./day and complies withITU–T G.814.

Accepted drift 10 ppm

Switch free run/normal mode < 4 sec.

Time for which the holdover is maintained Permanent

External Clock characteristics

Frequency 2048 kHz 50 ppm

Pulse shape as per Fig.21 or ITU–T Rec. G.703

Input/output impedance 75 ohms or 120 ohms

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

294

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.2.12 AUX/EOW units

Speech Channel Interface Front–panel telephone jack / external access with”Extension” AUX EOW Unit

Impedance 600 ohms

Operating current 8 mA

Tx level 0 dBr

Rx level –4 dBr

Code DTMF compliant with ITU–T Rec. Q.23• selective call=10 99• conference call=00

Analog EOW Extension (with AUX/EOW Extension unit only)

Impedance 600 ohms

Bandwidth 300–3400 Hz

Tx level 0 dBr ±0.5 dB

Rx level 0 dBr ±0.5 dB

Externally accessible data channel. 3x64 Kbit/s, G.703 codirectional3x9600 baud, V11 contradirectional

64 Kbit/s Codirectional Interface

Bit rate 64 Kbit/s 100 ppm

Timing signals 64 Kbit/s and 8 kHz transmitted in a codirectionalmanner together with the informative signal

Tx bearer Two balanced pairs (120 ohms): one per route

Code Conversion rules CCITT Rec. G.703

Outgoing symbol rate 256 Kbaud

Outgoing pulse shape as per Fig.5 of CCITT Rec.G.703

Output Interface characteristics As per CCITT Rec. G.703, Table 1.

Incoming Interface characteristics as per the outgoing interface but modified by thecharacteristics of the interconnection pair.The input circuit can accept an 0 – 3 dB attenuatedsignal at 128 kHz.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

295

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

64Kbit/s oversampled 9600baud contradirectional interface

Type electrical, according to CCITT Rec. V11 (X.27

Input Receivers impedance < 6Kohms

Rx Receivers levels ”1” or ”OFF” < –0.3V”0” or ”ON” > +0.3V

The receives are provided with a settable 120ohms line termination resistance

Differential drivers output 2v (Min)

Max DTE–DCE distance 1000m

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

296

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.3 Power Supply Characteristics

No. of power supply units 2+1 stand–by

Input voltage –48/–60Vdc. Allowed variations:–38–57 Vdc, –50–72 Vdc

Power drained by load 220W(1651SM equipped with three 21x2 Mbit/s Trib.units, and four 140/155 Mbit/s Trib. units)

Power supply units’ output voltages +5.3V 3%–5.5V 3%+12.1 3%

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

297

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.4 Alarm Characteristics

Each unit of the equipment (excluding the DC/DC converter) is provided with a red LED on the frontcoverplate. This LED glows to indicate a failure inside the unit; the green LED on the DC/DC converterdarkens to indicate failure.

The green LED on the Aggregate unit and the 140/STM–1 Switch Tributary glows to indicate regularoperation.

All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the Equipment Controller unit which will delivercentralized optical indications. Specifically:

• Red LED (7) : detection of an urgent alarm• Red LED (6) : detection of a not urgent alarm• Yellow LED (4) : detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks,

forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS• Yellow LED (3) : detection of an indication alarm

The generation of the RNURG and RURG commands on behalf of the Equipment Controller andANDOR function housed in the Alarm & Service Access Module subunit depends on the type of alarmdetected. The commands light up the relative general red alarm LEDs at the top of the rack housing theequipment.

The detected alarm condition can be stored through push–button (10). This operation will turn OFF the general red LEDs and light up the yellow LED on the rack and yellow LED (5) on the Equipment Controllerunit.The detected alarm can be automatically stored, when one or both station batteries fail.The Equipment Controller unit delivers remote alarms.Refer to para 5.3.4.1 on page 345 for the detailed list.

The ANDOR function housed in the Alarm & Service Access Module subunit delivers the following remotealarms:

• TOR : Failure or loss of one station battery

• TAND : Failure or loss of both station batteries

The alarm condition is GROUND contact, except for the TUP (open contact)

Eight (the first three available to the customer ) incoming contacts CPI, and the outgoing contacts CPO,are used for alarm indication (CPO are not operative in this release).

Characteristics of the cited remote alarms and Housekeeping contacts interface (EM type) are insertedin Chapter 4.1 on page 279.

The Equipment Controller unit has been designed to dialogue with a Personal Computer (PC) in order toservice, activate and trouble–shoot the equipment.All these function are described in the Operator’s handbook, detailing the alarms of each card and relevantindications.

Connection with the PC is achieved through connector (9) available on the unit.

The unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the Transmission Management Networkin order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.

The characteristics of the management interfaces are specified in para 4.1 on page 279 .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

298

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the Transmission Management Networkin order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.

The characteristics of the management interfaces are specified in para 4.1 on page 279 .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

299

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.5 Mechanical Characteristics

Mechanical compatibility ETSI ETS/EE3, S9

Dimensions 483 Wx280 Dx788 H mm

Weight 40–45 Kg. depending on configuration

Cooling Natural

Wiring accessible from the front

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

300

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.6 Environmental conditions

4.6.1 Climatic for operating conditions

The Equipment meets the requirements of ETSI Stand. without use of fans.The functionality of the 1651SM Equipment, Vs. Temperature, is in compliance with :

ETS 300 019–1–3 :1992 , class 3.2.

Class 3.2 : Partly temperature–controlled locations.

This class applies to a closed location having neither temperature nor humidity control.(see climatogram on Figure 110. on page 301)

When STM–16 aggregates is used, the system is in compliance with:

ETS 300 019–1–3 : 1992, class 3.1

Class 3.1 Temperature–controlled locations.

4.6.1.1 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations

This applies to locations:

– where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also beexposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through openwindows. They may be subjected to condensed water and to water from sources other than rain andicing. They are not subjected to precipitation;

– where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;

– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scatteredover the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;

– In close proximity to sources of sand or dust;

– with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjectedto negligible vibrations.

The conditions of this class may be found in :

– entrances and staircases of buildings;

– garages;

– cellars;

– certain workshops;

– buildings in factories and industrial process plants;

– unattended equipment stations;

– certain telecommunication buildings;

– ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings, ect.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

301

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

29

955

Figure 110. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

302

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.6.1.2 Class 3.1:Temperature–controlled locations

This class is a combination of classes 3K3/3Z2/3Z4/3B1/3C2(3C1)/3S2/3M1 in IEC standard 721–3–3 [3].

This class applies to a permanently temperature controlled closed location. Humidity is usually notcontrolled. The climatogram is shown in Figure 111.

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

1.0

25

RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %

AIR

TE

MP

ER

AT

UR

E 0

C

AB

SO

LUT

E A

IR H

UM

IDIT

Y g

/m3

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

20

1.5

85

Exceptional climatic limits.

Normal climatic limits: Values outside these limitshave a probability of occurrence of less than 1%

Values outside this field have a probability of oc-currence of less than 10%(see IEC standard721–3–0 [2], Class 4)

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

60

504540

3530

10

0–5

–10

–20

–30

–40

20

5

NOTE: Exceptional conditions may occur following the failure of the temperature controlling system

Figure 111. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations

Heating. cooling, forced ventilation and humidification are used as necessary to maintain the requiredconditions – especially where there is a significant difference between the room environment and theexternal high or low temperatures are prevented.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

303

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

This class applies to locations:

– where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and to heat radiation. It may also beexposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings. They are not subjectedto condensed water, precipitation, water from source other than rain or icing;

– without particular risks of biological attacks. This includes protective measures, e.g. special productdesign, or installations at locations of such construction that module growth and attacks by animals,etc. are not probable;

– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scatteredover the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;

– without special precautions to minimize the presence of sand or dust, but which are not situated inproximity to sources of sand or dust;

– with insignificant vibration and shock.

The conditions of this class may be found in :

– normal living or working areas, e.g. living rooms, rooms for general use (theatres, restaurants);

– offices;

– shops;

– workshops for electronic assemblies and other electrotechnical products;

– telecommunication centers;

– storage rooms for valuable and sensitive products.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

304

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.6.2 Storage

The 1651SM /1661SM–C and 1641SM–D equipment meet the following requirements Vs. Storage :

ETS 300 019–1–1 : 1992, class 1.2

Class 1.2 : weatherprotected, not temper. controlled storage location.

This class applies to weatherprotected storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. Thelocation may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. Theclimatogram is shown on Figure 112. on page 305.

This class applies to storage locations :

– where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may alsobe exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows orother openings. They may be subjected to condensed water, dripping water and to icing. They mayalso be subjected to limited wind–driven precipitation including snow;

– where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;

– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scatteredover the whole area, ad/or with heavy traffic;

– in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;

– with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.

The conditions of this class may occur in :

– unattended buildings ;

– some entrances of buildings ;

– some garages and shacks.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

305

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

29

Figure 112. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

306

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

4.6.3 Transportation

The 1641SM equipment meets the following requirements Vs. transportation :

ETS 300 019–1–2 : 1992, class 2.2

Class 2.2 : Careful transportation (see Table 19. on page 307 ).

This class applies to transportation where special cars has been taken e.g. with respect to low temperatureand handling.

Class 2.2 covers the condition of class 2.1. In addition class 2.2 includes transportation in all types of lorriesand trailers in areas with well–developed road system.

It also includes transportation by ship and by train specially designed, shock–reducing buffers. Manualloading and unloading of to 20 Kg is included.

Extension of extreme low temperature during transportation is permitted for the 1651SM/1661SM–Cequipment in its standard packing :

AT –40° C for 72 Hours maximum

without damaging the Optical interfaces.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

307

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 19. Transportation climatic

Environmental parameter Unit 2.1 and 2.2 2.3

(A) low temperature air °C – 25 – 40

(B)high temperature, air in unventilatedenclosures (NOTE 1)

°C + 70 + 70

(C)high temperature, air in ventilated enclosuresor outdoor air (NOTE 2)

°C + 40 + 40

(D) change of temperature air/air (NOTE 3) °C –25 / +30 –40 / +30

(E) change of temperature air/water (NOTE 3) °C +40 / +5 +40 / +5

(F)relative humidity, not combined with rapidtemperature changes

%°C

95+40

95+45

(G)relative humidity, combined with rapidtemperature changes air/air, at high relativehumidity (NOTE 3 , 6)

%

°C

95

–25 / +30

95

–40 / +30

(H)absolute humidity, combined with rapidtemperature changes : air/air at high watercontent (NOTE 4)

s/m3

°C

60

+70 / +15

60

+70 / +15

(I) low air pressure KPa 70 70

(J) change of air pressure KPa/min no no

(K) movement of the surrounding medium, air m/s 20 20

(L) precipitation rain mm/min 6 (NOTE 7) 6

(M) radiation, solar W/m2 1120 1120

(N) radiation, heat W/m2 600 600

(O) water from sources other than rain (NOTE 5) m/s 1 (NOTE 7) 1

(P) wetness none conditions of wet surfaces

Notes on next page.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

308

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Notes to Table 19. :

NOTE 1 : The high temperature of the surfaces of a product may be influenced by both thesurrounding air temperature, given here, and the solar radiation through a window oranother opening.

NOTE 2 : The high temperature of the surface of a product is influenced by the surrounding airtemperature, given here, and the solar radiation defined below.

NOTE 3 : A direct transfer of the product between the two given temperature is presumed.

NOTE 4 : The product is assumed to be subjected to a rapid decrease of temperature only (norapid increase). The figures of water content apply to temperatures down to thedew–point; at lower temperatures the relative humidity is assumed to be approximately100 %.

NOTE 5 : The figure indicates the velocity of water and not the height of water accumulated.

NOTE 6 : Occurrence of condensation.

NOTE 7 : For short duration only.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

309

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

INSTALLATION

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

310

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

311

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5 INSTALLATION

ATTENTION EMC NORMS

WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.4.1.1 on page 31.

SAFETY RULES

Carefully observe the front panel labels prior working on optical connectionswhile the equipment is in–service.

N.B. A multilingual ( Italian, Spanish, French, German) Safety label is included in the STM–NOptical Units prepacking. The user can substitute the default English label with one of theavailable.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

312

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.1 Unpacking and Warehousing

SAFETY RULES

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Brace top of rack/subrack duringmovement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains that can twist or damagebackplane.

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Combined equipment weight exceeds50 Kg. Use material-handling equipment to lift equipment.

5.1.1 General

The following procedures have been issued and must be observed when unpacking the equipment.The reciprocal operation must be done for repacking. In such case it is recommended to use the originalpacking material.

The following sturdy outer packing material is utilized in order to protect the equipment against mechanicaland climatic stresses to which they are subjected:

wooden crates for transport by ship, air, on road for periods longer than 60 days

ply–wood crates for transport by ship, air, on road for periods of 30 to 60 days

cardboard boxes for transport by air or on road for periods of less than 30 days

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

313

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.1.2 Unpacking

PRELIMINARY CHECKS

The following information should be printed on the outer crate:

• International symbols

side up :

keep dry

fragile

• trade mark/address of the manufacturing company;• labels (or templated marks) indicating information on the contract and destination site of

the product;• an envelope holding among others the packing list

Upon receipt check:• that the final destination of the crates is that indicated on the label;• that no damage was made to the cases

Report any shipping damages to the Company’s representative or the Shipping Agent.

UNPACKING

When having to unpack proceed as follows:

• Make sure that the paking has been properly positioned, refer to the symbol• open the case;• remove the shockproof material;• remove the goods from the case;• remove prepacking, the polyethylene bag and any other protection;• remove the plastic bags cellotaped to the rack and containing accessories;• remove the dehydrating bags;• ascertain that the goods are not damaged and that they correspond to those indicated on the

packing list enclosed in the envelope. Conversely, contact the agency’s representative.

N.B.

When unpacking it is advisable to handle the packing material with care; it might be reused for packingagain if it must be reshipped.

5.1.3 Warehousing

If having to store the packed material, the following requirements must be met:• the cardboard boxes must be placed indoors in airy rooms;• the wooden or plywood cases can be placed outdoors, provided they are protected against rain

and direct sunlight.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

314

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.2 Mechanical Installation

SAFETY RULES

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Brace top of rack/subrack duringmovement to prevent tipping and to avoid strains that can twist or damagebackplane.

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Combined equipment weight exceeds50 Kg. Use material-handling equipment to lift equipment.

5.2.1 Subrack insertion into the rack

The subracks can be inserted into the 19” standard racks or in the 21” N3–LC, S9 and Optinex rack.The paragraphs that follow illustrate the procedure adopted for all.

5.2.1.1 19” racks


• Insert the subrack into the position assigned to it.

• Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (7) into the holes on the joint plates (8)and screw them fasting to the corresponding holes on the brackets (1) of the rack.

5.2.1.2 21” rack (N3–LC, S9 and Optinex)

SAFETY RULES

Subrack fastening to the rack ensures ground protection in that the rack iswire–connected to the station protection ground.

S9 Rack


• Screw (7) fasten the 19”/21” adaptors (9) to the subrack joint plate (8).• Insert the retainer nuts (2) into the four holes on the brackets (1).

• NOTE – to easily install the subrack onto the rack, tightly fasten the two special screws (11) tothe rack by means of additional retainer nuts (2) set next to one of the two internal holes on the19”/21” adaptor (9).

• Place the subrack onto the special slotted screws (11)

• Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (10) into the holes on the 19”/21” adaptors(9) and screw them fast into the corresponding holes (with retainer nuts) on the brackets (1) of the rack.

• Remove the special screws (11)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

315

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

N3–LC Rack(See Figure 113. on page 315).

• Screw (7) fasten the 19”/21” adaptors (9) to the subrack joint plate (8).• Locate the four holes on the bracket (1) used to fasten the subrack.• Carry out the following operations only on the two upper fastening holes ( see detail on

Figure 113. ):Insert the retainer nuts (2) into the square (3) and into the bracket (1).Fasten the square (3) to the bracket by inserting the screw (4) into the hole (5) and tightenit into the corresponding hole (6).

• N.B. to easily install the subrack onto the rack, tightly fasten the two special screws (11) to therack by means of additional retainer nuts (2) set next to one of the two internal holes on the19”/21” adaptor (9).

• Place the subrack onto the special slotted screws (11).• Insert the other two retainer nuts into the two lower fastening holes.• Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (10) into the holes on the 19”/21” adaptors

(9) and screw them fast into the corresponding holes (with retainer nuts) on the brackets (1) of the rack.

• Remove the special screws (11).

4

253

1

6

1

8

710

9

1 2

111

FOR N3–LC RACK ONLY

Figure 113. Subrack insertion into the rack

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

316

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Optinex Rack


• Screw (3) fasten the 19”/21” adaptors (2) to the subrack joint plate (1).

• N.B. to easily install the subrack onto the rack, tightly fasten the two special screws (4) to therack set next to one of the two internal holes on the 19”/21” adaptor (2).

• Place the subrack onto the special slotted screws (4)

• Fasten the subrack to the rack by inserting the screws (5) into the holes on the 19”/21”adaptors (2) and screw them fast into the corresponding holes on the brackets (6) of the rack.

• Remove the special screws (4).

3

2

2

1

1

4

56

6

6

Figure 114. Subrack insertion into Optinex rack

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

317

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.2.2 Mounting the Union Duct for the fiber–guide duct

(See Figure 115. ).

The subrack is supplied with the fiber–guide cable duct already mounted.

As regards mounting the right and left union duct it is enough to remove the cable–duct cover and fastenthe union duct as indicated in the figure.

The union duct are inserted in the various ”Installation Set” (see Table 21. on page 324).

The figure only refer to an S9 type rack, the N3 rack is inserted like S9 but concavity is different.

1COVER

LEFT UNION DUCT

2

RIGHT

3

UNION DUCT

Figure 115. Mounting the union duct for the fiber–guide duct

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

318

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.2.3 Mechanical Structure

The subrack is fitted with particular mechanical devices which permit to obtain functions in compliancywith the International Norms associated to EMC.Some of these devices are illustrated and cross–referred to in Figure 116. The relative reference numbersare within brackets [ ].The subrack consists of:

• Mechanical structure consisting of two side walls (8) joined by six plates (4)

• Rear p.c.b. (2) utilized for the subrack wiring

The front part of space (9) and that of the subrack base can accommodate a cable duct for the opticalfibers connected to the units front panels.

• Rear cover (1) for the protection of the rear p.c.b. (2)

• Cellular protection shields [3] to protect the equipment against interferences and at the sametime permitting air to circulate inside

• Guides (7) facilitating unit (13) vertical insertion. Special mechanical devices are provided toprevent the unit from being inserted up–side down

• Lugs (5) provided with holes (6) into which the fixing screws are inserted.

• Guides (14) facilitating access modules vertical insertion.

To withdraw one unit (13) first unscrew (10), grip the levers (11) and then pull out the unit.The unit is provided with a finger [12] which guarantees continuity to the ground connections between theunit and the subrack. Another way to guarantee continuity to the ground connections is to tighten thescrews (10) on all the unit front cover panels.

To withdraw an access module , first unscrew (15) , grip the lever (16) and then pull out the unit.With regard to sub equipped subracks, the empty spaces are covered with dummy plates.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

319

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

9

8

2

1

4

5

6

10

12

13

11

3

7

14

16

15

Figure 116. Mechanical structure of the subrack

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

320

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3 Electrical and Optical Installation

SAFETY RULES

The whole installation must be executed without powering the equipment.Protection ground connection must be the first operation.Power Supply connection must be the last to be executed.

FIXING THE UNITS (AND MODULES) INTO THE SUBRACK

(caution to avoid equipment damage)The screw tightening torque for fixing the units (and modules, if any and if fixed by screws) intothe subrack must be:

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.

WARNING FOR STM-16 AGGREGATES

(caution to avoid equipment damage)Locking and unlocking the coaxial cables carrying out the pass-through function on STM-16aggregates must be done using the special tool P/N 1AD 02412 0001 (Factory P/N245.701.833R).

Carrying out this operation with different tools may result in cable damage.

HANDLING OPTICAL FIBERS

(caution to avoid equipment damage)When handling optical fibers, there is a possibility of equipment damage. Observe the followingwarnings:– Avoid twisting or crossing one cable over another.– Do not bend or dress cables at less than 1-inch bend radius.– Avoid excess cable length in breakout area.– Avoid bunching cables in a tight clump with cable clamp or tie strap.– Place excess fiber-optic cable into fiber storage. Optical fibers located inside optical

modules are delicate and can easily be damaged. Use extreme care when handling opticalfibers.

ESD PROTECTION

(caution to avoid equipment damage)The equipment is supplied with several connectors (services, alarms, housekeeping, etc)covered by ”protection cups” (ESD protection). The installer must respect the ESD precautionpresented at para.4.2 on page 33. At the end of the installation phase all the previousconnectors not used for cabling must be covered with the relevant ”protection cups”.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

321

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

The installation wiring is connected at the top of the subrack through the terminal tagblocks and connectorsmounted on Access Modules subunits inserted on the subrack’s back–panel. The optical connections,those of the aggregate and those of the STM–1 optical tributary are directly wired on the units. Also theSTM–16 Aggregate pass–through connection are directly wired on the units.

Figure 117. on page 322 illustrates all the connection points on the equipment.

Table 20. on page 323 reports the connection points number for each function, and the paragraph whereit is described.

Each paragraph also indicates:

• pin assignment table

• information on the adaptors/connectors supplied with the equipment to mount on the relevantAccess Module.

Connections are established through the connectors situated on the Access Modules front coverplate.

The Access Modules are inserted into the slots assigned to them and in compliancy with the configurationof the tributaries to connect.

The relationship between Tributaries and Access Module Slots are illustrated in Figure 119. on page 329.

Table 21. on page 324 shows the parts making up the installation sets.

Table 22. on page 327 shows the cables suggested to set–up the connections.

The tables associated to each terminal connector also refer to these cables.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

322

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

WIT

H O

PT

ICA

L S

TM

1 T

RIB

UTA

RY

9

WIT

H S

TM

–4 A

GG

RE

GAT

E

6

5

7

WIT

H S

TM

–16

AG

G

HF G L

8

G G I M

SLOT SLOT

or D

VB

TR

IB

Figure 117. Connection points for installation

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

323

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 20. Numbering, functions and paragraphs referred to the Connection Points

ACCESSMODULESLOT ORACCESSPOINT

CONNECTORACRONYM FUNCTION PARA

– – Ground Connection 5.3.1

21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary

G – 21x2 Mbit/s Tributary

34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm Conn. 5.3.2

3x34/45 Mbit/sH –

140/155 Mbit/s

Q INT QX & Synch. Interface Acc. Mod.– Q2 Interface

I SYNC QX & Synch. Interface Acc. Mod.– Synch. Interf. 5.3.3

10–B2 / 10–BT QX & Synch. Interface Acc. Mod.– QB3 Interf.

RA Alarm Interf. Acc. Mod. – Remote AlarmL

R/M Alarm Interf. Acc. Mod. – RM int. (Rack Lamps)5.3.4

– Voice Channel

F V11 Auxiliary Data Channel Connection 5.3.5

64 K Auxiliary Data Channel Connection

(3), (4) DVB Tributaries Connections 5.3.6

(1), (2),(3), (4)

STM4 Aggregate and STM1 tributary OpticalConnections

5.3.7

(5), (6) STM–16 Aggregate Optical Connections 5.3.8

(7) STM16 Aggregate pass–through electrical con-nections

5.3.8.2

(8) IECB electrical connection to/from DROP SHELF 5.3.9

(9) Interface F connection for local P.C. 5.3.10

HK Battery & Housek. Acc. Mod. – Housekeeping

M BATT 1 Battery & Housek. Acc. Mod. – Station Battery 1 5.3.11

BATT 2 Battery & Housek. Acc. Mod. – Station Battery 2

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

324

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 21. Parts making up the installation set

NAME PART No. Max.Q.ty

S9 Installation setMade up of:

299.701.454 U(3AL 34259 AA)

SUB.D–15P fixed male connector 040.311.550 T(1AB 00311 0022)

2

Connector holder 040.395.140 V(1AB 00603 0063)

2

Cord, plug, Alarms (S9) 041.931.011 R (3AL 34289 AA)

1

Cord, plug, Alim/2 (S9) 041.931.031 M(3AL 37789 AA)

2

Retainer Nut M6 S = 1.7/2.7 232.790.019 L(1AD 00292 0016)

8

Special screws 231.901.051 F(3AN 41257 AA)

2

Right Union for Duct 209.001.111 Q(3AN 42967 AA)

2

Left Union for Duct 209001112 R(3AN 42968 AA)

2

ETSI Installation setMade up of:

299.701.475 Z (3AL 34258 AA)

SUB.D–15P fixed male connector 040.311.550 T(1AB 00311 0022)

2

NC 3–p.SUB–D female connector 040.300.923 X(1AB 04097 0009)

2

H.P. female contact 040.325.550 Z(1AB 05009 0003)

4

H.P. male contact 040.315.551 L(1AB 05009 0002)

2

Connector holder 040.395.140 V(1AB 00603 0063)

4

Cord, alarms 041.710.004 R(3AL 34964 AA)

1

Retainer Nut M6 S=1.7/2.5 232.790.016 H(1AD 00292 0002)

8

Special screws 231.901.051 F (3AN41257AA––)

2

(continues)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

325

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


GND cord041.991.609K

(3AL37409AA––)1

Right Union for Duct209001113 J

(3AN 43233 AA)2

Left Union for Duct 209001114 D(3AN 43234 AA)

2

Optinex installation kitMade up of:

299.701.598 V(3AL37982AA––)

SUB.D–15P fixed male connector 040.311.550 T(1AB003110022)

2

Connector holder 040.395.140 V(1AB006030063)

2

Cord, Alarms 041.710.004 R (3AL34964AA––)

1

Cord plug, Alim/2 S9 041.931.031 M(3AL37789AA––)

2

Special screws 231.901.051 F (3AN41257AA––)

2

Right Union for Duct 209.001.111 Q(3AN 42967 AA)

2

Left Union for Duct 209001112 R(3AN 42968 AA)

2

(continues)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

326

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


CONNECTORS FOR TRIBS. and SYNCH

120 ohm connector kit (9 pins)Made up of:

543.159.606 Z(3AL 34257 AA)

3

Male connector 9–ways 040.310.952 V(1AB 00311 0045)

1

Sub.D–9P metal holder 040.395.141 J(1AB 00603 0062)

1

120 ohm connector kit (15 pins)Made up of:

299.701.407W(3AL 34521 AA)

23

Male connector 15–ways 040.311.550 T(1AB 003110022)

1

Sub.D–15P metal holder 040.395.140 V(1AB 00603 0063)

1

coax.connector:

1.5/5.6 male coax. connector 8.5 mm 040.142.080 P(1AB 00987 0005)

51

1.5/5.6 male coax. connector 5.9 mm 040.142.067 M (1AB 00987 0004)

51

1.0/2.3 (3 mm) male coax. connector 040.144.001 N(1AB 06122 0003)

177

1.0/2.3 (6 mm) male coax. connector 040.144.002 P(1AB 06122 0004)

177

OPTICAL CONNECTIONS

15m. long SM 1A FC / PC single fiber splice 041.897.045 S(1AB 07983 0001)

24

SM JUMPER FC/PC ( 20m. fiber splice ) 041.897.043 Y(1AB 07984 0001)

24

10m. single fiber splice with FC/PC connector 041.897.012 R(1AB 07984 0002)

24

OTHER PARTS

16A Circuit Breaker 001.700.121 J(1AB 02438 0012)

2

Circuit Breaker 15A 72 Vdc 001.791.356 L(1AB 16271 0006)

2

Hook/Unhook Tool245.701.833 R

(1AD 02412 0001)1

end table

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

327

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 22. Suggested cabling

REF CABLE TYPE CONNECTION TY-DIA (mm) or SECT.

(mm2) TELETTRA P/N. NOTEREF CABLE TYPEPE

INT. EXT.(NV / PN)

NOTE

1 Coax. 75 Ohm3mm

solder/crimp – 3.1 max. 049.475.400 Y (1AC 00110 0013)

1

2 Coax. 75 Ohm6mm

solder/crimp – 5.9 max. 049.475.406 J (1AC 00788 0001)

1

3 8–pair shielded wire wrap 0.4 7.5 max.049.720.406 T

(1AC014910008)1

4Shielded power

cable pairsolder 1.5 6 max.

049.613.400 S(1AC011900001)

1,2

5 8–pair shielded

wire wrapwire wrap 0.6 9.5 max.

049.722.400 X(1AC014260004)

1,2

6 Coax. 75 Ohm solder/crimp 0.5 4.8 max. 049.475.403P 1

7 Coax. cable crimp – 2.8 max.049.450.407 W(1AC009310001)

1

8 2–pair twistedshield

Crimp 0.5 –– 1AC003450001 3

NOTE :1 = terminate with connectors supplied2 = connect shield to holder

3 = terminate with RJ45 shielded connector ( 1AB074610007 )

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

328

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.1 Protection ground connections

SAFETY RULES

This connections has priority over all the others.

N3–LC racks(see Figure 118. )

Connect the yellow/green ground cord (1) to screw (2) and the rack ground bar (3)The ground cord (041.991.609 K) is comprised in ETSI installation set (see Table 21. on page 324.)

Other rack types

Ground protection is ensured by the subrack’s mechanical fastening.

See para 5.2.1 ”Subrack insertion into the rack” on page 314.

1

2

2

3

FRONT VIEW LEFT SIDE

Figure 118. Protection ground connections for N3 –LC racks

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

329

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.2 Electrical Tributary connections

HF I L MG G G

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

SLOT

E

NO

T U

SE

D

NO

T U

SE

D

DC

– D

C C

ON

VE

RT

ER

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y S

PA

RE

1

FU

LL M

AT

RIX

MA

IN

FU

LL M

AT

RIX

SP

AR

E

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y

TR

IBU

TAR

Y S

PA

RE

2

SLOT

NO

T U

SE

D

NO

T U

SE

D

TRIB. TYPESLOT

ACCESS MODULE NOTE

21x2/1.5 Mbit/s o

34 / 45, 140/155 Mb/s

Tmux 5 x 2 Mbit/s

3

third GWith 1.0/2.3 or T.43 Connection)

When the Access Module

to house 21x2MB Access

slots have not to be used.

1.6/5.6 Connection )With 1.0/2.3 or T.43 or(75 Ω

(120 Ω or 75 Ω

2 to 5 & 9 to12

TRIBUTARY

H (*)

slots G are utilised

Module, the first tree H

Slot 6 and 13 are used for N+1 Spare

Slot 6 is used for N+1 Spare

2

4

first G

second G

RELEVANT SLOT

(*) The TRIB Slots and the relevant Access Module Slots are univocally determined: Slot 2 connected to the first Slot H .. Slot 12

(*)

connected to the last Slot H.

Figure 119. Tributary units and Access Module subunits relationship

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

330

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.2.1 1.5 Mbit/s (100 ohms) Tributary Connection

– Mount the Access Module onto the slots involved as indicated on Figure 117. on page 322 .

– Wire the tributaries onto module using the SUB–D 15–pole.

– Close the connector into the relevant holder.The SUB–D 15–pole connector and holder are inside the ”120 ohms Connector Kit” (see Table 21. onpage 324).

Insert the male SUB–D connectors into the female ones .

Figure 120. on page 331, provides data on modules and pins.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

331

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

PIN FUNCTION (NB1) CABLE

1 GND2 TRIBUTARY 7 , NEGATIVE SIDE3 TRIBUTARY 6 , NEGATIVE SIDE4 TRIBUTARY 5 , NEGATIVE SIDE5 TRIBUTARY 4 , NEGATIVE SIDE6 TRIBUTARY 3 , NEGATIVE SIDE7 TRIBUTARY 2 , NEGATIVE SIDE8 TRIBUTARY 1 , NEGATIVE SIDE 59 TRIBUTARY 7 , POSITIVE SIDE10 TRIBUTARY 6 , POSITIVE SIDE11 TRIBUTARY 5 , POSITIVE SIDE12 TRIBUTARY 4 , POSITIVE SIDE13 TRIBUTARY 3 , POSITIVE SIDE14 TRIBUTARY 2 , POSITIVE SIDE15 TRIBUTARY 1 , POSITIVE SIDE


1 GND2 TRIBUTARY 21 , NEGATIVE SIDE3 TRIBUTARY 20 , NEGATIVE SIDE4 TRIBUTARY 19 , NEGATIVE SIDE5 TRIBUTARY 18 , NEGATIVE SIDE6 TRIBUTARY 17 , NEGATIVE SIDE7 TRIBUTARY 16 , NEGATIVE SIDE8 TRIBUTARY 15 , NEGATIVE SIDE 59 TRIBUTARY 21 , POSITIVE SIDE10 TRIBUTARY 20 , POSITIVE SIDE11 TRIBUTARY 19 , POSITIVE SIDE12 TRIBUTARY18 , POSITIVE SIDE13 TRIBUTARY 17 , POSITIVE SIDE14 TRIBUTARY 16 , POSITIVE SIDE15 TRIBUTARY 15 , POSITIVE SIDE


1 GND2 TRIBUTARY 14, NEGATIVE SIDE3 TRIBUTARY 13 , NEGATIVE SIDE4 TRIBUTARY 12 , NEGATIVE SIDE5 TRIBUTARY 11 , NEGATIVE SIDE6 TRIBUTARY 10 , NEGATIVE SIDE7 TRIBUTARY 9 , NEGATIVE SIDE8 TRIBUTARY 8 , NEGATIVE SIDE 59 TRIBUTARY 14 , POSITIVE SIDE10 TRIBUTARY 13 , POSITIVE SIDE11 TRIBUTARY 12 , POSITIVE SIDE12 TRIBUTARY 11 , POSITIVE SIDE13 TRIBUTARY 10 , POSITIVE SIDE14 TRIBUTARY 9 , POSITIVE SIDE15 TRIBUTARY 8 , POSITIVE SIDE

Tx Rx

Figure 120. 1.5 Mbit/s (100 Ohm) Tributary Connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

332

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.2.2 2 Mbit/s Tributary Connection

Refer to the Chapter 2 ”Configuration” on page 65.

The 21x2 Mbit/s Tributaries can be connected through the Access Modules carrying the followingconnector type:

– Coax 75 OHM

– Balanced 120 OHM conn.

5.3.2.2.1 2 Mbit/s Tributary Connection – 75 OHM

See :Figure 121.

– Mount the Access Module onto the ”G” slot involved.

Wire the tributaries onto the modules utilizing either:

– the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable (see Table 21. on page 324.)

– the coax. T43 connector cable

Figure 121. , shows data on modules and pins.

NOTE: For ”type 43” module no type of connector is supplied for tributary wiring.

J1

J21

2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY CONNECTION

PIN FUNCTION (NB1) CABLE (*)

J1 TRIBUTARY 1J2 TRIBUTARY 2J3 TRIBUTARY 3J4 TRIBUTARY 4J5 TRIBUTARY 5J6 TRIBUTARY 6J7 TRIBUTARY 7J8 TRIBUTARY 8

1 or 2J9 TRIBUTARY 9J10 TRIBUTARY 10J11 TRIBUTARY 11J12 TRIBUTARY 12J13 TRIBUTARY 13J14 TRIBUTARY 14J15 TRIBUTARY 15J16 TRIBUTARY 16J17 TRIBUTARY 17J18 TRIBUTARY 18J19 TRIBUTARY 19J20 TRIBUTARY 20J21 TRIBUTARY 21

18

715

21

16

18

16

J1

NB 1: TX AND RX TRIBUTARY CONNECTION

NOTE: (*) – the cable number is referred to Table 22. on page 327.

Figure 121. 2 Mbit/s (75 ohms) Tributary Connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

333

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.2.2.2 2 Mbit/s (120 ohms) Tributary Connections

See:Figure 122. on page 334.


– Wire the tributaries onto module using the SUB–D 15–pole for the 21x 2 Mbit/s

– Close the connector into the relevant holder.The SUB–D 15–pole connector and holder are inside the 120 ohms Connector Kit (seeTable 21. onpage 324.

Insert the male sub D connector into the female one.

Figure 122. on page 334, provides data on modules and pins.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

334

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436


1 GND2 TRIBUTARY 7 , NEGATIVE SIDE3 TRIBUTARY 6 , NEGATIVE SIDE4 TRIBUTARY 5 , NEGATIVE SIDE5 TRIBUTARY 4 , NEGATIVE SIDE6 TRIBUTARY 3 , NEGATIVE SIDE7 TRIBUTARY 2 , NEGATIVE SIDE8 TRIBUTARY 1 , NEGATIVE SIDE 59 TRIBUTARY 7 , POSITIVE SIDE10 TRIBUTARY 6 , POSITIVE SIDE11 TRIBUTARY 5 , POSITIVE SIDE12 TRIBUTARY 4 , POSITIVE SIDE13 TRIBUTARY 3 , POSITIVE SIDE14 TRIBUTARY 2 , POSITIVE SIDE15 TRIBUTARY 1 , POSITIVE SIDE


1 GND2 TRIBUTARY 21 , NEGATIVE SIDE3 TRIBUTARY 20 , NEGATIVE SIDE4 TRIBUTARY 19 , NEGATIVE SIDE5 TRIBUTARY 18 , NEGATIVE SIDE6 TRIBUTARY 17 , NEGATIVE SIDE7 TRIBUTARY 16 , NEGATIVE SIDE8 TRIBUTARY 15 , NEGATIVE SIDE 59 TRIBUTARY 21 , POSITIVE SIDE10 TRIBUTARY 20 , POSITIVE SIDE11 TRIBUTARY 19 , POSITIVE SIDE12 TRIBUTARY18 , POSITIVE SIDE13 TRIBUTARY 17 , POSITIVE SIDE14 TRIBUTARY 16 , POSITIVE SIDE15 TRIBUTARY 15 , POSITIVE SIDE


1 GND2 TRIBUTARY 14, NEGATIVE SIDE3 TRIBUTARY 13 , NEGATIVE SIDE4 TRIBUTARY 12 , NEGATIVE SIDE5 TRIBUTARY 11 , NEGATIVE SIDE6 TRIBUTARY 10 , NEGATIVE SIDE7 TRIBUTARY 9 , NEGATIVE SIDE8 TRIBUTARY 8 , NEGATIVE SIDE 59 TRIBUTARY 14 , POSITIVE SIDE10 TRIBUTARY 13 , POSITIVE SIDE11 TRIBUTARY 12 , POSITIVE SIDE12 TRIBUTARY 11 , POSITIVE SIDE13 TRIBUTARY 10 , POSITIVE SIDE14 TRIBUTARY 9 , POSITIVE SIDE15 TRIBUTARY 8 , POSITIVE SIDE

1

8

14

15

21

1

8

14

15

21


Figure 122. 2 Mbit/s (120 Ohm) Tributary Connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

335

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.2.3 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary Connections

Refer to the Chapter 2 on page 65.

The Trans Mux Tributaries can be connected through the Access Modules carrying the followingconnector type:

– Coax 75 OHM

– Balanced 120 OHM conn.

5.3.2.3.1 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s – 75 Ohm

– Mount the Access Module onto ”G” slot involved.

The type of module depends on the type of connector.

Wire the tributaries onto the modules utilizing either:

– the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable (seeTable 21. on page 324).


For type 43 module, no type of connector is supplied for tributary wiring.

5.3.2.3.2 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s – 120 Ohm

See :Figure 123. on page 336


Wire the 2 Mbit/s channel onto the first module using the SUB–D 15–pole.

– Close the connector into the relevant holder.The SUB–D 15–pole connector and holder are inside the 120 ohms Connector Kit (seeTable 21. onpage 324).

Wire the 34 Mbit/s stream onto the modules utilizing either:

– the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable (seeTable 21. on page 324).


Figure 123. on page 336 shows data on modules and pins for both 2 Mbit/s and 34 Mbit/s streams.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

336

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s 120 Ohm


1 GND2 GND34 TRIBUTARY 5 , NEGATIVE SIDE5 TRIBUTARY 4 , NEGATIVE SIDE6 TRIBUTARY 3 , NEGATIVE SIDE7 TRIBUTARY 2 , NEGATIVE SIDE8 TRIBUTARY 1 , NEGATIVE SIDE 591011 TRIBUTARY 5 , POSITIVE SIDE12 TRIBUTARY 4 , POSITIVE SIDE13 TRIBUTARY 3 , POSITIVE SIDE14 TRIBUTARY 2 , POSITIVE SIDE15 TRIBUTARY 1 , POSITIVE SIDE

GNDGND


J1 TRIBUTARY 6 TO 34 Mbit/s 1 or 2

55

1 1


Figure 123. 34/2 Trans Mux 5x2 Mbit/s Tributary connections – 120 Ohm.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

337

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.2.4 3x34/45 Mbit/s, 140 and STM1 Tributary Connections

See :Figure 124. on page 338.

– Mount the Access Module onto the terminal tagblock assigned to the ”H” slot involved.

The type of module depends on the frequency of the tributary and on the type of connector.

Wire the tributaries onto the modules utilizing either (seeTable 21. on page 324).:

– the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 3mm. cable

– the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector for 6mm. cable

– the 1.6/5.6 75 ohms male coax. connector for 4,8mm. cable


Figure 124. on page 338 and Figure 125. on page 338 provide data on modules and pins.

For type 43 module, no type of connector is supplied for tributary wiring.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

338

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

J1

J4

J2

J3

J5

J6

34/45 Mbit/s TRIBUTAYR CONNECTION


J1 TRIBUTARY 1 TxJ2 TRIBUTARY 2 TxJ3 TRIBUTARY 3 TxJ4 TRIBUTARY 1 RxJ5 TRIBUTARY 2 RxJ6 TRIBUTARY 3 Rx

1 or 2


Figure 124. 34 or 45 Mbit/s Tributary connections

140/155 Mbit/s Tributary Connection

PIN FUNCTION CABLE (*)

J1 TRIBUTARY 1 TxJ4 TRIBUTARY 1 Rx

1 or 2

J1

J4


Figure 125. 140/155 Mbit/s Tributary connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

339

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.3 Qx & Synch. Interface Access Module

(Refer to Figure 126. and to Figure 127. on page 340 )

Qx and Synchronism signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on the AccessModule inserted into slot I.

The subunit P/Ns are given in the Chapter 2 on page 65.

A detailed description of the connections are given in para 5.3.3.1 on page 341, 5.3.3.2 on page 342,5.3.3.3 on page 343, 5.3.3.3.1 on page 343 and para 5.3.3.3.2 on page 343.

There are two alternative subunits according to connector type housed on the Access Module to connectthe Synchronism signals (3), (4) with reference with the Figure 126.

As shown in Figure 126. on page 339, ref. (1), (2) and Figure 127. on page 340, ref (1) the The Qx &Synch. and Qx 10 BT & Synch. access modules differ by the connector type of the interface towards theTMN ( 10 base 2 or 10 Base T respectively) .

MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARD MODULE 75 Ω1.0/2.3 OR TYPE 43

MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARDMODULE 120 Ω

Q INT

10–B2

SYNCSYNC

I1

I2

OUT

2

1

3

5

1

2

4

5

SLOT

I

Q INT

10–B2

Figure 126. Management of Qx & Sync Access Module Connectors

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

340

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5

SLOT I

3

1

5

4

1

MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARD MODULE 75 Ω1.0/2.3 OR TYPE 43

MANAGEMENT CONNECTION BOARDMODULE 120 Ω

Figure 127. Management of Access Module Connectors Qx 10 BT & Synch

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

341

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.3.1 Q2 Interface Connections

(Refer to Figure 126. on page 339 . and to Figure 128. )

These connections are possible through the use of terminal tagblock (5) and the relevant 15–p. maleconnector and suitable long cable.(Refer toTable 21. on page 324).

CONN. ACRONYM”Q INT”

PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*)

1 GND Ground

2 TxA 19.2 Kbit/s data Tx, A

4 RxA 19.2 Kbit/s data Rx, A

8156 CkA Clock A

9 TxB 19.2 Kbit/s data Tx, B

19 10 TxSH Input data shield3

1

11 RxB 19.2 Kbit/s data Rx, B

12 RxSH Output data shield

FRONT VIEW 13 CkB Clock B

14 GND Ground


Figure 128. Q2 Interface connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

342

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.3.2 Synchronism Interface

(Refer to Figure 126. on page 339 )

– Wire–connect synch. onto the modules utilizing either:• the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector and the 3mm. cable.• the 1.0/2.3 75 ohms male coax. connector and the 6mm. cable.• the coax Type 43 connector.• the subd–9–p. fixed male connector available in the 120 ohms Connector (9–pin) kit

(see Table 21. on page 324).

Figure 129. provides data on modules and pins.

NOTE – As regards Type 43 modules, no type of connectors are supplied for synch. wiring.

75 ohms SYNCHRONISMS CONNECTION

CONN. ACRONYM”SYNC” PIN FUNCTION CABLE(*)

I1I1 I1 Incoming Synchronism ”A”

I2 I2Incoming synchronism ”B”

1 or 6

OUT OUTOutgoing Synchronism

120 ohms SYNCHRONISMS CONNECTION

CONN. ACRONYM ” SYNC” PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*)

1 CKOUTC Positive output clock

2 GND Ground59

3 CKINCB Positive input clock B

1 4 CKINCA Positive input clock A16

5 GND Ground 5

6 CKOUTF Negative output clock

7 GND Ground

8 CKINFB Negative input clock BFRONT VIEW

9 CKINFA Negative input clock A


Figure 129. Synchronism Connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

343

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.3.3 QB3 Interface Connection

5.3.3.3.1 10 base 2 Interface Connection

(Refer to Figure 126. on page 339)

– Connect the BNC connector–terminated coax. cable (10 base 2, thin ethernet cable (7) ) ontoconnectors (1) and (2).

5.3.3.3.2 10–BT interface connection


Connect the twisted pair cable with male connector RJ45 to the female connector 10–BT of the Qx 10 BT& Synch. access module as shown below:

CONN. ACRONYM”10–BT”


1 TPTXP Differential pair for data TX (towards the

2 TPTXN

Differential pair for data TX (towards theTwisted Pair cable)

3 TPRXP Differential pair for data RX ( from Twisted 8

6 TPRXN

Differential pair for data RX ( from Twistedpair cable)

8 VC Ground


Figure 130. 10 – BT connection.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

344

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.4 Alarm Interface Access Module Connections

(Refer to Figure 131. )

Remote Alarm and Rack Lamp signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on theAccess Module inserted into slot ” L ”.

Details are given in Chapter 2 on page 65.

A detailed description of the connections is given in para.5.3.4.1 on page 345, 5.3.4.2 on page 346,

RA

R/M

4

5

Figure 131. Management of Alarm Interface access module

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

345

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.4.1 Remote Alarm Connections

(Refer to Figure 131. on page 344 and to Figure 132. on page 345 )

The connector and holder are inserted in the N3– ETSI Installation set, or in the S9 Installation set, or inthe Optinex Installation kit, depending on the type of rack utilized.

– Wire–connect the remote alarms onto the SUB.D–15P fixed male connectors.

– Close the connector into its holder.

– Insert the male connector into the female one (5).

CONN. ACRONYM ”RA”


1 INT OR’ing of all units local alarms

2 NURG OR’ing of all units not Urgent alarms

3 URG OR’ing of all unit Urgent alarms

4 EXT External remote alarm

5 –

6 IND OR’ing of all indicative alarms

815 7 LOSQ2 No connection with the TMN (Interf.Q3)

8 TORRemote alarm indicating one station Batteryfailure

3

199 TAND

Remote alarm indicating two station Batter-ies failure

3

10 –

FRONT VIEW 11 –

12 C Alarm storing command

13 TUP Equipment Controller internal alarm

14 TORCOR’ing of both subrack’s power supply failalarms

15 TANC Both subrack’s power supply fail all AND’ing.


Figure 132. Remote Alarms Connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

346

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.4.2 R/M Interface connections (Rack lamps)

(Refer to Figure 131. on page 344 and to Figure 133. )

The connections are established between the module’s connector (4) and the terminal tagblock at the topof the rack (see rack documentation).

A connector–terminated cable is utilized with:

N3 rack Cord alarms , terminated with SUB.D–9P female connector (module side) and with SUB.D–9P male connector (rack side)Contained in the N3 installation set.

S9 rack S9 cord plug, alarms terminated with SUB.D–25P female connector on the module side,and with SUB.D–25P fixed male connector on the rack side.Material is inside the S9 installation set.

Optinex rack Cord alarms (P/N.041.710.004 R) terminated with SUB.D–9P female connector side on the M102 side, and with SUB.D–9P fixed male connector on the rack side.Material is inside the Optinex installation kit.

Each connector is provided with a metal holder for the 9–pin one, and for the 25–pin one.

ACRONYMTAGBLOCK (4)

”R / M”PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION

1 VSERVP Positive of service battery

2 C Alarm storing command

16 3 M Yellow storing LED switch–on command6

4 RURG Red urgent LED switch–on command59 5 RNURG Red not urgent LED switch–on command

6 VSERVN Negative of service battery

7 CHGreen LED switch–on command, call received from auxiliarychannels

FRONT VIEW 8 TOR OR of battery source

9 GND Ground

Figure 133. RAB – Rack Lamps Interface connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

347

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.5 Auxiliary Data Channel Connections


Auxiliary Data Channel signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on the AccessModule inserted into slot ” F”.

Details are given in Chapter 2 on page 65.

A detailed description of the connections are given in para. 5.3.5.1 on page 348 , 5.3.5.2 on page 349,

1

2

3

V11

64K

Figure 134. Management of Auxiliary Data Channel Access module

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

348

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.5.1 EOW Extension – Voice Channel connections

(Refer to Figure 134. and to Figure 135. on page 348)

• Wire–connect EOW extension channels onto the 120 ohm connector (9–pins).

• Close each connector inside the metal holder (for SUB–D 9–pin).

• Insert the connector into the (3) of Figure 134. one.

CONNECTOR(3)


1 EFEP Analog extension positive input

592 EFUP Analog extension positive output

16 5 GND Ground

3

6 EFEN Analog extension negative Input

FRONT VIEW7 EFUN Analog extension negative output


Figure 135. EOW extension connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

349

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.5.2 Auxiliary Data Connections (V11 & 64 Kb)

(Refer to Figure 134. on page 347 and to Figure 136. )The SUB–D15–p. fixed male connectors and holders are inside the 120ohms Connection (15–p) set(Refer toTable 21. on page 324).

– Wire–connect the Data channels onto the two SUB–D–15 pin fixed male connectors (15 pins)respectively for ”V11” (see Figure 136. ) and ”64 K” data connections (see Figure 137. on page350 ).

– Close each connector inside its holder .

– Insert the connectors into tagblock (2) and (1) with reference to the unit front cover shown inFigure 31. on page 90..

– Insert the male connector into the female one (2) with the acronym ”V11” or female connector (1)with the acronym ”64 K” .

CONN. (2) ACRO-NYM ” V11 ” PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*)

1 V11EP1 POS. V11 Tx data input

2 V11UP1 POS. V11 Rx data output

3 V11EP2 POS. V11 Tx data input

4 V11UP2 POS. V11 Rx data output

5 V11 EP3 POS. V11 Tx data input

6 V11UP3 POS. V11 Rx data output815

7 –

8 GND Ground 3

19 9 V11EN1 NEG. V11 Tx data input

10 V11UN1 NEG. V11 Rx data output

FRONT VIEW 11 V11EN2 NEG. V11 Tx data input


13 V11EN3 NEG. V11 Tx data input


15 –


Figure 136. V11 auxiliary channels connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

350

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

CONN. (1) ACRONYM ” 64 K ” PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*)

1 D64EP1 POS. 64 Tx data input

2 D64UP1 POS. 64 Rx data output


4 D64UP2 POS. 64 Rx data output


815 6 D64UP3 POS. 64 Rx data output815

7 –

8 – Ground 3

199 D64EN1 NEG. 64 Tx data input

10 D64UN1 NEG. 64 Rx data output

FRONT VIEW 11 D64EN2 NEG. 64 Tx data input


13 D64EN3 NEG. 64 Tx data input


15 –


Figure 137. 64 KBit/s auxiliary channels connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

351

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.6 DVB Tributaries Connections

The connections are made directly on the units which are provided with electrical BNC connector in thefollowing manner:

• Insert the DVB units into the assigned positions as indicated in Chapter 2 on page 65

• Connect the cables (Tx side or Rx side for each channell) terminated with a BNC 90ø malecoax. connectors onto the connectors on the unit’s front coverplate (see Figure 138. )

1

2

3

Channel input, Tx side

Channel output , Rx side

1

2

3

1

2

3

Figure 138. DVB Tributary Connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

352

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.7 STM4, STM1 Optical Connections


The connections are made directly on the units provided with optical interface in the following manner:

• Insert the units with optical interfaces into the assigned positions as indicated in ”Chapter 2CONFIGURATION ” on page 65.The units can either be the Aggregates (at the bottom) or the STM1 optical tributaries(at the top).

• Loosen screw (2) to remove the optical splice protection (1) from the unit.This protection not only mechanically protects the optical connectors, but acts as a protectiveshield against EMI.

• Remove the cover from the optical fiber duct. The fiber ducts are both at the top of the structure(for optical tributary connections) and at the bottom (for the optical aggregate connections).Figure 139. on page 353 illustrates a typical fiber duct used at the top.

• Lay the Tx/Rx single fiber splices into the ducts. The optical fiber splices are specified onTable 21. on page 324

• Pull the single fiber splices out from the holes situated next to the units to which they will beconnected.

• Insert the single fiber splice connector onto the corresponding one on the unit’s front coverplate(see Figure 117. on page 322).

1 ) – Aggregate, Input Rx side

2 ) – Aggregate, Output Tx side

3 ) – Tributary, Input Tx side

4 ) – Tributary, Output Rx side

• Place the optical splice protection (1) back onto the unit as follows:

– Insert the bottom part (3) of the optical splice protection (1) into the slot on the unit’s frontcoverplate.

– Insert the screw (2) into the hole (4) on th unit’s front coverplate.

WARNING ! when carrying out this operation make sure that the single fiber splices are properly situated in slot (5)

• Tighten screw (2) so as to obtain a good mechanical contact between the optical spliceprotection and the unit’s front cover.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

353

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

CABLE DUCT COVER

Figure 139. STM–4 Optical connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

354

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.7.1 ETSI Optical Connector dimensions

Figure 140. illustrates the max. allowed optical connector dimensions (fiber side) that can be utilized forthe optical connections.

max. 7,8 mm.

max

. 39

mm

.

max. 32,5mm

max. 46 mm.

max

. 0 1

0,3

mm

./

max. 40 mm.

max. 60 mm.

max

. 0 7

,3 m

m.

LEGENDA

1

2

3

1 SC–PC

2 FC–PC

3

/

DIN

Figure 140. ETSI Optical Connector dimensions

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

355

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.8 STM–16 Optical Connections and pass–through connections

(Refer to Figure 141. on page 356).

5.3.8.1 STM–16 Optical Connections

The connections are made directly on the units in the following manner:

• Insert the STM–16 Aggregate units into the assigned positions as indicated in ”Chapter 2CONFIGURATION” on page 65.

• Loosen screws (2) to remove the optical splice protection (1) from the unit. This protectionmechanically protects the optical connectors.

• Remove the cover from the optical fiber duct at the bottom of the structure.

• Lay the Tx/Rx single fiber splices into the duct. The optical fiber splices are specified onTable 21. on page 324

• Pull the single fiber splices out from the holes situated next to the Aggregate units to whichthey will be connected.

• Insert the single fiber splice connector onto the corresponding one (Tx/Rx) on the Aggregateunit’s front coverplate (see Figure 117. on page 322).

• Place the optical splice protection (1) back onto the unit as follows:

– Insert the optical splice protection (1) on the unit’s front coverplate making run the left sideunder the handle.WARNING when carrying out this operation make sure that the single fiber splices areproperly situated under the protection.

– Tighten screw (2) so as to obtain a good mechanical contact between the optical spliceprotection and the unit’s front cover.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

356

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.8.2 Pass–Through connections STM–16 AGGREGATE

These Pass–through connections are mandatories and they have to be done by means the CoaxialJumper Kit which Part Number is cited on Chapter 2 ”Physical Configuration” on page 65, Table 8. ” MainPart List”.In order to do the pass–through connections for the STM–16 Aggregates see the Figure 141. on page 356.and only for HM1 Aggregate Pass–Through, refer to the Figure 142. on page 357.

• Make the pass–through Tx and Rx cables run through the cooling wings and under the handleas indicated in Figure 141. and in Figure 142. on page 357.

The cables are connected and protected against erroneous extraction. To disconnect the

pass–through connections use the relevant extractor (Unhook Tool, see Chapter Equipment Part List

Table 10. on page 77). If not available, use a screw–driver to lever off the ring nut from the pass–throughcable’s connector.

Rx1

Rx2

Rx3

Rx4

Tx1

Tx2

Tx3

Tx4

Rx1

Rx2

Rx3

Rx4

Tx1

Tx2

Tx3

Tx4

EAST WEST

CABLE DUCT COVER

A

B

C

E

H

D

G

F

E

F

G

A

D

H

C

B

Figure 141. STM–16 Optical Connection and pass–through

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

357

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Rx1

Rx2

Rx3

Rx4

Tx1

Tx2

Tx3

Tx4

ON

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

Rx1

Rx2

Rx3

Rx4

Tx1

Tx2

Tx3

Tx4

ON

E

F

G

H

A

B

C

D

EAST WEST

1

Figure 142. HM1 STM–16 pass–through

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

358

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.9 IECB connection to/from DROP SHELF

(Refer to Figure 117. on page 322 and Figure 143. )

The connection is made on the front plate of the DS Future Bus Termination unit inserted in the slot ”A”by means of four 50 OHM coaxial connectors (Refer to the Figure 29. on page 88, in Chapter 2”CONFIGURATION” on page 65 and to the Figure 143. ) devoted to the IECBs bus interfacement withthe DROP SHELF FUTUREBUS TERMINATION MODULE. ( see Figure 117. on page 322)

– Wire the IECB connection as indicated in Figure 143. using the cable suggested in Table 22. onpage 327 and the connector supplied with the DROP SHELF equipment and inserted in the DROPSHELF S9/N3 Connection kit.

TAGBLOCK(1 – 4)


CKLCKL CKL LOCAL BUS CLOCK

CKL

DL DL DL LOCAL BUS DATA 7

CKNCKN CKN NETWORK BUS CLOCK

CKN

DN DN DN NETWORK BUS DATA


Figure 143. IECBS BUS Connections.

5.3.10 Interface F connections for local P.C.

The connection is made on the front plate of the Equipment Controller unit (9) of Figure 117. on page 322)with the 9–pin male connector–terminated cable supplied with the Personal Computer.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

359

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.11 Power and Housekeeping Access Module Connections

Battery and Housekeeping signal connections are directly made on the connectors mounted on theAccess Module inserted into slot ” M”.

Details are given in Figure 144. and in Chapter 2 on page 65.

A detailed description of the connections is given in para. 5.3.11.1 on page 360 and para.5.3.11.2 on page361.

HK

BATT1

BATT2

8

7

6

Figure 144. Management of Battery & Houskeeping Access Module

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

360

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.11.1 Housekeeping connections


The connector and holder are inside the N3 installation set, or the installation set S9, or in the OptinexInstallation kit, depending on the type of rack utilized.

– Wire connect the Housekeeping alarms onto SUB.D–15P fixed male connectors

– Close the connector into its holder

– Insert the connector into the module’s (8) with the acronym ”HK”.

NB 1) CPI 5, 6, 7 are assigned to the alarms of the Optical Amplifier eventually connected to the 1651SM Equipment; CPI 4 is dedicated to an eventual SSU Eq. and CPI 8 is reserved to the DROPSHELF AND BATTERY alarm.

NB 2) The CPI inputs are enabled to receive ground contacts.The open/close Housekeeping signals coming from other equipment, like OpticalAmplifier for example, must be changed into ground criteria.

NB 3) CP0 are not operative.

CONN. ACRONYM”HK”

PIN ACRONYM FUNCTIONCABLE(*)

1 CPI1 Parallel contact input



4 SSU–FAIL OR of alarms of Synchronisation Supply Unit

5 OFA–URG Urgent alarm of external OFA

8156 OFA–ABN Abnormal condition on external OFA

815

7 OFA–NURG Not urgent alarm on external OFA

8 AND BATTEXT

Station power supply alarm on external OFA3

199 CPO1 Parallel contact output


FRONT VIEW 11 CPO3 Parallel contact outputFRONT VIEW


13 CKOFA Parallel contact output




Figure 145. Housekeeping Connections

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

361

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

5.3.11.2 Power Connections

SAFETY RULES

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by–48 V dc. Ensure battery power cables are not connected to office batterypower.

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burnsand/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry beforeworking with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power inputterminals

(See Figure 144. on page 359, Figure 146. on page 361, Table 21. on page 324. and Table 22. on page327. )

POWER SUPPLY

CONN. ACRONYM ” BATT1 ” CONN. ACRONYM ” BATT2”

PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*) PIN ACRONYM FUNCTION CABLE(*)

3 1 VC BATT 1 + Battery 1 VC BATT 2 + Battery2

12 NC

Not connected

4 2 NCNot

connected4

3 VS BATT 1 – Battery 3 VS BATT 2 – Battery


Figure 146. Power Supply Connections

With ETSI rack:

The contacts and the connector body are inside the N3 Installation Set; see Table 21. on page 324.

• Connect the power supply cable coming from the station batteries onto the H.P. Femalecontacts.

• Insert the above cited contacts onto the NC 3p. SUB – D female connector.• Unsheathe the cable braid (for a max length of 12 mm) and fasten it with the cable holder of the

Connector Holder in order to electrically connect them.• Do not connect the braid to the pins of the connector.• Close the connector into its holder.• Plug–in the connector into the module terminal tagblocks (6), (7) with the acronym ”BATT1”,

”BATT2” of the Figure 144. on page 359 .

SAFETY RULES

For external subrack protection (upstream power station distribution frame) two16A circuit breakers (main battery) and 1A circuit breakers (service battery) aresuggested.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

362

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

With S9 rack:

The components are listed in Table 21. on page 324.

If instead, the equipment is housed in an S9 rack then insert the Power supply cord plug alim./2 (S9)directly onto terminal tagblock (6), (7). The power supply cord plug is inside the S9 Installation Set.

SAFETY RULES

16A Circuit BreakerThis device constitutes the protection breaking point for the station powersupply. Two circuit breakers are supplied with the subrack and are mounted atthe top of the rack S9 (see the relevant documentation).

With Optinex rack

The components are listed in Table 21. page 324.

Insert the Power supply cord plug alim./2 (S9) directly onto terminal tagblock (6), (7). The power supplycord plug is inside the Optinex Installation kit .

SAFETY RULES

15A Circuit BreakerThis device constitutes the protection breaking point for the station powersupply. Two circuit breakers are supplied with the subrack and are mounted atthe Top Rack Unit of the Optinex rack (see the relevant documentation).

IN GENERAL:

SAFETY RULES

Due to possible very high currents in case of short–circuit at the battery powerinput, it is essential that the battery power distribution line shall be provided witha short circuit back–up protection with adequate breaking capacity.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

363

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

TURN–ON, TEST AND OPERATION

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

364

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

365

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6 INITIAL TURN–ON, TESTS AND OPERATION

ATTENTION EMC NORMS

WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATES IN PARA.4.1.2 ON PAGE 32

6.1 General safety rules

The Safety Rules stated in para.3.2 on page 23 describe the operations and/or precautions to observeto safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety.Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.

SAFETY RULES

Carefully observe the front–panel warning labels prior to working onoptical connections while the equipment is in–service.

SAFETY RULES

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by–48 V dc.

DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burnsand/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry beforeworking with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power inputterminals.

SAFETY RULES

DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe therules pointed out in para.3.2.4.2 on page 27.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

366

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.2 General

The following operations are required to activate the equipment:

• Hardware settings• Unit insertion into the subrack



2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %


• Check on protection ground connection and optical connection

• Power supply tests

• Installation in the P.C. of:– Equipment management Craft Terminal SW kits– Equipment software kit

• Equipment SW download ( only if not updated).

• Software settings

• Local tests

• Checks on the link

It might occur that when testing use is made of setting options that are not compliant with the plantsettings. These setting options are defined everytime a test is executed.

Moreover before operating, the equipment must be preset according to the plant requirements.

To reduce time for test and avoid wrong SW configuration due to tests it is important to:

• Perform each test only on the part of equipment (circuits, units) dedicated to that function(ie.: not operate pass–through test on TU used in Drop/insert)

• Don’t modify the plant SW configuration. Save and Send NEW Configuration files for tests andDelete them after use.

Information is given on the conditions present and on the operations to carry out during regular equipmentoperations.


(caution to avoid equipment damage)Locking and unlocking the coaxial cables carrying out the pass-through function on STM-16aggregates must be done using the special tool P/N 1AD 02412 0001 (Factory P/N245.701.833R).Carrying out this operation with different tools may result in cable damage.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

367

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.3 Setting Options

The setting options are of the hardware (HW) and software (SW) type.

With regard to the HW setting options refer to the HARDWARE SETTING section.

With regard to the SW setting options refer to the P.C. Operator’s Handbook. Anyway, before executingthe software setting options,perform the power supply tests described at para 6.5.2 on page 370

To perform the setting options proceed as follows:

• Define the equipment’s station configuration• Compare the equipment’s station configuration with the list of settable units

( see Unit Documentation section ) and choose the ones required.• Compare the equipment’s plant specifications with the tables indicated in the unit circuit

schematics and define the functions to preset.• Execute all the hardware setting options• Install the units into the subracks in the assigned positions• Install the Switch Module sub–units in the upper part of the subrack (access panel)

A label is present on the 34 and 140Mbit/s/STM1 electrical Switch Modules indicating the settingmade. Settings 1+1 MAIN and 1+1 SPARE are given.When 1+N setting is performed, do not insert any indication (factory setting).

• Check the protection ground connection and the optical connection as specified in para 6.5.1on page 369.

• Power supply the equipment as specified in ” Power supply checks” para 6.5.2 on page 370.• Install the management SW applicatives of the Craft terminal onto the P.C..• Install the Equipment software of the relevant release onto the P.C.• Download the Equipment software on the equipment and activate it.

(This operation is carried out only if the equipment release is not updated).• SW configure with the P.C.

PC local operations can be remotely executed with the Operation System.The installation, loading and software configuration procedures are described in the Operator’s Manual.The Part number of the disks to be used are indicated in ” Chapter 2 ” on page 65.

ATTENTION: Save the operative software configuration in a disk / diskette. This is important for maintenance purposes (example : Equipment Controller substitution

with a spare).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

368

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.4 Instruments and Accessories

Table 23. Instruments and Accessories

REF. INSTRUMENT Q.TY CHARACTERISTICS

(A) Pattern Generator/Error Detector 1

Signals available:64Kbit/s codirectional1544Kbit/s code B8ZS (100 ohms)

2048Kbit/s code HDB3 (120/75 ohms)34368Kbit/s code HDB3139264Kbit/s code CMIG.957 compliant STM–1 electrical/optical

(B) Optical power tester (radiometer) 1 2nd window3rd window

(C) Single–mode variable opticalattenuator

1 Variable attenuator within the 0–50dB, 2ndand 3rd window

(D) Digital multimeter 1

(E) Craft terminal (Personal Computer)

See the operator’s handbook. It can be supplied by ALCATEL.

(F) Data Tester 1 Tx rate up to 19200 baudCCITT interface V11

(G) Coaxial Cables 2

terminations:• instrument side depending on (A)• equipment side depending on type

of tributary

(H) Single–mode single–fiber splices 4 Terminations dependent on unitconnectors, radiometer and attenuator

(I) Shielded pair 2termination:• instrument (F)/(A)• SUB.D 15–pin male connector

(L) shielded pair 2termination:• instrument (A)• SUB.D 9–pin male connector

(M) Distribution frame cables 2termination:• instrument (A)• Tributary distribution frame

(N) Frequency counter 1 10 MHz 1 hz

(O) Cables for synchronism 1

termination:• instrument (N)• Synchronism termination

(120 or 75 ohm)

(P) 8 Twisted shiekded pairs 1 The same type used for installation

(S) MPEG–2 ASI Generator 1 –

(T)MPEG–2 ASI Measurement

Decoder1 –

(Z) Lamp 1

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

369

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5 Local Checks

The test which follow describe the procedures relative to the initial turn–on of the units housed in themechanical structure.

The test circuits shows standard equipment.

To configure the test circuits, the equipment must be preset through Craft terminal.

The test are carried out through direct wiring to the equipment. These connections can be also made onthe station distribution frames.

The loop connections indicated in the following test are realized by means wiring. It is possible to activatethem with SW command, using the Alarms, Status and Remote Control application of the Craft Terminal.

NOTE To test properly, refer to Chapter 2 on page 65, as regard to references to unit, numbering (n), and to Chapter 5 on page 311. for the connections to make.

6.5.1 Check on Protection Ground Connections and Optical Connection

SAFETY RULES

Check in the ETSI rack that the subrack and rack have been grounded.

For all types of racks, verify that subrack has been screw fastened to rack.The latter operation guarantees protection ground connection (on the rack).

Check that the optical connection on the equipment are correctly made, asindicated at para 5.3.7 on page 352 and at para 5.3.8.1 on page 355 .

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

370

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.2 Power supply checks

1 ) Check if all the units and subunits have been removed from the subrack with the exception ofthe Power supply unit.

2 ) Switch on the unit through switch (2)

3 ) Check if green LED (1) is ON. If the LED does not light up, check if the battery voltage is presentand if necessary replace the unit.

4 ) Repeat the above tests on the other power supply unit.

5 ) Repeat all the tests described above after having inserted again all the units.If green LED (1) does not light up, it indicates that either the power supply units are faulty orone of the inserted units causes a short–circuit on the power supply outputs.

6.5.3 Lamp Test

The efficiency of the equipment LEDs can also be checked. By pressing push–button (11) on theEquipment Controller unit the LEDs must light up, except for LEDs (5) and (6) of the AUX/EOW unit, andPower Supply LED (1). If otherwise, replace the relevant unit.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

371

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

372

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.4 Aggregate Tx optical power check

• Test circuit of Figure 147. on page 373

• Instruments and accessories to utilize (see Table 23. on page 368)

– Radiometer (B)

– Single–fiber splices (H)

– Personal Computer (E)

1 ) Set up the test circuit.Insert the units involved.Connect the Aggregate unit’s Tx optical connector (4) to the Radiometer through theSingle–fiber splice (H).

2 ) By means of P.C. (E) set the ALS optical protection to be able to carry out manual for testoperation

3 ) Press push–button (5) on the unit for more than 12 secs.The operator has 90 secs. available to carry out the test.

4 ) Switch on the radiometer and check if the Tx optical power value is within the range indicatedin para 4.2. on page 283.It otherwise replace the aggregate unit.

5 ) Repeat this test for each of the Aggregate units.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

373

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

E

5

METER

B

POWER

4

H

9

AGGREGATECRU

EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER

POWER SUPPLY

Figure 147. Tx optical power check

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

374

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.5 Multi–demultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the electrical Tributaries

• Set up the test circuit of Figure 148. on page 375.• Instruments and accessories of Table 23. on page 368

– Pattern Generator/Error Detector (A)– Coaxial cables (G) or shielded pair (L)– Variable optical attenuators (C)– Single–fiber splices (H)– Personal Computer (E)

1 ) Set up the test circuit. Use P.C. (E) to set up the required configurations (tributary inDrop/Insert).A typical connection is shown between the tributary and the Pattern Generator/Error Detectorthrough cables (G) (for 75 ohms connections) or cables (L) (for 120 ohms connections).The aggregate is looped utilizing fiber splices (H) and the Variable Optical Attenuator (C) (preset with a 10dB attenuation).The units inserted are specified in the Figure 148. on page 375

2 ) Preset the instrument to transmit a signal (depending on the type of tributary used) with thefollowing requirements:

Bit rate 1544 Kbit/s 50 ppm or 2048 Kbit/s 50 ppm or 34368 Kbit/s 20 ppm

Code B8ZS HDB3 HDB3

Sequence 215 –1 pseudorandom 215 –1 pseudorandom 215 –1 pseudorandom

Level 3Vp (100ohms) 2.3Vp/75ohms or3Vp (120ohms) 1Vp (75ohms)

Bit rate or 44736Kbit/s 20 ppm or 39264 Kbit/s 15 ppm or 155 520 Kbit/s

Code B3ZS CMI Code/Interface CMI

Sequence 215 –1 pseudorandom 223 –1 pseudorandom

Level 0.85Vp (75ohms) 1Vpp (75ohms)

Type STM–1 electrical

3 ) Check that the Error Detector has read no errors and that there are no alarm indications on theunits concerned.In case of errors/alarms, trouble–shoot with the Personal Computer to detect the type of alarmand eventually replace the Tributary, Matrices, Aggregates, Switch module, CRU units.

N.B. All the tributaries can be simultaneously checked by loop cascading the tributaries.To this concern use the relevant cables.

4 ) Disconnect the Pattern Generator output from the tributary input and check if the AIS signal(all ONES) is present (sent from the Tx side of the tributary involved to the Error Detector). If this condition is not detected, replace the TRIB unit of the tributary involved.

5 ) Connect again the Pattern Generator output to the tributary input and disconnect the multipleloop (H). Check on the Error detector the presence of the AIS signal (all ONES) received fromthe Rx side.

6 ) Reset the link at multiple level and repeat the checks on all the other tributaries.

NOTE: This test can also check tributaries with ”Cross–connection” configurations (Trib–to trib).In this case the optical loop connection is not important.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

375

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATECRU


POWER SUPPLY

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

A

G or L

TRIBUTARIES

MATRIX

E

OPTICALATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H

AGGREGATELOOP

4

3

9

Figure 148. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for electrical tributaries

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

376

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.6 Multi–demultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the DVB Tributaries

• Set up the test circuit of Figure 149. on page 377 .

• Instruments and accessories to utilize (see Table 23. on page 368 ) :

– MPEG–2 ASI Generator (S)

– MPEG–2 ASI Measurement Decoder (T)

– Variable optical attenuators (C)


– Personal computer (E)

1 ) Set up the test circuit.Two DVB tributaries are necessary to perform the test, one working as Tx and the other workingas Rx. To that purpose preset the tributaries as described in the Hardware setting section.The aggregate is looped utilizing fiber splices (H) and the Variable Optical Attenuator (C)(preset with a 10dB attenuation).The units inserted are specified in Figure 149. on page 377.

2 ) Preset the instrument to transmit a video signal

• Bite Rate 270 Mbit/s

• Managed bit rate 2 to 40 Mbit/s

• Code 8B/10B

• Level 800 mVpp/75ohms

3 ) Check that the MPEG–2 ASI Measurement Decoder has read no errors and that there are noalarm indications on the units involved.In case of errors/alarms, trouble–shoot with the Personal Computer to detect the type of alarmand eventually replace the Tributary, Aggregates, CRU units.

4 ) With the MPEG–2 ASI Generator go out of the managed range and check if the AIS signal(all ONES) is present on the Measurement Detector. If this condition is not detected, replacethe DVB working as Rx and perform the test again.If the AIS condition is no more revealed , substitute the DVB card working as TX.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

377

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATECRU


POWER SUPPLY

E

OPTICALATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H

AGGREGATELOOP

4

3

9

1

2

3

1

2

3

MPEG–2 ASIGENERATOR

ST

MPEG–2 ASIMEASUREMENT

DECODER

DVB TRIBUTARY

Figure 149. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for DVB tributary

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

378

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.7 Check on the receiver sensitivity

• Test circuit of Figure 150. on page 379

• Instruments and accessories of Table 23. on page 368

– Pattern Generator/Error Detector (A)

– Radiometer (B)

– Variable optical attenuator (C)


– Coaxial cables (G) or shielded pair (L) (not required when using the optical tributary).


1 ) By means of the P.C. (E) preset the optical protection (ALS) to carry out manual for testoperations.

2 ) Set up the test circuit.A typical connection is shown between the tributary and the Pattern Generator/Error Detectorthrough cables (G) (for 75 ohms connections) or cables (L) (for 120 ohms connections).

With regard to the STM–1 optical tributary the above cables are substituted with two otheroptical fiber splices (H).The aggregates are looped through the optical fiber splices and thevariable optical attenuator (C).

3 ) Set the instrument in accordance with the type of tributary involved and with the characteristicsspecified in para. ” Multi–demultiplexing check and AIS forwarding to the electrical Tributaries”on page 321.

4 ) The optical attenuator must attenuate 10dB

5 ) Check that the Error Detector reads no errors.

6 ) Gradually increase the attenuation of the Optical attenuator until a 1x10–10 BER is read on theError Detector.

7 ) Disconnect the single–fiber splice from the Rx unit optical connector (3) and connect it to theradiometer (detail 1 of the Figure 150. on page 379)

8 ) Press push–button (5) on the unit for more than 12 secs.The operator has 90 secs. available to carry out the test.

9 ) Check if the Rx optical power level on the Radiometer is within the sensitivity level indicated in par. 4.2 on page 283.If otherwise replace the Aggregate unit.

10 ) Repeat the test for each of the Aggregate units.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

379

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATECRU


POWER SUPPLY

TRIBUTARIES

MATRIX

E

9OPTICAL

ATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H

POWERMETER

DETAIL 1

B

H

4

3

5

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

A

G or L

7

Figure 150. Receiver sensitivity check

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

380

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.8 Check on the efficiency of the optical protection (ALS)

• Set up the test circuit of Figure 150. on page 379



– Radiometer (B)




– Coaxial cables (G) or shielded pair (L). Not required when utilizing the optical tributary.

1 ) Set up the test circuit.

2 ) Set the attenuation of the variable optical attenuator to approx. 10dB.

3 ) Refer to the P.C. (E) applications operator’s handbook and check if the automatic and manualoptical protections of the Aggregate unit are inserted. If not proceed to program them.

4 ) Disconnect the single–fiber splice (H) ( connected to the Tx optical connector (4) ) from theoptical attenuator and connect it to the radiometer so as to measure the transmitted optical power.

This condition causes red LED (6) on the Equipment Controller unit to light up, and the AIS criteria to be received on the Error Detector.

5 ) Check that the LASER power is null. Moreover check if a power reset is attempted after approx.180 secs.. This condition must last approx. 2secs.If these conditions do not occur, replace the Aggregate unit

6 ) Reset the test circuit by connecting again the attenuator

7 ) Repeat what stated at point 5; disconnect the attenuator and connect the radiometer.

8 ) Check if the Tx optical power is null. Press push–button (5) on the Aggregate unit’s frontcoverplate and check that a power reset is attempted for approx. 2 secs.If otherwise replace the unit.

9 ) Press push–button (5) for more than 12 secs again and check if an optical power reset isattempted for approx. 90 secs. (MANUAL FORTEST function).If otherwise replace the unit.

10 ) Repeat the test for each of the Aggregate units.

ATTENTION

The optical protection provided to the optical tributaries is tested in a similar manner andwith relevant connections.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

381

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

382

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.9 Test on Tx optical power transmitted by the Optical 155Mbit/s Tributary


• Instruments and accessories to utilize (Table 23. on page 368)

– Variable Optical Attenuator (C)

– Radiometer (B)



1 ) Set up the test circuit.Insert the units involved.Connect the TRIB. unit’s optical connector (5) to the Radiometer through the Single–fibersplice (H).

2 ) By means of P.C. (E) set the ALS optical protection to be able to carry out manual for testoperation.

3 ) Press push–button (3) on the unit for more than 12 secs.

4 ) Switch on the radiometer and check if the Tx optical power value is within the range indicatedin para 4.2 on page 283.

If otherwise replace the optical tributary unit.

5 ) Repeat the test for each of the Optical Tributaries.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

383

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATECRU


POWER SUPPLY

E

9OPTICAL

ATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H

POWERMETER

B

H

4

3

5

5

3

AGGREGATELOOP

STM–1 OPTICALTRIBUTARY

Figure 151. Check on the optical power transmitted by the Optical Tributary

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

384

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.10 Multi–demultiplexing and AIS tests on the optical 155Mbit/s tributary







1 ) Set up the test circuit and insert the relevant units. Specifically, connect the Pattern Generatoroutput to the input optical connector (4) and the error detector to the output optical connector(5) on the optical tributary unit through the single–fiber splices (H).

Loop the Tx (4) and Rx (3) optical connectors of the Aggregate unit through the single–fibersplices (H) and the variable optical attenuator (C) set to 10dB. Use the P.C. (E) to set up therequired configurations (Tributary in drop/insert).

2 ) Preset the instrument to transmit a signal with the following requirements:

Bit rate 155.52 Mbit/s

Interface S–1.1 or L–1.1

Type SDH (STM–1) optical

3 ) Check that no error is read on the Error Detector.If errors are detected, trouble–shoot the electrical connections or replace the TRIB unit orAggregate unit.

4 ) Disconnect the Pattern Generator from the optical connector (4) of the Optical Trib., andcheck that the AIS signal (all ONES) is present on the Error Detector.If this condition is not detected, replace the TRIB unit.

5 ) Connect again the Pattern Generator output to the optical connector (4) and disconnectthe multiple loop.Check if the AIS signal (all ONES) is present on the Error Detector.

6 ) Reset the connection at 155Mbit/s level and repeat all the checks on all the other 155 Mbit/soptical tributaries (if any).

7 ) Repeat the test for each of the Optical Tributaries.

NOTE: This test and also check tributaries with ”Cross–connection” configurations (trib to trib).In this case the optical aggregate loop connection is not important.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

385

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATECRU


POWER SUPPLY

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

A

H

MATRIX

E

9OPTICAL

ATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H 4

3

5

AGGREGATELOOP

STM–1 OPTICALTRIBUTARY

4

Figure 152. Test on multi–demultiplexing and AIS for optical tributaries

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

386

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.11 Check on the 64 Kbit/s auxiliary channels



– Pattern generator/Error detector (A)

– Shielded pair (I)




1 ) Set the test circuit.

• Through shielded pairs (I) connect the Pattern Generator/Error Detector (A) to theconnector 64 Kbit/s of the Auxiliary access module.

• Connect the single–fiber splices (H) to the Tx and Rx optical connectors (3) and (4)of the Aggregate unit.

• Connect the other ends of the single–fiber splices to the variable optical attenuator(C) set to 10dB.

• Use the P.C. (E) to set up the required configurations

2 ) Transmit a 64Kbit/s signal with G703 interface through the Pattern generator.

3 ) Check if no error is present on the Error detector. If errors are detected, trouble–shoot theelectrical connections or replace one at a time the AUX unit and the Aggregate unit.

4 ) Disconnect the Pattern Generator from the 64Kbit/s connector and check if the AIS signal (allONES) is on the Error Detector. If this condition is not detected, replace the AUX unit.

5 ) Repeat the checks on all the other 64Kbit/s channels.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

387

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATECRU


POWER SUPPLY

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

i

E

9OPTICAL

ATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H 4

3

A

AUX

Figure 153. Kbit/s auxiliary channels check

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

388

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.12 Check on the V11 auxiliary channels



– Data Tester (F)

– Shielded pair (I)




1 ) Set the test circuit

• Through shielded pairs (I) connect the Data Tester (F) to the V11 Auxiliary AccessModule

• Connect the single–fiber splices (H) to the Tx and Rx optical connectors (3) and (4)of the Aggregate unit.

• Connect the other ends of the single–fiber splices to the 10dB variable opticalattenuator.

• Use the P.C. (E) to set up the required configurations

2 ) Transmit the V11 signal through the Data Tester (I) with the following value:

• PRBS signal

• bit–rate 9600 baud

• code NRZ

• pattern 29–1

• clock source INTERNAL

3 ) Check that no error is present on the Data Tester (I)If otherwise, replace the AUX/EOW unit or the Aggregate unit.

4 ) Disconnect the Data tester transmission from the input of the connector and check if the AISsignal (all ONES) is received.If otherwise, replace the AUX/EOW unit.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

389

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATECRU


POWER SUPPLY

E

9OPTICAL

ATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H 4

3

AUX

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

iF

Figure 154. V11 auxiliary channels check

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

390

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.13 STM–4 Aggregate APS Protection check


• Instruments and accessories of Table 23. on page 368:


– Coaxial cable (G) or shielded pair (L)

– Single–filter splices (H)


1 ) Set up the test circuitTwo Aggregates of the same side are looped (with attenuator fixed or variable, 10 dB) bymeans fiber splices (H)Use P.C (E) to set up the required configurations.The units inserted are specified in the Figure 155. on page 391.

2 ) Preset the instrument to transmit a signal according the tributary requirements (as for theprevious chapters)

3 ) Check that the Error Detector has read no errors and that there are no alarm indications onthe unit concerned.

4 ) Disconnect the Loop on the Aggregate in service

5 ) After a transient condition (with AIS indication) verify that no error are present on the ErrorDetector

6 ) Repeat the test on the other Aggregate.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

391

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATE

CRUEQUIPMENT CONTROLLER

POWER SUPPLY

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

G

E

9

H4

3

F

or L

TRIBUTARIES

MATRIX

AGGREGATELOOP

AGGREGATELOOP

Figure 155. Test on Aggregate Protection (APS)

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

392

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.14 Tributary EPS Protection Check

The following Test Circuits are indicated for each type of protection involved.

Figure 156. on page 393 For Trib 21x2 Mbit/s – EPS N+1The example shows the connection with 2 Mb/s Trib. 1 of unit 1 (slot 2).

Figure 157. on page 394 For Trib 3x34 Mbit/s or 3x45 Mbit/s or 140/STM1 electrical – EPS N+1The example shows the connection with 140 Mb/s Trib. 1 (slot 2).Therefore, SPARE 1 is the stand–by one.

Figure 158. on page 395 For Trib 3x34 Mbit/s or 3x45 Mbit/s or 140/STM1 electrical – EPS 1+1The example shows the 140 Mb/s 1+1 switch on the first two units(slots 2 and 3).The connections required on the switch modules are indicated.

• Instruments and accessories shown on Table 23. on page 368


– Coaxial cables (G) or shielded cables (L)



– Fiber splices (H)

1 ) Set up the test circuit.Aggregate looping is obtained through the Optical Attenuator (C) (set to a 10 dB attenuation)

Configure as required using the PC (E) (Drop/Insert tributaries)The Switch Modules too must be set according to the EPS configuration.The units concerned are specified on the figure.

2 ) Set instrument (A) to send a signal compliant with the Tributary concerned.

3 ) Check that the Error Detector reads no errors and that there is no alarm indication on the unitinvolved.

4 ) Remove the in–service Tributary unit and check, after a transient condition, that no errors areread by the error detector (the stand–by unit is now operating).

5 ) Place back the Tributary unit and then remove the stand–by Tributary unit (now in service).Check after a transient condition that no errors are read by the Error Detector.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

393

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATECRU


POWER SUPPLY

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

A

G or

21x2Mbit/s

21x2Mbit/s

E

9OPTICAL

ATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H

AGGREGATELOOP

4

3

TRIBUTARIES

SPARETRIBUTARY

MATRIX

L

Figure 156. Test on 21 x 2 Mbit/s trib. N+1 EPS protection

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

394

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATE

CRU


POWER SUPPLY

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

G

E

9

4

3

A

34Mbit/s or

3x34MbitS or

OPTICALATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H

AGGREGATELOOP

140/ STM1 elTRIBUTARIES

140/STM1 el SPARETRIBUTARIES

MATRIX

SPARE1

SPARE2SWITCH

UNITS

Figure 157. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. N+1 EPS protection

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

395

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATE

CRU


POWER SUPPLY

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

G

E

9

4

3

A

34Mbit/s or

MATRIX

OPTICALATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H

AGGREGATELOOP

140/ STM1 elTRIBUTARIES

Figure 158. Test on 34 or 140/STM1 trib. 1+1 EPS protection

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

396

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.15 CRU’s EPS Protection check



– Frequency Counter (N)


– Cable for synchronism (O)


• Use cable (O) to connect to the outgoing synch. point (CK OUT) on M150

• Configure the 1+1 protected CRU and the other correct selections the P.C.

2 ) Check for presence of output synch. frequency

3 ) Remove the CRU configured to operate as Main

4 ) Check for the presence of a output synch. frequency after a transient condition

5 ) Re–insert the Main CRU

6 ) Remove the Spare CRU

7 ) Check for the presence of the output synch. frequency after a transient condition.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

397

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATE

CRU


POWER SUPPLY

FREQUENCYCOUNTER

O

E

9

N

Figure 159. Test on CRU EPS protection

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

398

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.16 Full Matrix EPS protection check


• Instrument and accessories of Table 23. on page 368


– Coaxial Cable (G) or Shielded pair (L)




1 ) Set up the test circuitA typical connection is shown between the tributary and the Pattern Generator/Error Detectorthrough cables (G) (for 75 ohm connections) or cables (L) (for 120 ohm connections).

The aggregate is looped utilizing fiber splices (H) and the Variable Optical Attenuator (C)(present with a 10 dB attenuation).Use PC (E) to set up the required configurations.The units inserted are specified in Figure 160. on page 399

2 ) Preset the instrument to transmit a signal according the tributary requirements.

3 ) Check that the Error Detector has read no errors and that there are no alarm indications onthe unit concerned.

4 ) Remove the Main Full Matrix

5 ) After a transient condition (with AIS indication) verify that no error are present on the ErrorDetector.

6 ) Re–insert the Main Full Matrix

7 ) Remove the Spare Full Matrix

8 ) Verify that, after a transient condition, no errors are present on the Error Detector.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

399

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATE

CRU


POWER SUPPLY

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

G

E

9

4

3

A

OPTICALATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H

AGGREGATELOOP

TRIBUTARIES

MATRICES

MATRIX

Lor

Figure 160. Test on Full Matrix EPS protection

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

400

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.17 Check on External free running synchronism



– Frequency counter (N)

– Personal computer (E)

– Cable for synchronism (O)


• Through cable (O) connect the CKOUT synchronism of M150 to the frequency counter

• Use the P.C. (E) to work in the free running mode in the Equipment configurations.

2 ) Check the free running frequency at 2048 KHz 4.6 ppm (from 2047990.58 to 2048009.42Hz).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

401

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

CRU


POWER SUPPLY

E

9

FREQUENCYCOUNTER

O

N

Figure 161. Check on External free running synchronism

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

402

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.5.18 Remote Alarms check



– Optical Attenuator (C)– Pattern Generator/Error Detector (A)– Digital Multimeter (D)– Coaxial Cables (G) or shielded pair (L)– Single fiber splice (H)– Personal Computer (E)– Lamp (Z), that could be consisting of a LED, connected to a –Vtest voltage generator

whose ground is common with the equipment, and a series resistance Rs, whose valueis given by: Rs=(Vtest)/10 mA.

N.B. Vtest must not exceed 72V, and the output current from the pin must not exceed 50 mA, furtherthe used LED should bear a 10 mA current.

1 ) Set up the test circuitThe Aggregate is looped and connected to the variable attenuator preset at 10 dB.

2 ) Preset the Pattern Generator to transmit a signal according to the tributary requirements(as for the previous chapters).Check on (A) that no errors or alarms are detected.

3 ) Connect the lamp (Z) to the pin to be tested on the RA tagblock on the Alarm Interface AccessModule and, operating as for Table 24. on page 402. Verify that the relevant alarm is present,by observing that the lamp (Z) turns ON and by checking that the voltage measured on theDigital Multimeter (D) is in the range 0V ÷ –2V. Note: this latter voltage must be measuredbetween the pin and the equipment ground. Test all the other remote alarms by proceeding inthe same way.

Table 24. Remote Alarms activation

Remote Alarms Simulation

INT Extract one unit (in service)

URG + EXT Disconnect the Aggregate Loop

NURG Increase the attenuation with the optical attenuator

IND Transmit all ”1” with the Pattern Generator

TOR Disconnect one station battery(the Alarm Interface Access Module

performing the AND/OR function must be equipped)

TAND Disconnect two station batteries(the Alarm Interface Access Module

performing the AND/OR function must be equipped)

TORC Turn off one Power supply unit

TANC Turn off two Power Supply units

LOS Q2 Disconnect the QB3 LAN from the Qx & Sync access module

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

403

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

AGGREGATE

CRU


POWER SUPPLY

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

G

E

9

4

3

A

OPTICALATTENUATOR

IN

OUT

C

H

TRIBUTARIES

Lor

DIGITALMULTIMETER

P D

LED Rs

–Vtest

Z

Figure 162. Test on remote alarms

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

404

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.6 Check on the Link

N.B. To test correctly refer to Chapter 2 on page 65 as regards to references made to positions (P)and numbering (n), and to Chapter 5 on page 311 as regards to wiring.

6.6.1 Multi–demultiplexing check on the link




– Distribution frame cabling (M)

The check must be made on all the tributary streams which do not transit through the equipmentinvolved, i.e., all the tributaries in ”terminal”configurations, and the drop/insert tributaries in add–dropconfigurations.

Further on the test can also be made to check ”Cross–connection” aggregate configurations.In this case the Equipment is stations (2) will be SW configured to cross connect TU or AU4 within thesame side Aggregate.Tributary loop are not important.The functional block is indicated with ”*” in the Figure 163. on page 405.

The example of the Figure 163. on page 405 is applicable (function–wise) to all tributaries.

1 ) Set up the test circuit.The tributaries are looped on the station distribution frame (2).

Connect the Pattern Generator output to the input of the 1st tributary and the input of the ErrorDetector to the output of the latter using cables (M).

2 ) Check if the level of the connected tributary signals is coherent. If otherwise preset it.

3 ) Adjust the rate and level of the (A) instrument with the tributary involved.

4 ) Check that no optical alarm indications are present on the equipment nor errors are read oninstrument (A).

If alarms and/or errors are detected and if all the local checks have been made, the failure isdue to external causes. If the local checks have not been executed, proceed according to theinstructions given in para. 6.5 on page 369.

5 ) Repeat the checks on the other tributaries if necessary.

NOTE – All the tributaries can be simultaneously tested by cascade–connecting the tributaries of station1, and by looping the tributaries in station 2.For this operation use proper wiring.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

405

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

A

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

1

2

N

M

1651–SMLINE

1

2

N

MUXDEMUX

AGG. STM–16

TOor

AU4

1651–SM or 1661 SM–C

TRIBUTARYDISTRIBUTIONFRAME

LINEDISTRIBUTION

FRAME

1 2

LINEDISTRIBUTIONFRAME

TRIBUTARYDISTRIBUTION

FRAME

or1661 SM–C

1651–SMor

1661 SM–C

Figure 163. Multi–demultiplexing tests on the link

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

406

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.6.2 Transit (pass–through) check on the link





The check must be executed on all the tributary streams involved in transit operations.

The example of the Figure 164. on page 407 is applicable (function–wise) to all tributaries.This example shows the check of n–th trib. streams connected between station (1) and (3) through thestation (2) ”transits”.

To set up a real link wire as instructed below:

1 ) Set up the test circuitThe tributary is looped on the station distribution frame (3).Instrument (A) is connected to the Tx side of the first tributary (Tx side) and to the Rx side ofthe latter in station (1) through cables (M).

This link permits to check the equipment transits through station (2) connected to the otherstations through sides WEST and EAST.

2 ) Check if the level of the connected tributary signals is compliant. If otherwise preset it.

3 ) Adjust the rate and level of the (A) instrument according to the tributaries involved.

4 ) Check that no optical alarm indications nor errors are read on instrument (A).

If alarms and/or errors are detected and if all the local checks have been made, the failure isdue to external causes, or to the erroneous pass–through operation. If the local checks have not been executed, proceed as indicated in para.6.5 on page 369.

5 ) Repeat the tests on all the other tributaries inside the equipment.

NOTE – All the tributaries can be simultaneously tested by cascade–connecting the tributaries of station1, and by looping the tributaries in station 3.For this operation use proper wiring.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

407

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

A

PA

TT

ER

NG

EN

ER

AT

OR

ER

RO

RD

ET

EC

TO

R

1 2 N

M

LIN

E16

51 S

M

1 2 N

TR

IBU

TAR

YD

IST

RIB

UT

ION

FR

AM

E

LIN

ED

IST

RIB

UT

ION

FR

AM

E

13

LIN

ED

IST

RIB

UT

ION

FR

AM

E

TR

IBU

TAR

YD

IST

RIB

UT

ION

FR

AM

E

LIN

E

2

TR

IBU

TAR

YD

IST

RIB

UT

ION

FR

AM

E

LIN

ED

IST

RIB

UT

ION

FR

AM

E

or16

61 S

M–C

1651

SM

or16

61 S

M–C

1651

SM

or16

61 S

M–C

Figure 164. ”Transits” check on the link

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

408

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.6.3 TU path–protection check on a ring connection





The example shown in Figure 165. on page 409 is applicable to all types of tributaries and to all types ofring–connections.

• Set up the test circuit

• Starting from station 1 connect the Pattern Generator/Error Detector (A) to tributary 1.In accordance to the software configuration of the three stations, this tributary must be assignedto station 2 and station 3 must be considered as spare.(The tributary transits through station 3).Loop tributary 1 onto station 2

• Set instrument (A) according to the tributary involved.

• Check that no optical alarm indications are present on the equipment, nor errors are read oninstrument (A).

• Disconnect, from the relevant distribution frame, the optical fiber splice between stations 1 and 2.

• After a transient period ascertain that no errors are read on instrument (A).

• Repeat the tests on all the other tributaries.

6.6.4 Check on the EOW channel

This check must be executed on the real link after having performed all the checks previously described.

After having activated all the equipment of the link, proceed according to the instructions stated inpara.6.7.1 on page 411 . The procedure is set from one of the two stations involved.

Repeat the operations from the opposite direction of the link

If a link cannot be set up, even though all the operations have been correctly executed, replace theAUX/EOW unit.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

409

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

A

PATTERNGENERATOR

ERRORDETECTOR

1

2

N

M

1651–SM

LINE

1

2

N

TRIBUTARYDISTRIBUTIONFRAME

LINEDISTRIBUTION

FRAME

3 2


TRIBUTARYDISTRIBUTION

FRAME

LINE LINE

W

E W

E

1651–SM

12NTRIBUTARYDISTRIBUTION

FRAME

1


W E

or1661 SM–C

or1661SM–C

1651–SMor

1661SM–C

Figure 165. TU cross–over check on a ring–connection

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

410

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.7 Operation

N.B. To properly execute the test refer to ”Chapter 2 ” on page 65 which cross–refers to unit numberassignment (n).

When the equipment operates regularly, the green LEDs (1) are ON to indicate that the Power supplyunits are working.

Green LED (7) on the AUX/EOW unit is also ON to indicate engineering order–wire operation.

The following conditions can occur:

Green LED (2) ON on the Aggregate unit or140/STM–1 Switch Tributary unit

Indicates unit in–service

Equipment Controller unit

Yellow LED (4) glowing indicates abnormal condition (active loopbacks,forging unit into service, Laser forced ON or OFF,try to restart after ALS)

AUX/EOW unit

Yellow LED (6) ON indicates busy line

Yellow LED (6) flashing indicates reception of the selective call

Yellow LED (5) ON indicates conference call

The lighting up of other LEDs indicates mulfunction conditions

By pressing push–button (11) on the Equipment Controller check that all the equipment LEDs light–up(except (5) and (6) of the AUX/EOW or (1) of POWER SUPPLY units) without causing alarm.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

411

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.7.1 Engineering Order Wire channel

The following procedure permits to set up service speech connections between two equipment installedin opposite stations.

Numerical reference concern the AUX/EOW unit.

• Insert the telephone handset with keypad into socket (2) on the calling equipment.

• Check if green LED (7) is ON and yellow LEDs (6) and (5) OFF.

• Hook off the telephone handset through the relative switch

• The free tone must be received.

• Press push–button ”J” (4) which seizes the line

• Ckeck if green LED (7) goes off and yellow LED (6) lights up.

• In these conditions, a busy tone will be heard by the other parties when the telephone handsetis inserted and hooked off.

• Select the number involved on the keypad of the calling telephone handset

• The buzzer rings and the yellow LED (6) flashes in the station where the selected EOW channelis present.

• The called party must insert and hook off the telephone handset. In this condition, the buzzermust stop ringing.

• Both telephone handsets must be hooked on again and verify that the line has released, i.e.,the green LED must be ON and the yellow LEDs must be off on both equipment.

• Select ”conference call” (number 00) on the keypad of the calling Telephone handset.

• The buzzer ring and the yellow led (5) is ON in all the other stations.

• In all the stations in which the operator insert and hook off the telephone handset, the buzzermust stop ringing, yellow led (5) is OFF and yellow led (6) is ON.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

412

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

6.7.2 Download of the equipment software release

The equipment allows to update the software version according to equipment evolution.The download software is executed with the equipment working. The operation is executed locally throughthe Craft Terminal containing the Equipment applicative to load or remotely by means Operation System.SW download is executed both on the Equipment Controller and on the Card Controllers of the variousunits.All the relevant operations are fully detailed in the Operator’s Manual.

6.7.3 Craft terminal–managed equipment

During the operating phase too, the Operator can utilize the application phases made available by the Craftterminal and described in the relevant Operator’s Manual.

Specifically:

• Administrative application allows to set–up new operator functions

• Configuration applications allows to check and modify software settings.

• The Alarms and Maintenance Memory application inform on the current and previousequipment status.

• Performance Monitoring application allows network surveillance checking the values of errorsparameters and obtaining data on the quality of the links on path and section.

• Remote Inventory application informs on data of the unit inserted (identification, constructiondata, serial number, etc).

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

413

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

MAINTENANCE

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

414

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

415

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

7 MAINTENANCE

ATTENTION EMC NORMS

WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.4.1.3 on page 32

7.1 General safety rules

The Safety Rules stated in para.3.2 on page 23 describe the operations and/or precautions to observeto safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety.Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.

SAFETY RULES

Carefully observe the front–panel warning labels prior to working on opticalconnections while the equipment is in–service.

Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceedto switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream(rack or station distribution frame)

SAFETY RULES



SAFETY RULES

DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe therules pointed out in para.3.2.4.2 on page 27.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

416

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

7.2 Maintenance Aspects

Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimumoperating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.

Maintenance is classified as:

• ROUTINE

• CORRECTIVE

7.3 Instruments And Accessories

There is a local terminal (PC) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.The relative processing is described in the operator’s handbook.

When TMN is implemented, an Operation System display alarms and manages all the Equipmentsconnected.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

417

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

7.4 Routine Maintenance

Routine maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers thosedevices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement.

Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance.

The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links for SECTION and PATH on tributariesand aggregates, by counting the errored events and obtaining performance data.

The Performance Monitoring Application, described in the Operator’s Handbook, allows this function.

7.4.1 Routine Maintenance every year

SAFETY RULES



It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:

• Check that the cable (N3 rack) is perfectly safety grounded (FASTON, see5.3.1 on page 328).

• Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack withscrews, to guarantee grounding (the rack is connected to the stationground).

By pressing push–button (11), see in Chapter 2 the Figure 30. on page 89 , on the Equipment Controllercheck that all the equipment LEDs light–up (except (5) and (6) of the AUX/EOW or (1) of POWER SUPPLYunits) without causing alarm.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

418

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

7.5 Corrective Maintenance (Trouble/Shooting)

The complete Troubleshooting description in given in the Maintenance Section of the Operator’sHandbook.



2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %



(caution to avoid equipment damage)Locking and unlocking the coaxial cables carrying out the pass-through function on STM-16aggregates must be done using the special tool P/N 1AD 02412 0001 (Factory P/N245.701.833R).

Carrying out this operation with different tools may result in cable damage.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

419

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

7.6 Set of spare parts

7.6.1 Suggested Spare Parts

The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the averageamount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plug–inunit (see unit list in Chapter 2 on page 65).

7.6.2 General rules on spare parts management

Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipmentIt is suggested to periodically check those spare units have not been utilized for over a year.If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare partsare placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.

If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,make sure that the following is observed:

– the spare parts must be wrapped in anti–static and padded envelopes;

– the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might demage them (e.g. gas);

– if during transport the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept, makesure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermalshocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.

When replacing a unit/sub–unit, make sure that the spare unit/sub–unit is set exactly as thereplaced one. For the presettings procedures see para.6.3 on page 367.

7.6.3 Particular rules on spare parts management

Whenever some units with flash-memories are common to different kinds of equipment or to differentversions of the same type of equipment, it is possible to maintain one spare part only: this allows sparepart stock saving, even though software downloading will be necessary when the software loaded into theunit (program part or data part) is different from that necessary in the equipment where the spare unit mustbe used.At the end of the commissioning phase or after an equipment data change, it is suggested to save theequipment data, e.g. on floppy disk, and store this floppy disk in the spare part stock pointing out theequipment it refers to.

7.7 Repair Form

To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Figure 166. onpage 420.The repair form must be filled–in with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with thefaulty unit.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

420

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

REPAIR FORMFill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel

TO

BE

FIL

LED

IN B

Y T

HE

SE

ND

ER

FAULT PHASE

INSTALLATION /

OPERATION

MAINTENANCE

REASON FOR REPAIR

CLEAR FAULT

INTERMITTENT FAULT

TEMPERATURE FAULT

DROP IN PERFORMANCE

UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT

PRESUMED CAUSE

INTERNAL

LIGHTNING

AIR COND.

OTHER

EXTERNAL

FAULT STILL PRESENTAFTER REPAIR

COMMENTS

NAME OF SENDER

PROCESSING

NO FAULTS FOUND

STANDARD REPAIRING

QUALITY ALERT

UPGRADE

NOT REPAIRABLE

SUBSTITUTED

(REJECTED)

TURN ONTURN ON

A

B–D

I

I

M

S–X

FAULTS DETECTED

SOLDERING / ADJUSTMENT

CORROSION

C P

V3

COMPONENT

MECHANICAL PRINTED

F–L

V1 V1

DIRT

OTHER

V2

CIRCUIT BOARD

DATE REPAIRING NUMBER REPAIRING CENTRE NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR

COMMENTS

TO

BE

FIL

LED

IN B

Y T

HE

RE

PA

IR O

PE

RA

TO

R

DATE

CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER

SITE BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY

SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT PRODUCT RELEASE EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER

SLOTSUBRACKSTATION/RACK

MNEMONIC

SERIAL NUMBER

ALCATEL PART NUMBER

FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION

NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE

WIRING

A L C A T E L

Figure 166. Repair form

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

421

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

APPENDICES

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

422

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

No Appendices are enclosed in this Handbook

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

423

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

424

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

425

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

UNIT DOCUMENTATION LIST

This section contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/sub–unit hardware setting options.The list of the enclosed documents is given in Table 26. on page 428 according to the ANV part number.

TABLE EXPLANATION:

– UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS

Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by:

• a dual Part No.:

– Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)

– ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx) (NOTE)

NOTE The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as ’suffix’) stand for a ”feasiblealternative”, they might differentiate two units even though still functionallycompatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last twoletters.For example : the units having P/Ns ”3AL–34065–AAAA” and ”3AL–34065–AABA”are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxxdocument (described hereafter) 3AL–34065–AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.

• and by a pair of design & production series (change status):

– CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)

– ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)

The following table shows an example of correspondence between ”FACTORY P/N + CS” and”ANV P/N + ICS”

Table 25. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’

N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment partlist!

FACTORY CODE ANV CODE

P/N CS P/N ICS

487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AA AA 01

487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AA AB 01

487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AA AC 01

In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as theFactory code is concerned, and by the ’suffix + ICS’ if the ANV code is referred to.

Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the unit’s P/Ns and CS–ICS are illustratedin para. 4.4 on page 34.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

426

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

– CROSS–REFERENCE

• Id. Unit alphabetical notation. It indicates the unit containing one or more subunits.

• App. It reports the unit notation (Id) to which the sub–unit belongs.

The hardware settings can be executed after having checked all the sub–units belonging to a unit,by considering the above cited cross–reference, and by using the presetting documents indicatedin the table and presented in the following point.

– ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS

For each type of unit or sub-unit having customizable setting options, the document

”ANV P/N”–MSxxx

is annexed to this handbook (in the case of Documentation on CD-ROM the MSxxx documents maybe given in a CD-ROM different from that containing this Technical Handbook).

The MSxxx documents are enclosed in numerical order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxxdocument is the highest available on the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled.

Use of the document MSxxx:

• MSxxx means ”document for hardware presetting options” (the MSxxx document’s Part No.is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type).The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes.

• As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with differentCS–ICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different settingoptions, according to all the possible CSs–ICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning ofdocument (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or thecorresponding ’suffix + ICS’, taking into account that:– a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting

options;– a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document;– the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:

• from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included)• to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed

– the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lowerthan CS=01).

Each chapter contains:

– one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and thesetting options to make;

– the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.

N.B. IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT

The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Table 26. on page 428, whichshows the ’ON’ (closed) position of microswitches.Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only shouldnever be modified.

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

427

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

EXAMPLE

N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment partlist!

Taking into account the same unit of Table 25. on page 425:


P/N CS P/N ICS

487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01

487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01

487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01

and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but changefor CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:

CHAPTER

FACTORY P/NCODICE DI FABBRICA

ANV P/NCODICE ANVCHAPTER

CAPITOLO FROM CSDA CS

FROM SUFFIXDA SUFFISSO

FROM ICSDA ICS

1 01 ––AA 01

2 03 ––AC 01

If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:


P/N CS P/N ICS

487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01

487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01

you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ

If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:


P/N CS P/N ICS

487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01

487.156.612 04 3AL 34422 AAAD 01

you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

428

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

Table 26. Hardware presetting documentation

The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook isthe highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents isnot specified in this table.

Id NAME App PARTS No.Document

for hardwarepresettings

a 3 x 34 Mbit/s TRIB. 3AL 34065 AA– –(411.100.120 B)

–

b 140/STM–1 Switch Tributary 3AL 34066 AA–– (411.100.129 G)

–

c L–4.2 STM–4 Aggregate Port 3AL 34069 AA––(411.100.134 V )

–

d L–4.2 Aggregate Port SC 3AL 34069 AB––(411.100.406 F)

–

e Full Matrix 3AL 34072 AA––(411.100.142 D)

–

f 21x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm TRIB 3AL 34075 AB––(411.100.331 A)

–

g 21x2 Mbit/s 120 ohm TRIB 3AL 34075 AC––(411.100.330 M)

–

h L–1.1 Trib. SC 3AL 34077 AA––(411.100.158 M)

–

i 3 x 45 Mbit/s TRIB. 3AL 34080AA––(411.100.162H)

–

j S–1.1 Trib. FC. 3AL 34277 AA–– ( 411.100.171 A)

–

k S–1.1 Trib. DIN 3AL 34278 AA–– ( 411.100.172 B)

–

l L–1.1 Trib. DIN 3AL 34279 AA–– ( 411.100.173 C)

–

m L–1.1 Trib. FC 3AL 34280 AA––(411.100.174 D)

–

n L–4.1 STM–4 Aggregate Port 3AL 34291 AA––(411.100.153 G)

–

o S–4.1 STM–4 Aggregate Port 3AL 34292 AA––(411.100.154 H)

–

p S–4.1 Aggregate Port DIN 3AL 34293 AA––(411.100.168 P)

–

q L–4.1 Aggregate Port DIN 3AL 34294 AA––(411.100.169 Q)

–

r L–4.2 Aggregate Port DIN 3AL 34295 AA–– (411.100.170 M)

–

s S–1.1 Trib. 600 3AL 34296 AA––(411.100.185 Z)

–

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

429

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

IdDocument


PARTS No.AppNAME

t S–1.1 Trib. SC 3AL 34324 AA––(411.100.160 k)

–

u L–1.1 Trib. 600 3AL 34437 AA––(411.100.247 N)

–

v AUX EOW UNIT 3AL 34453 AE––(411.100.483 U)

–

w AUX EOW Extension 3AL 34453 AF––(411.100.484 V)

–

x 34/2 TRANS.MUX & 5x2 Mbit/sTrib.

3AL 34474 AA––(411.100.236 B)

–

y S–4.1 Aggregate Port SC 3AL 34652 AA––(411.100.243 J)

–

z L–4.1 Aggregate Port SC 3AL 34653 AA––(411.100.244 K)

–

aa SMEC 2A 8R+16F 3AL 34732 AA––(411.100.301M)

–

ab L–4.2JE STM–4 Aggregate Port 3AL 34733 AA––(411.100.302 N)

–

ac L–4.2 JE Aggregate Port DIN 3AL 34733AB––(411.100.390J)

–

ad L–4.2 JE Aggregate Port SC 3AL 34733AC––(411.100.431 X)

–

ae ENHANCED CRU 0.37 PPM 3AL 34787 AA––(411.100.306 J)

–

af S–1.1 Trib. 600 SC 3AL34804AA–– (411.100.245 L )

–

ag L–1.1 Trib. 600 SC 3AL 34805 AA––(411.100.246 M)

–

ah L–1.2 TRIB FC 3AL 34918 AA––(411.100.325 C)

–

ai L–1.2 TRIB SC 3AL 34918 AC––(411.100.788 M)

–

aj L–1.2 TRIB 600 3AL 35714 AA––(411.100.358 V)

–

ak ENHANCED CRU 3AL 35808 AA––(411.100.363J)

–

al L–16.1 HM1 Aggregate 3AL 35810 AA––(411.100.349U)

–

am L–16.1 HM1 Aggregate SC 3AL 35810AB––(411.100.459 K)

–

an L–16.2 HM1 Aggregate 3AL 35811 AA––(411.100.361Q)

–

ao L–16.2 HM1 Aggregate SC 3AL 35811AB––(411.100.460 Q)

–

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

430

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

IdDocument


PARTS No.AppNAME

ap L–16.1 HM1 Aggregate 3AL 35853 AA––(411.100.372K)

–

aq S–16.1 HM1 Aggregate SC 3AL 35853AB––(411.100.458 J)

–

ar L–16.2 JE1 HM1 Aggregate 3AL 35854 AA––(411.100.373L)

–

as L–16.2 JE1 HM1 Aggregate SC 3AL 35854AB––(411.100.461 D)

–

at L–16.2 JE2 HM1 Aggregate 3AL 35855 AA––(411.100.374M)

–

au L–16.2 JE2 HM1 Aggregate SC 3AL 35855AB––(411.100.462 E)

–

av 21x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm RETIMINGTRIB

3AL 35905 AB(411.100.656 Q)

–

aw 21x2 Mbit/s 120 ohm RETIMINGTRIB

3AL 35905 AC(411.100.657 R)

–

ax 3X34/45 Prot. Access Module1.0

3AL 36155AA––(487.156.448 G)

–

ay 3X34/45 Prot. Access Module1.6

3AL 36155AB––(487.156.444 U)

–

az 3X34/45 Prot. Access ModuleT43

3AL 36155AC––(487.156.449 H)

–

ba 140/STM–1 Prot. Access Module 1.0

3AL 36156AA––(487.156.445 V)

–

bb 140/STM–1 Prot. Access Module 1.6

3AL 36156AB––(487.156.446 W)

–

bc 140/STM–1 Prot. Access Module T43

3AL 36156AC––(487.156.447 X)

–

bd L–16.2 JE1.1 HM1 AggregateSC

3AL36516 AA––(411.100.507 C)

–

be S–16.1 ID Aggregate SC 3AL36516 AB––(411.100.513 Z)

–

bf S–16.1 Aggr. 61 FC ENHANC. 3AL36516 BA––(411.100.969 J)

–

bg S–16.1 Aggr. 61 SC ENHANC. 3AL36516 BB––(411.100.975 G)

–

bh L–16.1 ID Aggregate FC 3AL36517 AA––(411.100.508 M)

–

bi L–16.1 ID Aggregate SC 3AL36517 AB––(411.100.514 S)

–

bj L–16.1 Aggr. 61 FC ENHANC. 3AL36517 BA––(411.100.970 P)

–

bk L–16.1 Aggr. 61 SC ENHANC. 3AL36517 BB––(411.100.976 H)

–

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

431

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

IdDocument


PARTS No.AppNAME

bl L–16.2 ID Aggregate FC 3AL36518 AA––(411.100.509 N)

–

bm L–16.2 ID Aggregate SC 3AL36518 AB––(411.100.515 T)

–

bn L–16.2 Aggr. 61 ENHANC.FC

3AL36518 BA––(411.100.971 C)

–

bo L–16.2 Aggr. 61 ENHANC.SC

3AL36518 BB––(411.100.977 A)

–

bp L–16.2 JE1 ID Aggregate FC 3AL36519 AA––(411.100.510 A)

–

bq L–16.2 JE1 ID Aggregate SC 3AL36519 AB––(411.100.516 U)

–

br L–16.2 JE1 Aggr.61ENHANCED FC

3AL36519 BA––(411.100.972 D)

–

bs L–16.2 JE1 Aggr.61ENHANCED SC

3AL36519 BB––(411.100.978 K)

–

bt L–16.2 JE2 ID Aggregate FC 3AL36520 AA––(411.100.511 X)

–

bu L–16.2 JE2 ID Aggregate SC 3AL36520 AB––(411.100.517 V)

–

bv L–16.2 JE2 Aggr.61ENHANCED FC

3AL36520 BA––(411.100.973 E)

–

bw L–16.2 JE2 Aggr.61ENHANCED SC

3AL36520 BB––(411.100.979 L)

–

bx L–16.2 JE3 ID Aggregate FC 3AL36521 AA––(411.100.512 Y)

–

by L–16.2 JE3 ID Aggregate SC 3AL36521 AB––(411.100.518 E)

–

bz L–16.2 JE3 Aggr.61ENHANCED FC

3AL36521 BA––(411.100.974 F)

–

ca L–16.2 JE3 Aggr.61ENHANCED SC

3AL36521 BB––(411.100.980 A)

–

cb L–16.2 JE3 HM1 Aggregate SC 3AL36561AA––(411.100.520C)

–

cc L–16.2 JE3 HM1 Aggregate FC 3AL36561AB––(411.100.643 K)

–

cd DVB Tributary 3AL 37450AA––(411.100.641 R)

–

ce L–16 Agg. 192.3 SC 6400 3AL37615 AA––(411.100.710 J)

–

cf L–16 Agg. 192.5 SC 6400 3AL37615 AB––(411.100.711 F)

–

cg L–16 Agg. 192.7 SC 6400 3AL37615 AC––(411.100.712 G)

–

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

432

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

IdDocument


PARTS No.AppNAME

ch L–16 Agg. 192.9 SC 6400 3AL37615 AD––(411.100.713 H)

–

ci L–16 Agg. 193.1 SC 6400 3AL37615 AE––(411.100.714 A)

–

cj L–16 Agg. 193.3 SC 6400 3AL37615 AF––(411.100.715 B)

–

ck L–16 Agg. 193.5 SC 6400 3AL37615 AG––(411.100.716 C)

–

cl L–16 Agg. 193.7 SC 6400 3AL37615 AH––(411.100.717 D)

–

cm L–16 Agg. 194.3 SC 6400 3AL37615 AL––(411.100.718 N)

–

cn L–16 Agg. 194.5 SC 6400 3AL37615 AM––(411.100.719 P)

–

co L–16 Agg. 194.7 SC 6400 3AL37615 AN––(411.100.720 L)

–

cp L–16 Agg. 194.9 SC 6400 3AL37615 AP––(411.100.721 H)

–

cq L–16 Agg. 195.1 SC 6400 3AL37615 AQ––(411.100.722 A)

–

cr L–16 Agg. 195.3 SC 6400 3AL37615 AR––(411.100.723 B)

–

cs L–16 Agg. 195.5 SC 6400 3AL37615 AS––(411.100.724 C)

–

ct L–16 Agg. 195.7 SC 6400 3AL37615 AT––(411.100.725 D)

–

cu STM16 Agg.61 192.3/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BA––(411.100.981 X)

–

cv STM16 Agg.61 192.5/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BB––(411.100.982 Y)

–

cw STM16 Agg.61 192.7/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BC––(411.100.983 Z)

–

cx STM16 Agg.61 192.9/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BD––(411.100.984 S)

–

cy STM16 Agg.61 193.1/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BE––(411.100.985 T)

–

cz STM16 Agg.61 193.3/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BF––(411.100.986 U)

–

da STM16 Agg.61 193.5/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BG––(411.100.987 V)

–

db STM16 Agg.61 193.7/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BH––(411.100.988 E)

–

dc STM16 Agg.61 194.3/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BL––(411.100.989 F)

–

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

433

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

IdDocument


PARTS No.AppNAME

dd STM16 Agg.61 194.5/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BM––(411.100.990 C)

–

de STM16 Agg.61 194.7/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BN––(411.100.991 Z)

–

df STM16 Agg.61 194.9/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BP––(411.100.992 S)

–

dg STM16 Agg.61 195.1/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BQ––(411.100.993 T)

–

dh STM16 Agg.61 195.3/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BR––(411.100.994 U)

–

di STM16 Agg.61 195.5/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BS––(411.100.995 V)

–

dj STM16 Agg.61 195.7/6400ENHANCED SC

3AL37615 BT––(411.100.996 W)

–

dk 21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary 3AL37718 AA––(411.100.871 G)

–

3x34 Mbit/s Trib. a 3AL 34020 AA––(487.155.306 H)

3AL 34020 AAAAMSZZQ

DS Future Bus Termination 3AL 34024 AA––(487.156.367E)

3AL 34024 AAAAMSZZQ

3x45 Mbit/s TRIB i 3AL 34025 AA––(487.156.313 Y)

3AL 34025 AAAAMSZZQ

Card Controller TRIB/2

x–a–fi–e

g– ae–ak–

v–w–av–aw–cd

3AL 34055 AA––(483.100.046 H)

3AL 34055 AAAAMSZZQ

Card Controller LAP 1/2h–k–l–s–t–af–ag

u–b–jm–ah–aj–ai

3AL 34056 AA––(483.100.047 A)

3AL 34056 AAAAMSZZQ

140/STM1 Tributary b 3AL 34335 AA––(483.100.067 E)

3AL 34335 AAAAMSZZQ

34/2 TRANS.MUX & 5x2 Mbit/sTrib.

x 3AL 34477 AA––(483.100.081 V)

3AL 34477 AAAAMSZZQ

Equipment Controller SMEC2 aa 3AL 34649AA––(487.156.720C)

3AL 34649 AAAAMSZZQ

21x2 Mbit/s TRIB 120 ohm g 3AL 34691 AA––(487.156.343 E)

3AL 34691 AAAAMSZZQ

21x2 Mbit/s TRIB 75 ohm f 3AL 34693 AA––(487.156.344 F)

3AL 34693 AAAAMSZZQ

Enhanced CRU ae 3AL 34788 AA––(487.156.617 Z)

3AL 34788 AAAAMSZZQ

L–1.2 Trib. FC –ah 3AL 34919 AA––(487.156.358 M)

3AL 34919 AAAAMSZZQ

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

434

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

IdDocument


PARTS No.AppNAME

Power Supply 3AL 34963 AA––(478.120.804 L)

3AL 34963 AAABMSZZQ

L–1.2 Trib. Optic 600 aj 3AL 35715 AA––(487.156.366 D)

3AL 35715 AAAAMSZZQ

STM–16 HM1 Aggregateal–an–ap

ar–at–cb–aq–am–ao–as–au–cc

3AL 35798 AA––(487.156.371A)

3AL 35798 AAAAMSZZQ

Enhanced CRU ak 3AL 35809AA––(487.156.383X)

3AL 35809 AAAAMSZZQ

21 x 2 Mbit/s Trib. 120 OHM Re-timing

aw3AL 35906 AA

(483.100.125 V)3AL 35906 AAAA

MSZZQ

PBA Optical Trib 600 s–u–af–ag– 3AL 36009 AA––(487.156.398 E)

3AL 36009 AAAAMSZZQ

PBA LAP_QE

bd–be–bf–bg–bh–bi–bj–bk–bl–bm–bn–bo–bp–bq–bs–br–bt–bu–bx–bv–by–bz–ca–ce–cf–cg–ch–ci–cj–ck–cl–cm–cn–co–cp–cq–cr–cs–ct–cu–cv–cw–

cx–cy–cz–da–db–dc–dd–de–df–

dg–dh–di–dj

3AL 36110 AA––(483.100.134 W)

3AL 36110 AAAAMSZZQ

Alarm Interface Acc. Module 3AL 36162 AA––(487.156.443 T)

3AL 36162 AAAAMSZZQ

Switch Module 34 Mbit/s ay–ax–az 3AL 36166 AA––(487.156.622 W)

3AL 36166 AAAAMSZZQ

STM 4 Aggregate c–d–n–o–p–q–r–y–z–ab–ac–ad–

3AL 36264 AA––(487.156.509 E)

3AL 36264 AAAAMSZZQ

AUX EOW unit v–w 3AL 36340 AA––(483.100.157 D)

3AL 36340 AAAAMSZZQ

STM 16 ID Aggregate

bd–be–bh–bi–bl–bm–bp–bq–bt–

bu–bx–by–ce–cf–cg–ch–ci–cj–ck–cl–cm–cn–co–cp–cq–cr–cs–ct

3AL 36389 AA––(487.156.511 P)

3AL 36389 AAAAMSZZQ

Optical STM1 Trib h–j–k–l–m–t–ah 3AL 37290 AA–– (487.156.553 Z )

3AL 37290 AAAA MSZZQ

DVB Tributary cd 3AL 37422AA–– (483.100.180 H)

3AL 37422 AAAA MSZZQ

21 x 2 Mbit/s Trib. 75 OHMRetiming

av3AL 37472 AA

(483.100.186 T)3AL 37472 AAAA

MSZZQ

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

435

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

IdDocument


PARTS No.AppNAME

CMI Switch Module (140 Mbit/s) ba–bb–bc 3AL 37474 AA––(487.156.652C)

3AL 37474 AAAAMSZZQ

Power Access Module/2 3AL 37480 AA––(487.156.563 T)

3AL 37480 AAAAMSZZQ

PBA Colored Expansion

bd–be–bf–bg–bh–bi–bj–bk–bl–bm–bn–bo–bp–bq–br–bs–bt–bu–bv–bw–bx–by–bz–ca–ce–cf–cg–ch–ci–cj–ck–cl–cm–cn–co–cp–cq–cr–cs–ct–cu–cv–cw–cx–cy–cz–da–db–dc–dd–de–df–dg–dh–di–dj-

3AL 37486AA––(483.100.189 E)

3AL 37486 AAAAMSZZQ

21x1.5 Mbit/s Tributary dk3AL 37717AA ––(487.156.487 Q)

3AL 37717 AAAAMSZZQ

Microswitches ”ON” position3AL 37747 0001(962.000.022 F)

3AL 37747 0001MSZZQ

STM 16 ID Aggregate Enhanced

bf–bg–bj–bk–bn–bo–br–bs–bv–bw–bz–ca–cu–cv–

cw–cx–cy–cz–da–db–dc–dd–de–df–dg–dh–di–dj-

3AL 37756 AA––(487.156.594 K)

3AL 37756 AAAAMSZZQ

All

right

s re

serv

ed. P

assi

ng o

n an

d co

pyin

g of

this

docu

men

t, us

e an

d co

mm

unic

atio

n of

its

cont

ents

not p

erm

itted

with

out w

ritte

n au

thor

izat

ion

from

Alc

atel

.

ED

1AA

000

14 0

004

(900

7) A

4 –

ALI

CE

04.

10

436

07

955.100.562 K

/3AL 36668 AA AA

436

436

END OF DOCUMENT

Documents

1651SM & 1661SMC Operator Handbook R2.5.1 & R1.5.1